account of a voyage of discovery to the west coast of corea, and the ...

ACCOUNTOFA VOYAGE OF DISCOVERYTO THEWEST COAST OF COREA,ANDTHE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND;AN A PPENDIX,CONTAININGCHARTS, AND VARIOUS HYDROGRAPHICAL AND SCIENTIFIC NOTICES.60S:S.BY CAPTAIN BASIL HALL,HOYAL NAVY, F. H. S. LOND. & EDIN.MEMBEH OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF CALCUTTA, OF THE UTERAHY SOCIETY OF BOMBAY,AND OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES AT BATAVIA.PANDA VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE,iBY H. J. CLIFFORD, ESQ.LIEUTENANT HOYAL NAVY.LONDON:JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET.1818.

CAPTAIN MURRAY MAXWELL,i$nig$t CDotnpanionTO WHOSEABILITY IN CONDUCTING THIS VOYAGE,ZEAL IN GIVING ENCOURAGEMENT TO EVERY INQUIRY,SAGACITY IN DISCOVERING THE DISPOSITION OF THE NATIVES,AND ADDRESS IN GAINING THEIR CONFIDENCE AND GOOD WILL,IS TO BE ATTRIBUTEDWHATEVER MAY BE FOUND INTERESTING OR USEFULIN THE FOLLOWING PAGES,TOTHIS WORKIS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,BYTHE AUTHORS,f1

PREFACE.THE following work contains a Narrative of theVoyage to the West Coast of Corea, and theGreat Loo-choo Island; an Appendix, containingNautical details: and a Vocabulary of the Laii-J . vguage spoken at Loo-choo.In drawing up the Narrative from journalswritten at the time, I have derived great assistance from notes made by Lieutenant H. J.Clifford, of the Navy. This officer obtainedpermission from the Admiralty to accompanyme, though on half pay, and having no specificduty to perform, he was enabled to devote himself entirely to the acquisition of knowledge;and had it in his power to record many interesting occurrences of the voyage, which the nu-

V1UPREFACE.merous duties of my station left me but littleleisure to observe or describe.All the Charts, Tables, and Nautical Noticeshave been placed in an Appendix, in order toavoid the interruption which such details are aptto occasion when inserted in a journal; and theNautical reader will perhaps consider it advantageous, to have this part of the subject setapart, and condensed, instead of being scatteredover the pages of the narrative.I am indebted to Mr. Clifford for very important assistance in collecting and arranging thematerials which form this Appendix.The,northern part of the Chart of the YellowSea, given in the Appendix, was taken from aChart by Captain Daniel Ross, of the Bombaymarine, the scientific and able surveyor commanding the squadron which the HonourablePREFACE.East India Company, in the spirit of a liberaland enlarged policy, have employed for upwardsof nine years, in surveying the China Seas.The Vocabulary is exclusively compiled byMr. Clifford, who took the greatest pains tocollect words and sentences in common use;and though, from the shortness of our stay, thispart of the work is necessarily incomplete, it ishoped that a future voyager will derive considerable assistance from it, in his intercourse withthe natives.The drawings of scenery and costume weremade by Mr. William Havell, the eminent artistwho accompanied the Embassy, from sketchestaken on the spot, by Mr. C. W. Browne, midshipman of the Alceste, and myself.Nothing respecting the west side of Coreahas hitherto been accurately known to Europeans.bIX

X PREFACE.The coast laid down in most Charts has beentaken from the celebrated map of the Jesuits,which is very correct in what relates to China.«/ 'but erroneous with respect to Corea. The Jesuits, indeed, did not survey this country, buthave inserted it in their map, I believe, fromJapanese authorities.PREFACE. XIsionary, on the subject of the Loo-choo Islands,in the 23d vol. of the " Lettres Edifiantes etCurieuses." It is a translation from the officialreport of a Chinese embassador sent to Loo-chooby the Emperor Kang Hi; our opportunities,however, were not sufficient to enable us to judgeof the accuracy of this curious memoir.Captain Broughton in his voyage to theNorth Pacific Ocean visited the South Coast ofCorea, and his account of the inhabitants agreeswith ours in most particulars.The same distinguished voyager visited theGreat Loo-choo Island in 1797? after havingbeen shipwrecked near Typinsan, one of its dependant islands. He was at Napakiang for afew days, and his account of the natives is highlyinteresting.There is an article by Pere Gaubil, a mis-

CONTENTS.NARRATIVE.CHAPTER I.H. M. S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of Discovery—Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea—Unsociable Character of the Natives—Button's Island—Interesting geological Structure—Anchor near the Main Land—Corean Chief's Visit—Objections made toStrangers landing—Distress of the Chief—His Character—Departure fromBasil's Bay—Clusters of Islands—Murray's Sound—Deserted Corean Village—View from the Summit of a high Peak—Interview with the Coreans—Peculiarities of their Character—Language—Erroneous geographical Position of this Coast—Leave Corea , . . Page 1CHAPTER II.Enter the Japan Sea—Sulphur Island—Volcano—See the Great Loo-chooIsland—Lyra nearly wrecked—First Interview with the Natives—Anchorat Napakiang—Natives crowd on Board—Their interesting Appearanceand Manners—Several Chiefs visit the Alceste—Land to make Observations—Astonishment of the Natives—Six Chiefs visit the Ships—Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore—A Chief of high Rank waitsupon Captain Maxwell—Return his Visit—Feast—Projected Survey of theAnchorage—Visit Reef Island—The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour.1

XIV CONTENTS.—Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores—Description of the Templeand Garden—First Acquaintance with Madera—Study of the Language 58CHAPTER III.The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo—Discovery of Port Melville—Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its Banks—Lyranearly wrecked—Interview with Natives at the South Point—Return toNapakiang—Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's Funeral—Mfidera'sCharacter and Conduct—Sociable Habits of the Natives—Dinner given tothe Chiefs of the Island by Captain Maxwell—Modern's Behaviour on thisOccasion—Two Women seen—A Lady of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife—Captain Maxwell fractures his Finger—Loo-choo Surgeon—Concern ofthe Natives—Visit of the Prince—Discussion about the King of Loo-choo'sLetter—Mddera appears in a new Character—Feast given by the Prince—List of Supplies given to the Ships—Behaviour of the Prince on takingLeave—Preparations for Departure—M&dera's Distress—Last Interview withthe Chiefs—Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customsof Loo-choo—Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island . . 135CONTENTS. xvlected at Macao and the Ladrone Islands, on the Shores of the Yellow Sea,the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo Island . . cxixVOCABULARY.PART I.—English and Loo-choo words.PABT II.—Sentences in English and Loo-choo, with a literal Translation.Loo-choo and Japanese Numerals—Names of Persons at Napakiang—Namesof Places—Days of the Moon—Orders of Rank—Tattoo Marks—Hours ofthe Day.Comparison between the Japanese and Loo-choo Languages.Comparison between the Loo-choo and Insu Languages.Comparison between the Loo-choo, Japanese, and Insu Languages.Corean Words.APPENDIX.Notice explanatory of a Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee . . vNotice to accompany the Chart of the West Coast of Corea . . xNotice to accompany the general Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island in theJapan Sea, and the Charts of Napakiang Roads and Port Melville . xviiObservations made at the Observatory at Napakiang . . xxixTable of Observations made with Dr. Wolkston's Dip Sector: with an Engraving, and a Description of this Instrument, and Directions for itsUse ...... xxxiMeteorological Journal, from July to November 1816, while the Ships werein the Yellow and Japan Seas ..... liAbstract of the Lyra's Voyage, from leaving England tilljier Return; shewing the Distance between the different Places at which she touched, and theTime taken in performing each Passage . . . cixGeological Memorandum; being a Description of the Specimens of Rocks col-

tDIRECTIONS FOR PLACING THE PLATES.VOYAGESulphur Island, to face the Title Page.Corean Chief and SecretaryNapakiangLoo-choo Chief and his two SonsPriest and Gentleman of Loo-chooThe Prince of Loo-chooScene after the Prince's FeastGentleman of Loo-choo in his CloakBridge of NapakiangTo face Page 16. 77. 97. 132. 176. 196. 215TO THEWEST COAST OF COREA AND THE LOO-CHOOISLANDS.APPENDIX.Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-leeCoast of CoreaChart of the Great Loo-choo IslandNapakiang Roads . • .Port MelvilleWollaston's Dip SectorERRATA.Page 1, line 2 from bottom, for l lth August, read Qth August.Page 60, top line, for was, read saw.vXxixxxi. xxivxxxiiiAPPENDIX.Meteorological Journal.—Longitude on the 1st Sept. for 124.20, read 124.48.The longitudes in the Met. Journ. from the 3d to the 7th of Sept. inclusive aretoo small by 15'.VOCABULARY.For Tatesee, read Tatsee.For Teetesep, read Teetsee.For Meetesee, read Meetsee.For Eeotesee, read Eeotsee.For Eeyatesee, read Eeyatsee.For opposite, read under, in the note on the word Hour.CHAPTER I.H. M. S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of Discovery—Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea—Unsociable Character of theNatives—Button's Island—Interesting geological Structure—Anchor nearthe Main Land—Corean Chiefs Visit—Objections made to Strangers landing—Distress of the Chief—His Character—Departure from Basil's Bay—Clusters of Islands—Murray's Sound—Deserted Corean Village—View fromthe Summit of a high Peak—Interview with the Coreans—Peculiarities oftheir Character—Language—Erroneous geographical Position of this Coast—Leave Corea.THE embassy to China, under the Right Honourable LordAmherst, left England in his Majesty's frigate Alceste,Captain Murray Maxwell, C. B., on the 9th of February,1816, and landed near the mouth of the Pei-ho river, in theYellow Sea, on the llth of August. Shortly afterwards theAlceste and Lyra sloop of war, which had accompanied theB

VOYAGE TO THEembassy, proceeded to the coast of Corea, the easternboundary of the Yellow Sea; for as these ships were notrequired in China before the return of the Embassador byland to Canton, it was determined to devote the intervalto an examination of some places in those seas, of whichlittle or no precise information then existed. The followingpages give the details of this voyage.1st of September.—This morning at daylight the landof Corea was seen in the eastern quarter. Having stoodtowards it, we were at nine o'clock near three high islands,differing in appearance from the country we had left, beingwooded to the top, and cultivated in the lower parts, butnot in horizontal terraces as at the places we had last visited•in China. We proceeded to the southward of the group,and anchored in a fine bay at the distance of two or threemiles from the southern island. Shortly after anchoring, atoat came from the shore with five or six natives, whostopped, when within fifty yards of the brig, and looking atus with an air of curiosity and distrust, paid no attention tothe signs which were made to induce them to come alongside. They expressed no alarm when we went to them inOur boat; and on our rowing towards the shore, followed u&till we landed near a village. The inhabitants came in abody to meet us, forming an odd assemblage, different inCOAST OF COREA.many respects from any thing we had seen; their colourwas a deep copper, and their appearance forbidding, andsomewhat savage. Some men, who appeared to be superiorto the rest, were distinguished by a hat, the brim of whichwas nearly three feet in diameter, and the crown, which wasabout nine inches high, and scarcely large enough to admitthe top of the head, was shaped like a sugar-loaf with theend cut off. The texture of this strange hat is of a fineopen work like the dragon-fly's wing; it appears to bemade of horse-hair varnished over, and is fastened underthe chin by a band strung with large beads, mostly blackand white, but occasionally red or yellow. Some of theelderly men wore stiff gauze caps over their hair, which wasformed into a high conical knot on the top of the head.Their dress consisted of loose wide trowsers, and a sort offrock reaching nearly to the knee, made of a coarse open grasscloth, and on their feet neat straw sandals. They were ofthe middle size, remarkably well made, and robust looking.At first they expressed some surprise on examining ourclothes, but afterwards took very little interest in any thingbelonging to us. Their chief anxiety was to get rid of usas soon as possible. This they expressed in a manner tooobvious to be mistaken; for, on our wishing to enter thevillage, they first made motions for us to go the other way;II

1 • Ill4 VOYAGE TO THEand when we persevered, they took us rudely by the armsand pushed us off. Being very desirous to conciliate them,we shewed no impatience at this treatment; but our forbearance had no effect; and after a number of vain attempts to make ourselves understood, we went away notmuch pleased at their behaviour. A Chinese *, who accompanied us, was of no use, for he could not read what theCoreans wrote for him, though in the Chinese character;and of their spoken language he did not understand a word.On leaving these unsociable villagers, we went to the topof the highest peak on the island, the ascent being easy bya winding foot-path. From this elevation we saw a numberof islands to the eastward, and the main land at a great/distance beyond them. The top of the hill being coveredwith soft grass and sweet-smelling shrubs, and the air,which had been of a suffocating heat below, being herecool and refreshing, we were tempted to sit down to ourpic-nic dinner. We returned by the other side of the hill;but there being no path, and the surface rocky and steep,and covered with a thick brush-wood, we were not a littlescratched and bruised before we reached a road which runsalong the north face of the hill about midway. By following this, we came to a spot from whence we were en-* A servant of the embassy, left behind by accident at the Pei-ho river.COAST OF COREA. 5abled to look down upon the village, without being ourselvestperceived by the natives. The women, who had deserted thevillage on our landing, had now returned ; most of them werebeating rice in wooden mortars, and they had all childrentied on their backs.On a sudden they quitted their workand ran off to their huts, like rabbits in a warren; and ina few minutes we saw one of the ship's boats row round thepoint of land adjacent to the village, which explained thecause of their alarm.After remaining for some time inexpectation of seeing the women again, we caine down tothe village, which the natives now permitted' us to passthrough. On this occasion one of the gentlemen of our partysaw, for an instant, a woman at no great distance, whose feethe declared were of the natural size, and not cramped asin China.The village consists of forty houses rudely constructed of reeds plaistered with mud, the roofs are of allshapes, and badly thatched with reeds and straw, tied downby straw ropes. These huts are not disposed in streets, butare scattered about without order, and without any neatness,or cleanliness, and the spaces between them are occupied bypiles of dirt and pools of muddy water. The valley in whichthis comfortless village is situated is, however, pretty enough,though not wooded; the hills forming it are of an irregularshape, and covered at top with grass and sweet-scentedflowers; the lower parts are cultivated with millet, buck-

VOYAGE TO THE COAST OF COREA.wheat, a kind of French bean* and tobacco, which last growsin great quantity; and here and there is a young oak-tree.We saw bullocks and poultry* but the natives wouldnot exchange them for our money, or for any thing we hadto offer. They refused dollars when offered as a present,and, indeed, appeared to set no value upon any thing weshewed them, except wine glasses; but even these theywere unwilling to receive. One of the head men appearedparticularly pleased with a glass, which, after a good deal ofpersuasion, he accepted, but, in about five minutes after,he, and another man to whom a tumbler had been given,came back and insisted upon returning the presents; andthen, without waiting for further persuasion, returned tothe village, leaving with us only one man, who, as soon asall the rest were out of sight, accepted one of the glasseswith much eagerness.These people have a proud sort of carriage, with an airof composure and indifference about them, and an absenceof curiosity which struck us as being very remarkable.Sometimes when we succeeded, by dint of signs and drawings, in expressing the nature of a question, they treated*it with derision and insolence. On one occasion, beinganxious to buy a clumsy sort of rake made of reeds,which appeared to me curious, I succeeded in explainingmy wish to the owner, one of the lowest class of villagers ; he laughed at first good humouredly, but immediately afterwards seized the rake which was in my hand,and gave it a rude push towards me with a disdainful flingof the arm, accompanying this gesticulation by words,which seemed to imply a desire to give any thing uponcondition of our going away. One man expressed thegeneral wish for our departure, by holding up a piece ofpaper like a sail, and then blowing upon it in the directionof the wind, at the same time pointing to the ships, therebydenoting that the wind was fair, and that we had only toset sail and leave the island. Several of the people weremarked with the small-pox. The children kept out of ourreach at first, but before we went away, their fears had,in some degree, subsided, for the boys, who, from theirfeminine appearance, were mistaken at first for girls, accompanied us to some distance from the village.Captain Maxwell named these islands Sir James Hall'sgroup, in compliment to the President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. They lie in longitude 124° 46' E. andlatitude 37° 30' N.At eight o'clock in the evening we weighed and stood tothe southward, but as the coast was quite unknown, we keptrather offshore during the night, and in the morning no landwas in sight. On the 2d we stood to the eastward, but notI

8 VOtAGE TO THEhaving daylight enough to get in with the coast, it becamenecessary to anchor for the night, though in deep water.3d of September.—Having reached nearly lat. 361 N.and long. 126 E. we sailed this morning amongst a rangeof islands extending as far as the eye could reach, both tothe southward and northward, at the distance of six orseven leagues from the main land.By two o'clock wewere close to the outer cluster of the islands, and the passages appearing clear between them, we sailed throughand anchored inside.While passing one of these islandsin the ships, at no great distance, it looked so curiouslyformed, that, on anchoring, we went in the boats to examineits structure more minutely *. While we were thus engaged,* We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained granite; themiddle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a deep blue colour; thestrata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to the S. W. This body of stratais cut across by a granite dyke, at some places forty feet wide, at others notabove ten; the strata in the vicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner; this dislocation and contortion does not extend far from thewalls of the dyke, but veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance,varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: the dyke isvisible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but does not re-appear onthe corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it, though distant only thirtyyards. This island is composed of the same schistus, and is cut in a verticaldirection by a whin dyke, four feet wide, the planes of whose sides lie N. E.and S. W., being at right angles to those of the great granite dyke in the neighbourhood, which run S. E. and N. W. The strata contiguous to the whindyke are a good deal twisted and broken, but not in the same degree as at theircontact with the granite dyke.COAST OF COREA. 9the natives had assembled in a crowd on the edge of thecliff above us; they did not seem pleased with our occupation of breaking their rocks, for, from the moment weThe whin dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in theusual way. Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the distance ofonly forty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising abruptly out of the sea, andpresenting a high rugged cliff of breccia, fronting that on which the granite dykeis so conspicuous: the junction of this rock with the schistus cut by the graniteand the whin would have been interesting; but although we must have been attimes within a few yards of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea,The whole of the S. W. end of this island is formed of breccia, being an assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus, quartz, and some otherrocks, the whole having the appearance of a great shingle beach. The fragmentsof the schistus in this rock are similar to that which forms the cliff first spoken of.The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the great massof strata which forms the centre of the island was formerly at the bottom of theocean; and that the western part, which is now a firm breccia, had been a beachshingle produced by the action of the waves on the strata: the granite whichforms the eastern end of the island had been forced into its present situationfrom beneath the strata, with sufficient violence to dislocate and contort the bedsnearest to it, and to inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heavingaction of the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that the raggededges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would be subjected 'to agrinding action, from which the strata more remote might be exempted; and inthis way we may account for the extraordinary twisting, and separation of massesalong the whole course of the granite dyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veinswhich branch from it, there are numerous islands of schistus. That this lastwas softened, seems to follow from the frequent instances which occur of itsbeing bent back upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat, propagated by the melted granite in the neighbourhood, may also be supposed tohave reduced the shingle beach to a state of semifusion by the aid of some fluxcontained in the sand scattered amongst it. We could not discover any circumstance by which the relative antiquity of the two dykes mentioned above, couldbe ascertained.

VOYAGE TO THE COAST OF COREA. 11landed, they never ceased to indicate by shouts, screams,and all kinds of gesticulations, that the sooner we quittedthe island the better; the cliff being 200 feet high, andnearly perpendicular, it was fortunate for us that they conn-fined themselves to signs and clamour, and did not think ofenforcing their wishes by a shower of stones.As soon as we had completed our investigation of thisspot, we went round in the boats to a small bay where therewas good landing. Here we were met by the natives, whoaddressed several long speeches to us in a very loud tone ofvoice; to which we replied in English, that our wish wasmerely to look at the island, without interfering with anybody; at the same time we proceeded up a foot-path tothe brow of a hill. This the natives did not seem at all torelish, and they made use of a sign which was sufficientlyexpressive of their anxiety, though we could not determineexactly to whom it referred. They drew their fans acrosstheir own throats, and sometimes across ours, as if tosignify that our going on would lead to heads being cutoff; but whether they or we were to be the sufferers wasnot apparent. It was suggested by one of our party thatthey dreaded being called to account by their own chiefsfor permitting us to land. All these signs, however, did notprevent our advancing till we had reached the brow of the\l\c\hill to which the path led; from this place we had a viewof a village at the distance of half a mile, of a much betterappearance than that above described. Trees were interspersed among the houses, which were pleasantly situatedat the bottom of a little cove, with fishing-boats at anchornear it. We explained readily enough that our wish was togo to the village, but it was all in vain, for their anxietyincreased every moment, and we desisted from any furtherattempts to advance.The dress of these people is a loose white robe, clothshoes, and a few wear the broad hats before described; bymost the hair is tied in a high conical knot on the top ofthe head, but by others it is allowed to fly loose, so as togive them a wild appearance. Some confine the short hairby a small gauze band with a star on one side, forming, alongwith the top knot, rather a becoming head-dress. Theirbeards and whiskers which, apparently, had never been cut,and their fans and long tobacco-pipes, and their strangelanguage and manners, gave a grotesque air to the wholegroup, which it is impossible to describe. They crowdedabout us, and, by repeated shouts, manifested their surpriseat the form and texture of our clothes; but on a watch beingshewn, they disregarded every thing else, and entreated tobe allowed to examine it closely. It was evidently the first

I V12 VOYAGE TO THEthey had seen, and some of them while watching the secondhand, looked as if they thought it alive. From the watchthey proceeded to examine the seals and keys; with theformer they shewed themselves acquainted by pressing themon their hands, so as to cause an impression. Their attentionwas drawn away from the watch by our firing a musket,which made the whole party fall back several paces.After amusing ourselves in this manner for some time,we walked back to the boats, to the great joy of the natives,who encouraged us by all means to hasten our departure.They took our hands and helped us over the slippery stoneson the beach; and, on perceiving one of the boats aground,several of them stript and jumped into the water to pushher off. This gave us an opportunity of observing their remarkable symmetry and firmness of limb; yet, as their longhair was allowed to flow about their neck and shoulders,their appearance was truly savage. During this visit we sawno women; but the children came round us without shewingany symptoms of fear. The people, upon the whole, aremore free, and not so surly as our acquaintance on Sir JamesHall's group. They have a singular custom of speaking witha loud tone, amounting almost to a shout. Captain Maxwell named this island after Dr. Hutton the geologist.4th of September.—During all last night it remained per-COAST OF COREA. 13fectly calm. At nine o'clock in the morning we got underweigh with a fine sea breeze, and stood in for the land,leaving on either hand many well cultivated islands. Themain land seems to be populous, from the number of largevillages Avhich we passed, and the cultivation which extendsa considerable way up the mountains. Our object thismorning was to discover some safe anchoring place in themain land, but we were obliged to coast along for a considerable distance before any opening appeared. About threeo'clock we sailed round a point of land and discovered a bay,which, at first sight, promised shelter, but the water provedtoo shallow even for the- Lyra, and we anchored far out infive fathoms. The natives who had assembled in crowds onthe point shouted to us as we passed, in seeming anger atour approaching so near. This bay is about four miles indiameter, and is skirted by large villages built amongsttrees, and surrounded by cultivated districts, forming altogether a scene of considerable beauty.As soon as the Alceste had anchored, Captain Maxwell,Mr. Clifford, and I, went towards the nearest village inthe bay. On approaching the shore we observed a great -bustle among the inhabitants on the shore, as well as in theboats at anchor off the village. The people on the beachhastily jumped into canoes, whilst those in the large boatsweighed the anchors, and pulled out with such expedition, as

14 VOYAGE TO THEto meet us in a body before we were near the landing-place.Every boat was crowded with people, and ornamented withnumerous flags and streamers; but one of them being distinguished by a large blue umbrella, we steered towardsit, on the supposition that this was an emblem of rank; inwhich opinion we were soon confirmed by the sound ofmusic, which played only on board this boat. On comingcloser, we saw a fine patriarchal figure seated under the umbrella ', his full white beard covered his breast, and reachedbelow his middle; his robe or mantle, which was of bluesilk, and of an immense size, flowed about him in a magnificent style. His sword was suspended from his waist bya small belt, but the insignia of his office appeared to bea slender black rod tipped with silver, about a foot and ahalf long, with a small leather thong at one end, and apiece of black crape tied to the other: this he held in hishand. His hat exceeded in breadth of brim any thing wehad yet met with, being, as we supposed, nearly three feetacross.As this was evidently the chief of the party, we pulledalongside and got into his boat, where he received us withmuch politeness; but as he looked dissatisfied at this proceeding, we returned to our own boat, and there carriedon the conference. While we were endeavouring to makeourselves understood, the other boats gradually separated,COAST OF COREA. 15and began to form a circle round us. Apprehendingtreachery, we prepared our arms, and pushed off to a littledistance. The old gentleman, perceiving this, looked aboutvery innocently to discover the cause of our alarm; and atlength being made aware by our signs of what was thematter, he commanded all the boats to go to the other side.We now remained a considerable time without being able tomake ourselves understood ; for the Chinese whom we hadwith us was quite ignorant of their language. We endeavoured, by pointing to the shore, to signify our desire toland, while the old Chief, by similar signs, expressed hiswish to go to the ships. We accordingly rowed to the Lyra,which lay nearer to the shore than the Alceste, When theChiefs boat was within ten yards of the brig, they let gotheir anchor, and threw a rope on board her, by which theydrew the boat alongside in a very seaman-like style. Theold man did not find it an easy matter to get up the ship'sside, encumbered as he was with his splendid robes; he wasno sooner on board, however, than we were crowded withthe natives, who boarded us on all sides. Some climbed upthe rigging, so as to overlook the quarter-deck; others goton the poop, and a line was formed along the hammocknetting from one end of the brig to the other. As the evening was fine, it was thought best to entertain the venerable

16 VOYAGE TO THEChief upon deck, rather than give him the trouble of goingdown to the cabin, which, indeed, we had reason to fearwould prove too small for the party. Chairs were accordingly placed upon the deck; but the Chief made signs thathe could not sit on a chair, nor would he consent for atime to use his mat, which was brought on board by one ofhis attendants. He seemed embarrassed and displeased,which we could not at the moment account for, though ithas since occurred to us that he objected to the publicityof the conference. At length, however, he sat down onhis mat, and began talking with great gravity and composure, without appearing in the smallest degree sensiblethat we did not understand a single word that he said. Weof course could not think of interrupting him, and allowedhim to talk on at his leisure; but when his discourse wasconcluded, he paused for our reply, which we made withequal gravity in English; upon this he betrayed great impatience at his harangue having been lost upon us, andsupposing that we could, at all events, read, he called tohis secretary, and began to dictate a letter. The secretarysat down before him with all due formality, and havingrubbed his cake of ink upon a stone, drawn forth his pen,and arranged a long roll of paper upon his knee, beganthe writing, which was at length completed, partly from theCOREAH CHIEF

COAST OF COREA. 17directions of the Chief, and partly from his own ideas, aswell as the occasional suggestions of the bystanders. Thewritten part was then torn off from the scroll and handedto the Chief, who delivered it to me with the utmost con_fidence of its being understood: but his mortification anddisappointment were extreme on perceiving that he hadoverrated our acquirements *.* Note on the peculiar character of the written language In that quarterof the globe.In China, Japan, Corea, and the islands in the adjacent seas, the spokenlanguages are different from one another; the written language, on the contrary, is the same in all. Thus a native of China is unintelligible to a Coreanor Japanese, while he is speaking, but they mutually understand one anotherwhen their thoughts are expressed in writing. The cause of this may be thusexplained. We in Europe form an idea in the mind, and this we express bycertain sounds, '.vhich differ in different countries; these sounds are committedto writing by means of the letters of the alphabet, which are only symbols ofsounds, and, consequently, a writing in Europe is unintelligible to every onewho is ignorant of the spoken language in which it happens to be written. TheChinese and the other natives in these seas have, on the contrary, no alphabet;no symbols of sounds; their ideas are committed to writing at once without theintervention of sound, and their characters may therefore be called symbols ofideas. Now, as the same characters are adopted in all these countries to expressthe same ideas, it is clear that their writings will be perfectly intelligible to eachother, although their spoken languages may be quite incomprehensible.The case of the Roman numerals in Europe furnishes a ready illustration ofthis symbolical language. There is nothing in the symbols 1, 2, 3, Sec. by whichtheir pronunciation can be ascertained when presented to the eye, yet they communicate meaning independent of sound, and are respectively intelligible to theinhabitants of the different countries of Europe; while, at the same time, thesounds by which a native of one country distinguishes the written symbols 1, %}&; &c. are unintelligible to all the rest.

VOYAGE TO THEA debate now appeared to take place between the Chiefand his followers, as to the mode of communicating with us;meanwhile, as we ourselves were equally at a loss, webecame anxious to relieve the old man's embarrassment,by shewing him all the attention in our power, and completely succeeded in putting him into a good humour, bygiving him some cherry brandy, and distributing rum tohis people.While these attempts at explanation were going on, thecrowd of natives increased, and their curiosity became sogreat, that they pressed round us in a way nowise agreeable. Some of them roved about the ship, and appearedhighly entertained with every thing they saw. The Chiefhimself, however, did not appear at ease, but continuedgiving directions to his officers and people about him withan air of impatience. He more than once ordered themall into their boats, but they always returned after a fewminutes. One man persevered in climbing over the ham-The knowledge of writing is supposed to be very generally diffused over thecountries using what is called the Chinese character, and, as probably none butthe lowest vulgar are ignorant of it, the surprise of these people on discoveringour inability to read their papers is very natural. The case, we may imagine,had never occurred to them before, and it was highly interesting to watch theeffect which so novel an incident produced. At first they appeared to doubt thefact of our ignorance, and shewed some symptoms of impatience; but thisopinion did not last long, and they remained completely puzzled, looking ateach other with an odd expression of surprise.COAST OF COREA. 19mocks, close to the Chief, to see what was going on. Thenoise made to keep him back attracted the Chiefs attention,who immediately gave orders to one of the attendants forhis being taken away; it will be seen by and by what washis fate.The persons forming the suite of the Chief were dressednearly in the same manner as himself, excepting that theirrobes were white, and did not contain such a profusion ofcloth. They wore the large hats and wide trowsers tiedabove the ancle, with cotton shoes turned up. a little at thetoe. The immediate attendants, who seemed also to besoldiers, were differently clothed: over a loose pink frockwith wide sleeves, they have another which fits closer, and iswithout sleeves, the corners being tucked up, like the skirtsof some military uniforms. Their hat is a broad flat conemade of thick grass, the under part being embossed withdifferent coloured silks, and from a gilt ornament on thepeak there hangs a tassel made of peacock's feathers, andanother of hair dyed red: some are armed with bows andarrows, others with only a straight sword, having no guardfor the hand. A coarse frock without sleeves, and trowsers,or rather drawers, covering the thigh, are worn by thelower orders.It was nearly dark when the Chief gave directions for

Iff•Jl20 VOYAGE TO THEpreparing the boats, at the same time calling to two of hisattendants to assist him to get on his legs. Each took anarm, and in this way^ succeeded in raising him up, whichwas no sooner observed by the people, than they^ jumpedinto their boats with the utmost alacrity, and the Chief,after many bows and salams, walked into his boat. Thisdid not give him so much trouble as he had experienced oncoming on board, for a platform of gratings and planks hadbeen prepared for his accommodation during his visit, anattention Avith which he seemed much pleased. So far allseemed well; but there was still something amiss, for the oldman, seated in state under his umbrella, remained alongsidewith his attendants ranged on the deck about him, he and hispeople preserving the most perfect silence, and making nosigns to explain his wishes. We were greatly puzzled todiscover what the old gentleman wanted, till at length itwas suggested, that having paid us a visit, he expected asimilar compliment in return. This idea was no soonerstarted, than we proceeded to pay^ our respects to him inhis boat. He made signs for us to sit down, honouring usat the same with a corner of his own mat. When we wereseated, he looked about as if in distress at having nothingto entertain us with, upon which a bottle of wine was sentfor and given to him. He ordered an attendant to pour itCOAST OF COREA. 21into several bowls, and putting the bottle away., made signsfor us to drink, but would not taste it himself till all of ushad been served. He was nowise discomposed at beingobliged to entertain his company at their own expense; on thecontrary, he carried off the whole affair with so much cheerfulness and ease, as to make us suspect sometimes that hesaw and enjoyed the oddity of the scene and circumstances,as fully as we did ourselves.After sitting about ten minutes, we left the Chief ingreat good humour, and returned on board, thinking, ofcourse, that he would go straight to the shore; but in thiswe were much mistaken, for we had no sooner left him,than he pushed off to the distance of ten or twelve yards,and calling the other boats round him, gave orders for inflicting the discipline of the bamboo upon the unfortunateculprit, who had been ordered into confinement during theconference. This exhibition, which it was evidently intended we should witness, had a very ludicrous effect, for itfollowed so much in train with the rest of the ceremony,and was carried on with so much gravity and order, that itlooked like an essential part of the etiquette. During the infliction of this punishment, a profound silence was observedby all the party, except by five or six persons immediatelyabout the delinquent, whose cries they accompanied by a

i r22 VOYAGE TO THEsort of song or yell at each blow of the bamboo. Thisspeedy execution of justice was, no doubt, intended toimpress us with high notions of Corean discipline.As it was now quite dark, we did not expect the Chiefto pay any more visits this evening; but we underrated hispoliteness, for the moment the above scene was concluded,he steered for the Alceste. Captain Maxwell, who during allthe time had been on board the Lyra, hurried into his boat tobe prepared to give him a proper reception in his ship, andhad just time to change his jacket for a coat and epaulettes,before the Chief arrived. After climbing up the ship's sidewith some difficulty, and being received in due form on thequarter-deck, which was lighted up, he was handed into theforemost cabin, where he was met by Captain Maxwell, andconducted to a seat in the after cabin. As he declinedsitting on a chair, he was obliged to wait for his mat, and,in the meantime, looked round him in amaze at the magnificence of the apartments. The change of dress made himbehave towards Captain Maxwell as to a perfect stranger;but the moment he recognised him, he appeared muchamused with his mistake, and his manners became less reserved. He now turned about to see what was become ofhis mat, and was astonished to find himself alone with us inthe'Cabin. It was then discovered that the sentry at theCOAST OF COREA. 23door, in repressing the crowd of his followers, had found itimpossible to distinguish his more immediate attendants,and had therefore allowed nobody to pass.The door being opened, the mat-bearer and four of theprincipal people were called in by the Chief; and when wewere all fairly seated on the deck, the secretary was directedto prepare a writing, which was dictated and delivered muchin the same manner as before. Whether the presentation ofa written paper was considered by the Chief as a necessarypiece of etiquette, or whether he really had more hopes ofbeing understood on this occasion than before, was quiteuncertain; but the mode adopted by Captain Maxwell toundeceive him was conclusive. He immediately called forpaper, and wrote upon it in English, " I do not understandone word that you say," and presented this paper in return,with all the forms and ceremonies that had been adoptedtowards himself. The Chief, on receiving it, examined thecharacters with great attention, and then made signs that itwas wholly unintelligible, alternately looking at the paperand at Captain Maxwell with an inquiring air, and wasonly made sensible of the awkward dilemma in which wewere placed, by observing Captain Maxwell repeat all hislooks and gestures as equally applicable to the Coreanwriting which he held in his hand*.* This paper, presented by the Corean Chief, has been translated by MrMomson at Canton, and is as follows: "Persons, of what land-of what

VOYAGE TO THEThe Chief had now recourse to signs, which he used everafterwards. He was in great spirits, and seemed entertainedwith the efforts which were made to please him. He asked tolook at a mirror which had caught his attention; when it wasput into his hands, he seemed very well satisfied with thefigure which it presented, and continued for some time pulling his beard from side to side with an air of perfect complacency. One of the attendants thought there could be noharm in looking at the mirror, likewise, but the Chief was ofa different opinion, and no sooner observed what he wasdoing, than he very angrily made him put down the glass andleave the cabin. The secretary too fell under his displeasure,and was reprimanded with much acrimony for overlooking ourpaper when we were writing. Scarcely five minutes elapsed,in short, during his stay, without his finding some cause ofcomplaint against his people; but we could not determinewhether this arose from mere captiousness, or was done togive us a higher notion of his consequence, because, in theintervals, he was all cheerfulness and good humour. Hewas offered tea and cherry brandy, which he took alongAvith us, and appeared at his ease in every respect. Wethought that he made signs, implying a wish for us to visithim on shore; to this we cheerfully assented, and an arrangement for landing in the morning was made accord-COAST OF COREA. 25ingly by means of similar signs, with which the Chief appeared' much pleased, and rose to go away.He had not got much beyond the cabin-door, however,before the serenity of his temper was once more overturned.On passing the gun-room sky-light, he heard the voices ofsome of his people whom the officers had taken below, andwho were enjoying themselves very merrily amongst theirnew acquaintance. The old Chief looked down, and observingthem drinking and making a noise, he called to them in aloud passionate voice, which made them leave their glasses,and run up the ladder in great terror. From thence thealarm spread along the lower deck, to the midshipmen'sbirth, where another party was carousing. The grog andwine with which they had been entertained was too potentfor this party, as they did not seem to care much for the oldChief, who, posting himself at the hatchway, ascertained,by personal examination, who the offenders were. On thisoccasion, his little rod of office was of much use; he pushedthe people about with it to make them speak, and used itto turn them round, in order to discover their faces. Oneman watching his opportunity when the Chief was punchingaway at somebody who had just come up, slipped past andran off; but the quick eye of the old man was not so easilydeceived, and he set off in chase of him round the quarter" nation (are you) ? On account of what business do you come hither ? In the" ship are there any literary men who thoroughly understand, and can explain" what is written?"

26 VOYAGE TO THEdeck. The man had an apron full of biscuit, which hadbeen given to him by the midshipmen; this impeded hisrunning, so that the Chief, notwithstanding his robes, at lastcame up with him; but while he was stirring him up withhis rod, the fellow slipped his cargo of bread into a coil ofrope, and then went along with the Chief quietly enough.The old man came back afterwards, and found the biscuit,which he pointed out to us, to shew that it had not beentaken away.He continued for some time at the hatchway, expectingmore people; but finding none come up, he went belowhimself, to the main deck, and rummaged under the gunsand round the main-mast, to discover whether any one wasconcealed ; but finding no person there, he came again upondeck, and shortly after went into his boat.On returning to the Lyra, we found a number of boatsanchored round her, which looked as if they meant to keepstrict watch over us. We went in our boat to one of them,where we found the crew asleep. They seemed to havehad orders not to follow the Chief to the frigate, and werehere waiting his return. On our pointing to the shore, andmaking signs that the old man with the long beard andlarge hat had landed, they began immediately to get theiranchor up, and called to the other boats to do the same.COAST OF COREA. 27In a few minutes they were all at work, and every personin the boats joined in repeating the two words " ho 37 a, ho ya,"the effect of which, from a great many voices, was notun pleasing.The cable in these boats is wound round a large reel orbarrel; to the ends of which two wheels with handles are fitted,which enables a considerable number to apply their strengthat the same moment. The anchor is made of a dark coloured,heavy wood, with a long shank and flukes, and a short stockcrossing the former, near the crown of the anchor, and notat the end of the shank, as with us in Europe. The matsails are divided into horizontal divisions by slender piecesof bamboo. When not under sail, the boats are moved byoars having a circular piece of wood tied to the end, and aresteered by a large scull over the stern. The bow is squareabove, but rises from the water in a slope, making a smallangle with the water, like the end of a coal barge, butoverhanging more. The planks are fastened together bymeans of square tree-nails, which pass in a slanting directionthrough the plank, and not straight, as with us.5th of September.—A considerable bustle was observedon shore at daybreak this morning; and shortly afterwards,we saw the old Chief and his suite embark, and pull towardsus, accompanied by a numerous fleet of smaller boats, all

I28 VOYAGE TO THEornamented with showy flags, and crowded with people ingay and bright coloured garments, forming, upon the whole,a splendid and imposing scene. As the procession movedslowly along, the band in the Chief's boat struck up a lively,martial sort of air, on instruments similar to those we hadheard last night; the tone of which is not unlike the drawlingsound of the bagpipe, the bass or drone being produced bya long horn, and the squeaking sounds by four trumpets,two of which have stops in the middle, by which the notesare distinctly marked.The Chiefs visit was so unexpectedly early, that we hadnot put things in order for his reception, before he wasalongside: he came on board, however, and seemed happyat being allowed to walk about the decks, and examineevery thing at his leisure. When the cabin was ready, andthe Chief seemed to have satisfied himself with lookinground the upper deck, he was asked to walk down ; whichhe complied with as soon as he understood what was meant.But he found it no easy matter to get down the narrowhatchway, in which there was barely room for his hat; butthis he would by no means take off. As he entered thecabin, his robes and hat completely filled the door-way;and when seated at the table, (for he now made no objectionto a chair) he occupied no inconsiderable portion of the?COAST OF COREA. 29whole apartment. He sat here for some time, and examinedevery thing in the cabin with great attention, pointing withthe little stick whenever he saw any thing which he wantedto look at more closely. In this way, the books, globes,glasses, &c. were put into his hands; and it was not a littleamusing to see the old gentleman wheeling the globesround, and hunting over the books for pictures, like a child.A person of rank who accompanied the Chief this morning,was asked to the cabin along with him ; and was no soonerseated, than we observed that he had a very sickly look;which circumstance was the cause of a curious mistake.It had been supposed that the Chief, during last night's .conference, made allusions to some friend of his who wasunwell; and accordingly, in our arrangements for the morning,it was proposed to take the doctors of both ships on shore,to visit him. As the Chief had himself come on board, ourplans for landing were interrupted, and we ascribed thisearly visit to his anxiety on account of his friend's health.It was therefore taken for granted, that this sickly lookingcompanion of the Chief, who, some how or other, got the titleof the " Courtier," amongst us, was the patient alluded tolast night; and no sooner were the first compliments overin the cabin, than the doctor was sent for to prescribe. Onhis being introduced, the Courtier was made to hold out his

30 VOYAGE TO THEtongue, have his pulse felt, and submit to various interrogatories, the object of which the unfortunate man couldnot divine, particularly as there was nothing at all thematter with him. He submitted with so much patience toall these forms, and the Chief looked on with such gravepropriety during all the examination, that they evidentlyconsidered the whole scene as a part of our ceremonialetiquette. When this gentleman was released from the&doctor's hands, he began to examine the books with the airof a person who understands what he is about. He appeareddesirous of passing for a literary character; and observingus hand the books about in a careless manner, ventured toask for one, by drawing it towards himself with a begginglook. As he happened to select a volume of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, I was under the necessity of refusing; butoffered in its stead a less valuable, though more showybook, which he accepted with much gratitude. No return,of course, had been looked for, and I was for a moment at aloss to understand what my friend meant, by slipping hisfan into my hand, under the table. He did this in somysterious a way, when the Chief was looking in anotherdirection, that I saw it was his wish to conceal what he haddone, and the fan was sent privately away. But unfortunately, my precaution was fruitless, for a few minutesCOAST OF COREA. 31afterwards, on finding the crowded cabin very hot, I calledfor a fan, and the servant, unconscious of the mischief hewas doing, brought the Courtier's present; which no soonermet the old man's eye, than he rose half off his chair, andgave his unhappy companion such a look of furious anger,as made him tremble from top to toe: but he was soonpacified when he saw that we took an interest in thequestion, and the Courtier was allowed to keep his book.After sitting half an hour, and drinking a glass ofConstantia, the old man proposed to go upon deck. Iaccordingly led the way, and had gone some steps up theladder, in advance, before I perceived that he had stoppedat the door of the gun-room, where the officers mess, andwas looking in, with his usual curiosity. I begged him togo in, which he accordingly did, and entertained himselffor some time, with looking over the different cabins of theofficers. From having observed the pleasure which he tookin the sight of any thing new, I was induced to propose hisgoing round the lower deck, and he looked quite pleasedwhen I pointed along the passage. The state hat, whichhad been resolutely kept on during all this time, notwithstanding its perpetual inconvenience to himself and everyone around him, was here destined to come off; for aftermaking two or three attempts, he found it impossible to get

•_ v32 VOYAGE TO THEalong and wear the hat too; and being of a very inquisitivedisposition, he chose the degrading alternative of beinguncovered, and his researches proceeded without interruption. Nothing escaped the old man's observation;whatever was shut or tied up, he requested to have opened ;and in this way he rummaged the midshipmen's chests, andthe sailors' bags, all along the lower deck. He looked intothe holds, took the lid off the boilers, and turned everything topsy-turvy. Seeing a cutlass tied to the deck,overhead, he took it down, and on drawing it from thescabbard, its lustre, and the keenness of its edge, surprisedand delighted him so much, that I asked him to accept it.At first he seemed willing enough, but after holding a consultation with the Courtier for five minutes, he reluctantlyput it back again. As he went along, he took samples ofevery thing that he could easily put into his sleeve, whichserved him instead of a sack; so that when he came upondeck, he was pretty well loaded, and looked about with thesatisfaction of a school-boy, on having visited a show for thefirst time in his life.Whilst we were below, one of the natives had been busilyemployed in taking the dimensions of the ship with a string,and another person was engaged under him, taking anaccount of the guns, shot, and rigging, all which details heCOAST OF COREA. 33wrote down; but not being able to ascertain, himself, theexact number of people on board, he had recourse tome for the information; this I communicated by openingeight times the fingers of both hands. The only part ofthe ship to which he had not free access was the cabinunder the poop, and from which he felt much annoyed atbeing excluded: but when told that a gentleman was shavingthere, he shewed himself quite satisfied with the explanation, and waited patiently until the door was opened to him.The old gentleman and his followers appearing anxiousto see a shot fired, an eighteen pound carronade was loadedbefore them, and discharged with the muzzle so muchdepressed, that the shot struck the water close to us, andthen rose and fell eight or ten times, to the great entertainment and surprise of the whole party. In the mean time,Captain Maxwell had come on board, and breakfast beingready, we prevailed upon the Chief to sit down with us.He ate heartily of our hashes, and of every thing else thatwas put before him, using a knife, fork, and spoon, whichhe now saw, probably, for the first time in his life, not onlywithout awkwardness, but to such good purpose, that hedeclined exchanging them for Chinese chop-sticks, whichwere provided for him. In fact, he was so determined toadopt our customs in every respect, that when the tea wasF

34 VOYAGE TO THEoffered to him in the Chinese way, he looked to the right andleft, and seeing ours differently prepared, held up his cupto the servant, for milk arid sugar, which being given to him,the old gentleman remained perfectly satisfied;The politeness and ease with which he accommodatedhimself to the habits of people so different from himself,were truly admirable; and when it is considered, thathitherto, in all probability, he was ignorant even of ourexistence, his propriety of manners should seem to point,not only to high rank in society, but to imply also a degreeof civilization in that society, not confirmed by other circumstances. Be this as it may, the incident is curious, asshewing, that however different the state of society may bein different countries, the forms of politeness are much alikein all. This polished character was very well sustained by theold Chief; as he was pleased with our attempts to oblige him,and whatever we seemed to care about, he immediately tookan interest in. He was very inquisitive, and was alwayshighly gratified when he discovered the use of any thingwhich had puzzled him at first. But there was no idle surprise, no extravagant bursts of admiration, and he certainlywould be considered a man of good breeding, and keen observation, in any part of the world. Towards his own people,indeed, he was harsh and impatient at all times; but thisCOAST OF COREA. 35may have arisen from his anxiety that no offence should begiven to us by the other natives, whom he might know wereless delicate and considerate than himself, and thereforerequired constant control.When breakfast was over, and the old man once moreupon deck, we endeavoured to signify to him that we meantto land, according to our engagement yesterday evening;but this he either did not, or would not comprehend; forwhenever we pointed towards the shore, he directed ourattention to the frigate. At length he got into his boat,pushed off, and was making for the Alceste, when CaptainMaxwell followed in his boat, and drawing up alongside ofhim, tried to prevail upon him to accompany us to thevillage: the Chief shook his head by way of disapprobation,and turning towards his attendants, entered into a discussionwith them, which terminated by the Courtier and himselfstepping into Captain Maxwell's boat.We ascribed this measure to a desire on the Chief's partto show publicly that he had not himself invited us onshore, arid had only acceded to our request to land. Wehad not proceeded far before the Chief repented of hisready compliance, and tried to persuade us to return; butfinding the ordinary signs of no avail, he held his headdown and drew his hand across his throat, as if his head

36 VOYAGE TO THEwas to be cut off. It was now our turn not to comprehendsigns, and thinking it would be idle to lose so favourable anopportunity, spared no pains to reconcile the old man toour landing. In this, however, we did not succeed, for, aswe approached the shore, his anxiety increased, and hefrequently drew his hand across his neck, as if to shew thathe would lose his head if we persisted. We again tried tore-assure him, by explaining that we had no intention ofgoing near the village, but merely desired to walk about fora short time, and then to go to the frigate to dine. Hewas of course included in this invitation; but bis onlyanswer consisted in pointing to us and making signs ofeating, and then drawing his hand across his throat;by which he was understood to mean, that it might be verywell for us to talk of eating, but, for his part, he was takenup with the danger of losing his head. We could not butlaugh at this, as we had no notion of any such apprehensionbeing well grounded; and, in a short time, landed at thedistance of half a mile from the village.The old man was lifted out of the boat by several of hispeople, and we were amazed to find, when they set himdown, that he was in tears, and looking altogether veryunhappy. In a few minutes a crowd, consisting, of morethan a hundred people, assembled round us, and we beganCOAST OF COREA. 37to think we should pay dearly for our curiosity. But thepoor old man had no thoughts of vengeance, and was nobetter pleased with the crowd than we were; for turning tohis soldiers, he desired them to disperse the mob, whichthey did in a moment by pelting them with great stones.> The Chief now began crying violently, and turning towardsthe village walked away, leaning his head on the shoulder ofone of his people. As he went along, he not only sobbedand wept, but every now and then bellowed aloud. Wehad been nowise prepared for such a scene, and were extremely sorry for having pushed matters to this extremity.It had never occurred to us that the old Chiefs head wasreally in danger; and even now we could not satisfy ourselves whether he was sincere, or merely acting in order toprevail on us to retire. The perfect tranquillity, nay evencheerfulness of the Courtier, who staid with us all this time,puzzled us extremely: nor could we account for the indifference of the other attendants, who looked on with asmuch composure as if such scenes were every day occurrences. But at all events, it was necessary before proceeding any further, that the old man should be pacified;and in order to effect this, we sat down on the beach, uponwhich he turned about and came crying back again. Heseated himself by us, and waited very patiently whilst weremonstrated on the unreasonableness of his conduct, and

36 VOYAGE TO THEcontrasted the reception he had met with from us, with hispresent unaccountable behaviour. This was expressed bya dumb show acting of all that had taken place since wecame to anchor in the bay; and these signs we thoughtmight be intelligible to the Chief, because they were so toall of us, although no words were used. The signs used bydifferent nations, however, are often dissimilar when thesame thing is to be expressed: and it happened frequentlywith us that all attempts at explanation failed, on both sides,though the signs used appeared to be understood by all thepeople of the same nation with the person making the signs.The old man made a long speech in reply; in the coursewhich the beheading sign was frequently repeated. It iscurious that he invariably held his hands towards his throatafter he had gone through this motion, and appeared towash his hands in his blood : probably he did this in imitation of some ceremony used at executions.Upon one occasion the Chief endeavoured to explainsomething to us which had a reference to a period of twodays; this he did by pointing to the sun, making a motiontwice from east to west, and, at the end of each time,closing his eyes as if asleep. This sign was variously interpreted : some believed it to mean that in two days hishead would be taken off: others imagined that in two daysa communication might be made to his government, andCOAST OF COREA. 39that orders for our reception would be transmitted. Whatever might have been meant by this particular sign, itseems very probable that some general instructions were inforce along the whole of this coast by which the treatmentof strangers is regulated. The promptitude with which wewere met at this place, where, perhaps, no ship ever wasbefore, and the pertinacity with which our landing was opposed, seem to imply an extraordinary degree of vigilanceand jealousy on the part of the government.We expressed a desire to eat and drink, in the hopes ofworking on the old man's hospitality, and, perhaps, inducing him to entertain us in his house; but he made nomotion towards the village, and merely sent off a servantfor some water and a few small cockles. When this sorryfere was laid on the beach, the old gentleman made signsfor us to begin; but we did not choose to be pleased either »with the entertainment itself, or with the place and mannerin which it had been served. We explained to him thatthe proper place to eat was in a house, and not on a wetdirty beach; he made no offer, however, of any other; butleaning his head pensively on his hands, seemed entirelyresigned to his fate.The case was now utterly ^ hopeless; and after an ineffectual attempt to cheer him up, we went on board, as

40 VOYAGE TO THEthe last, and indeed only favour we could grant him. Thuswe quitted this inhospitable shore, after a stay of not quitean hour, in which time we had never been twenty yardsfrom our own boats. We saw the village, however, to someadvantage; it is neatly built, and very pleasantly situatedunder fine trees, in a valley cultivated like a garden, insmall square patches.It was now determined to prosecute the voyage to thesouthward, and the Lyra was accordingly ordered to proceedas usual to sound the passages a-head of the frigate, but hadnot gone far before the Alceste, still at anchor, was observed to be surrounded with boats. In about an hour sheweighed and stood to sea. Captain Maxwell had receivedanother visit from the old Chief, whose appearance was described as being quite altered; his sprightliness and curiosityall gone, and his easy unceremonious manner exchanged forcold and stately civility: he looked embarrassed and unhappy, as it appeared, from an apprehension of havingoffended Captain Maxwell. When this was discovered, nopains were spared to convince him that, in this respect, therewas not the slightest cause for uneasiness. He would notaccept any presents, but appeared much relieved by theunexpected kindness with which he was received, andbefore he went away, was restored, in some degree, to hisCOAST OF COREA. 41wonted spirits. When looking over the books in the cabin,he was a good deal taken with the appearance of a Bible,but when offered to him he declined it, though with suchevident reluctance, that it was again shewn to him just ashe was pushing off in his boat, and he now received it withevery appearance of gratitude, and took his leave in amanner quite friendly.We quitted this bay without much regret. The oldChief, indeed, with his flowing beard, and pompous array,and engaging manners, had made a strong impression uponus all; but his pitiable and childish distress, whatever mighthave been the cause, took away from the respect with whichwe were otherwise disposed to regard him: yet this circumstance, though it makes the picture less finished, servesto give it additional interest; whilst every thing ridiculousin the old man's character is lost in the painful uncertaintywhich hangs over his fate.From this bay we steered amongst the islands, during allthe 6th and 7th, to the S. W. before the natives were metwith again; we saw them indeed, but never got near enoughto converse with them. They were frequently observed seatedin groups watching us on the islands which we passed. Wesaw several fishing-boats, with a crew of about a dozen men,crowded on a sort of poop. At a little distance these boatsG

M VOYAGE TO THE0appeared to be formed of two vessels lashed together. Thisappearance we believe to be caused by their having an outrigger on one side, on which their oars, sails, and masts arepiled, in order probably to keep the boat clear when theyare at anchor fishing. Their mast is lowered down andhoisted up by means of a strong tackle from the mast-headto the stern, as in the barges on the Thames.We threaded our way for upwards of a hundred milesamongst islands which lie in immense clusters in everydirection. At first we thought of counting them, and evenattempted to note their places on the charts which we weremaking of this coast, but their great number completelybaffled these endeavours. They vary in size, from a few hundred yards in length to five or six miles, and are of all shapes.From the mast-head other groups were perceived lyingone behind the other to the east and south as far as the eyecould reach. Frequently above a hundred islands were insight from deck at one moment. The sea being quite smooth,the weather fine, and many of the islands wooded andcultivated in the valleys, the scene was at all times lively,and was rendered still more interesting by our rapid passagealong the coast, by which the appearances about us wereperpetually changing. Of this coast we had no chartspossessing the slightest pretensions to accuracy, none ofCOAST OF COREA. 43the places at which we touched being laid down withinsixty miles of their proper places. Only a few islandsare noticed in any map; whereas the coast, for near twohundred miles, is completely studded with them, to thedistance of fifteen or twenty leagues from the main land.These inaccuracies in the charts naturally gave a very highdegree of interest to this part of the voyage; yet the navigation being at all times uncertain, and often dangerous, considerable anxiety necessarily mingled itself with the satisfaction produced by so new and splendid a scene. We alwaysanchored during the night, or when the tides, which werevery rapid, prevented our proceeding in the deliberatemanner absolutely required by the nature of the circumstances. An instance of the necessity of these precautionsoccurred on the 7th of September, at four o'clock in theafternoon, when, it being quite calm, we were drifting alongwith the tide, which suddenly shifted and carried us rapidlytowards a reef of rocks, which was invisible till the strongrippling of the water shewed us our danger: we let go theanchor immediately, but the jerk was so great, as to breakthe Lyra's cable. A second anchor, however, brought herup at a sufficient distance from the reef.As soon as the tide slacked, a boat was dispatched toexamine the anchorage on the other side of an island near us.

44 VOYAGE TO THE COAST OF COREA. 45The officer landed about sun-set, and from the top of theisland could discover a village on the other side, on theshores of a fine large bay. He afterwards sounded theanchorage, and found it of a convenient depth. On hisway back he landed near the village, but though it wasbright moonlight he saw none of the inhabitants.8th of September.—About noon we weighed and sailedround the north end of the island, which had been visited*last night. The Alceste anchored nearly in the middlebetween the two islands which form the anchorage; but asthe Lyra draws less water, she was placed as close off thevillage as was safe, being then about a quarter of a milefrom the beach. At this distance, by means of a telescopefixed on a table on the poop, we were enabled to see whatwas going on in the village, while the people were unconscious of being observed. Mr. Clifford, who was toounwell to land with Captain Maxwell and myself, placedhimself at the glass, and made many observations whichmust otherwise have escaped notice.At first the only inhabitants visible were seated on thetop of the hill watching us, the village itself being quitedeserted; but shortly after our anchoring, the inhabitantsbegan to assemble from different parts of the island. Of theseseveral were women, some of whom had children on theirbacks, and others carried them in their arms. They lookedstout, were fairer in complexion than the men, and weredressed in a long white robe, loose and open in front, witha petticoat of the same colour reaching a little below theknees; their hair was tied in a large knot behind; a smallpiece of white cloth was thrown loosely over the head toprotect them from the rays of the sun. Some women wereengaged in husking rice in a mortar with a wooden beater;these had no dress above the waist. The men and boyswere seen carrying loads on a wooden frame hooked to theshoulders.In a square flat place near the village a number ofwomen and children were employed winnowing corn bypouring it from a height, so that the husks blew away.Fishing-nets were spread to dry on most of the houses. Welanded about five o'clock, and found in the village onlytwo men, who obstinately remained at one place withoutspeaking, and looking anxious that we should go away;they refused the buttons which we offered them, and resistedour persuasions to accompany us to the upper part of thevillage, which we were anxious they should do, to shew thatwe had no intention of hurting any thing, but merely tolook about us. We went on alone, and on reaching a deserted house thought it a good opportunity to examine it.I) I

46 VOYAGE TO THEBefore the door, on a neat clean level space, enclosed by ahedge covered with a sweet-scented white flower, we foundseveral heaps of corn and straw, and several of the woodenmortars in which the rice is pounded, also a number ofvessels, some filled with water and others with rice. Cookingutensils were lying about, and a number of fishing linescoiled neatly in baskets, and split fish spread out to dry onthe top of little corn ricks on one side of the court. Theinside was dark and uncomfortable; the mud floor was fullof hollow places; the walls were black with soot, and everything looked dirty. On the left of the entrance two largemetal boilers, twenty inches deep, were sunk in the brickwork, the upper part being about a foot above the floor.The fire-place was between the boilers, and on the hotembers lay three split fish. On the wall opposite to thefire were shelves, having a number of cups, basons, andcooking utensils, principally of coarse stone ware, and somefew of a sort of bell-metal. The number of inhabitants inone house must be considerable, if we can form an estimatefrom the quantity of their dishes and vessels. There werethree neat small pieces of furniture on one of the shelves,the use of which we could not discover; they were madeof wood, elegantly carved and varnished, with a roundtop about a foot in diameter, and four legs a foot and a halfCOAST OF COREA. 47long. The roof was well constructed, the rafters being mortised into the ends of the horizontal beams, and tied to themiddle by a perpendicular beam or King-Post. Over therafters is laid a net-work of rods, to which the thatch is tied.There was no chimney to this house, and only one windowmade of slender bars of wood, forming square spaces threeinches by two, covered by a thin semi-transparent paperdefended by the roof, which extends so far beyond the wallas to shelter it not only from the rain but from the sun.Most of the houses had a sort of raised verandah underthe eaves, about a foot or more above the ground, extendingfrom the door on either hand to the end of the house; theseplaces were neatly levelled, and must afford a cool seat.The walls of the houses are from six to eight feet high, andfrom fourteen to twenty feet long; the top of the roof beingabout fourteen. The walls are of stone and mud, the doormoves on the bar, which forms one of its sides; this bar isprolonged, and works in holes in the beam above, and a stonebelow. There was a back door to the house which weexamined. On opening this we found a bare bank of earthas high as the house, at the distance of three feet fromthe walls, arid a hedge rising still higher on the top; thiseffectually excluded all light.This minute survey of the house being completed, we

48 VOYAGE TO THE COAST OF COREA. 49ribft I"""'IIreturned to our friends, who seemed in some measure reassured. We tried to prevail upon them to accompany usin our walk, in hopes that the rest of the cottagers mightbe induced to return when they saw how peaceably wewere disposed. Captain Maxwell used every sign he couldthink of to no purpose, and tired at length of these attempts,took hold of the oldest man's hand, drew it through hisarm, and walked off with him. I followed his example withthe other; and this familiarity amused the natives, whonow accompanied us in perfect good humour. The ease andapparent indifference with Avhich they walked along with uswas curious, and had so little of awkwardness in it, that onemight have supposed it to be the fashion of Corea to Avalk armin arm. Having reached the house which we had beforeexamined, we sat down in the verandah, and made signs thatwe wished to smoke a pipe with them. In the meantime aboat was observed- to come to the landing-place; the crewquitted her and came towards us at a rapid pace. Thequick manner of these people, so different from the ordinarybehaviour of the Coreans we had seen, made us apprehendwe observed that any thing good had been said amongstthem; this was well received, and proved afterwards a goodmode of introduction.Their curiosity was strongly excited by our clothing,which they examined minutely; they wished to see someparts of our dress taken off, and in order to gratify them theywere allowed to have our coats, shoes, stockings, hats, &c.They were more struck with the stockings than Avith anything else, frequently shouting " Hota! Hota!" This word,which is pronounced with a strong aspiration, was noted doAvnin our list as the Corean word for stockings; but it was foundafterwards to be an expression of approbation, applied indiscriminately to whatever they consider remarkably good.After sitting some time with these people, and smoking severalpipes Avith them, Ave gave up all hopes of seeing the villagersreturn Avhile we Avere there, and as the night Avas fallingAVC proposed taking a short Avalk \vith our friends, and thengoing on board. But as soon as they saA^ us go up the hilliinstead of returning to the boat, they became very uneasy,and Avanted us to turn back.As Ave had reason, however,that some violence was meditated; but in this we were misto conjecture that the women and children Avere on the othertaken, for they sat down with us, gave us their pipes toside of the hill, we Avent on in the expectation of getting asmoke, and laughed immoderately at some of our words:sight of them before dark.This the Coreans prevented bywe took the hint from them, and laughed heartily wheneverfollowing us with shouts Avherever we Avent, so as to giveH

50 VOYAGE TO THEwarning of our approach. The women and children probably retreated before us to a ravine on the north side ofthe island, for when we approached it the Coreans becamemore anxious than ever for our return ; and one man seeingus still advance, took hold of my arm and gave it a sharppinch. I turned round and exclaimed, *' Patience, Sir!" hedrew back on observing my displeasure, and a moment aftercalled out himself, " Patience, Sir!" The others hearing thiscaught the words too, and nothing was heard for some timeamongst them but" Patience, Sir," pronounced in everyinstance with perfect propriety. They seemed surprisedthemselves on discovering powers of imitation hitherto inall probability unexercised. This incident brought us betteracquainted, and we remained on the top of the hill teachingthem English words till it was dark. They were certainlyentertained with our instructions, but nevertheless shewedmuch more satisfaction in attending us down hill again toour boats. : Before going on board we invited them to cometo the ship next day^ which one of the party was supposedto comprehend: he first made preparations for going tobed, then closed liis eyes, hung his head on his hand, andsnored very properly; after a time he opened his eyes,started and looked about him, then laid his hands onCaptain Maxwell's shoulders with an air of welcome. ThisCOAST OF COREA. 51was interpreted by some into a wish for our departure tillthe morning, and by others that he himself would visit usat daylight.As he never came on board, and received uson landing next day with any thing but welcome, probablyboth guesses were wrong: of one thing there was no doubt,his anxiety to get rid of us; and his signs may have meantthat it was time for all honest people to be in bed.9th of September.—At sunrise we landed at the samevillage, and found it deserted as before.We left it andmade for the highest peak on the island, accompanied bya few of the Coreans, who did not interfere with us tillabout halfway up, when on our entering a grove of fir trees,with the appearance of which we had been struck, one ofthe Coreans objected; we went on, however, and uponreaching the stump of an old tree the Corean fell on hisknees, bowed his head to the ground, and as he raised itagain held his hands closed and pressed together towardsthe stump. This had very much the air of a stratagem to\dissuade us from going further in that direction, where thewomen probably were concealed.Admitting this to havebeen tire motive, it is curious that he should have supposedsuch a shew of religious form calculated to restrain us.is further remarkable as being the only circumstance whichwe have seen on this coast implying a knowledge of religionIt

52 VOYAGE TO THEor religious ceremony. There are here no temples, idols, nortombs, whereas in China, villages much smaller than theseof Corea have them in every corner. The other Coreanstook no notice of the stump, and the man who was prostrating himself before it finding that his behaviour producednothing but a number of questions from us concerning thenature of the tree, got on his legs and walked sulkily away. Inthe course of our walk AVC saw six bullocks of a small breedand very fat, but which the Coreans were not to be temptedto sell by any thing which we had to give them. Dogs were theonly quadrupeds besides that we saw. There were pigeons,hawks, and eagles, but few small birds. Crows were asnumerous here as in every other part of the world. Wereturned on board to breakfast, and afterwards set outon an excursion to the top of a high island lying someleagues to the south-east of us. On our way we landed,and observed the sun's meridian altitude with an artificialhorizon, by which we ascertained the latitude to be 34° 22'39" north, the longitude by the mean of two chronometersis 126° 2' 45" east.We passed, for the distance of five miles, amongst islands,all, except the very smallest, inhabited. The villages arebuilt in the valleys, where the houses are nearly hid bytrees and hedges. The sides of the hills are cultivated withCOAST OF COREA.millet and a species of bean; and in the numerous smallgardens near the villages, we saw a great variety of plants.As the peaked island which we had undertaken to climbwas steep, and covered with a long coarse grass, it costus a tiresome scramble to gain the top, which is about sixhundred feet above the level of the sea. The main land ofCorea is just discernible in the north-east and east, fromthis elevation; but it commands a splendid view of theislands, lying in thick clusters, as far as the eye can reach,from north-west quite round by east to south. Weendeavoured to count them. One person, by reckoningonly such as were obviously separate islands, made theirnumber one hundred and twenty. Two other gentlemen,by estimating the numbers in each connected cluster, madeseverally, one hundred and thirty-six, and one hundred andseventy; a difference, which at once shews the difficulty ofspeaking with precision on this subject. But when it isconsidered, that from one spot, which though considerablyelevated, was not centrical, one hundred and twenty islandscould be counted, and that our course for upwards of onehundred miles had been amongst islands no less crowdedthan these, some idea may be formed of this great Archipelago.After enjoying this scene for some time, we went down1,1

54 VOYAGE TO THEon the other side of the peak, which is much less steep.We found the boat's crew preparing dinner for us, undersome trees, close to a well of cool water. The village towhich the well belonged not being many yards off, weproceeded to explore it, and found it deserted by all exceptan old woman and a man. The woman, seated on a pile ofstones, in the middle of the village, took no notice of us aswe passed; and indeed, she was herself so very homely, as tooccupy but little of our attention. The man was seated at thedoor of a cottage, making a straw sandal: on our enteringhis inclosure, he looked up for an instant, and immediatelyresumed his work, with as much composure as if we hadbeen a party of the villagers. A button was offered tohim, which he accepted without scruple: he agreed, withequal readiness,, to exchange his unfinished sandal foranother button, which having carelessly put away, in a baglying near him, he took some straw and re-commencedhis business, without seeming to notice that we were rummaging his house. He is the only Corean we have metwith, who has not shewn some slight symptoms of curiosity:indeed, he seemed totally indifferent about our staying orgoing, or about what we were doing in his house; and weleft him without knowing whether to ascribe his apathy tofear, or to absolute stupidity.COAST OF COREA. 55On returning from the village, we saw a party of thenatives assembled on a rising ground near us; they wereinvited, by signs, to join us at dinner, but they kept theirplaces unmoved. While we were at dinner, the sailors,who had been rambling about, joined the natives, and in afew minutes became very good friends with them; thenatives giving up their pipes, and the sailors in return supplying them with tobacco. We have frequently remarkedduring this voyage, that the sailors make acquaintance withthe natives much sooner than the officers. This seems thenatural effect of the difference in our manners. On meetingwith natives, we feel so anxious to conciliate, and to avoidgiving offence, that Our behaviour, thus guarded and circumspect, has an air of restraint about it, which mayproduce distrust and apprehension on their part; whilst, onthe other hand, Jack, who is not only unreflecting an,dinoffensive himself, but never suspects that others can possibly misconstrue his perfect. good-will and unaffectedfrankness, has an easy, disengaged manner, which at onceinvites confidence and familiarity.In about an hour after we had sat down, one of thenatives hastily rose, and without appearing to deliberate,but as if actuated by a sudden impulse, strode rapidlydown to us, and in the most unceremonious way possible,

56 VOYAGE TO THEpresented his lighted pipe for us to smoke. We receivedhim as kindly as we could, and prevailed upon him to takea glass of wine; which he had no sooner drank off, than heroared out, " Hota! Hota!"This exclamation brought the rest down, who seatingthemselves by us, drank freely, and became very cheerfuland communicative, telling us the Corean names of everything we pointed to, and asking, in return, the Englishnames for our clothes.* But though the wine made thesepeople far more sociable than any we had yet seen, theynever forgot the principal object of their thoughts, andsuggested, every now and then, by pointing to our boats,the propriety of our going away. After sunset, theybecame very impatient and uneasy at our stay; but whenat length we yielded to their entreaties, the whole partyaccompanied us to the water's side, and took leave withthe most lively marks of satisfaction at our departure.10th of September.—This morning, about ten o'clock,we got under Aveigh, and stood to the southward. By sunset we were clear of all the islands, and could just distinguishthe island of Quelpaert in the south-east quarter.The shortness of our stay on this coast, and the difficultywe experienced in communicating with the inhabitants,* See note at the end of the Loo-choo vocabulary.COAST OF COREA. 57will account for the scanty and disjointed nature of theinformation obtained. A future voyager would do well tobe accompanied by a person who can write the Chinesecharacter, and should have full leisure to overcome, bypatient management, the distrust of strangers evinced bythis unsociable people.A chart of our track along this coast is subjoined tothis work, in the hope that it may prove useful to a futurevoyager. As it was constructed under circumstances ofgreat haste, it is necessarily incomplete; yet it will probablybe found more accurate than any maps or charts hithertopublished.

I 158 VOYAGE TO THECHAPTER II.Enter the Japan Sea—Sulphur Island—Volcano—See the Great Loo-ChooIsland—Lyra nearly wrecked—First Interview with the Natives—Anchor atNapakiang—Natives crowd on Board—Their interesting Appearance andManners—Several Chiefs visit the Alceste—Land to make Observations—Astonishment of the Natives—Six Chiefs visit the Ships—Alceste and Lyraproceed farther in Shore—A Chief of high Rank waits upon CaptainMaxwell—Return his Visit—Feast—Projected Survey of the Anchorage—Visit Reef Island—The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour—Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores—Description of the Temple andGarden—First Acquaintance with Madera—Study of the Language.AFTER leaving Corea, we stood to the southward and eastward, with a strong breeze from the north, and a mountainousswell from the north-east.Shortly after daybreak on the13th of September, AVC saw Sulphur Island, in the southwest quarter, and by eleven in the forenoon were close upto it. We intended to land, but were prevented by thehigh wind, which caused so great a surf all round theisland, as to render this impracticable. The sulphuricvolcano from which the island takes its name is on thenorth-west side; it emits white smoke, and the smell ofsulphur is very strong on the lee side of the crater. The cliffsGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 59near the volcano are of a pale yellow colour, interspersed Avithbrown streaks : the ground at this place is very rugged, asthe strata lie in all directions, and are much broken; on thetop is a thin coat of brown grass. The south end of theisland is of considerable height, of a deep blood red colour,Avith here and there a spot of bright green : the strata,which are here nearly horizontal, are cut by a whin dykerunning from the top to the bottom of the cliff, projectingfrom its face like a Avail. As the weather still lookedthreatening, AVC gave up the intention of examining thisspot, and proceeded to the southward till four o'clock, atAvhich time land was seen in the south-west quarter; but asthere was not sufficient daylight to close with it, we hauledoff to the westward for the night. Shortly after sunset thesky became overcast, the wind veered about from onepoint to another, the air became suddenly quite chill, thesea rose high, and every thing, in short, seemed to indicatean approaching tyfoong or hurricane. All our preparationsAvere made to encounter a violent tempest; but we weremuch pleased at finding it turn out nothing more than anordinary gale of wind.14th of September.—The weather was still stormy, butbeing anxious to close with the land, we bore up, andsteered in the supposed direction of the Great Lieou Kieou,

60 VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 61or Loo-choo Island. At eight o'clock we was the SugarLoaf of Captain Broughton, which is a small green island,having a high remarkable cone in the middle. We left thisto the eastward, and continued steering to the south southwest, hoping to get to leeward of the great island beforenight, where we might remain in smooth water till theweather became fine. While going along at a quick rate,we suddenly saw breakers close to us; we instantly hauledto the wind, and made all the sail we could carry. Oursituation was now very critical, for the swell caused by therecent gale checked our way considerably, and a leecurrent drifted us gradually towards the reef. From themast head we could look down upon the reef, which was ofa circular form, with a low island on its southern side; thesurf broke all round, but in the inside the water was quitesmooth, and being only a few feet deep, the coral, whichwas of a bright green, appeared distinctly through it. Atthe distance of one-third of a mile from where we were, nobottom was to be found with our lead lines, so that anchoringwas out of the question. After being in this unpleasantpredicament for some time, we succeeded in weatheringthe western end of the reef, which we had no sooner done,than we saw a passage four or five miles wide, by which weproceeded to leeward of the reef island, where we found thewater perfectly smooth. The Alceste rounded the reefwithout difficulty, being half a league farther off than theLyra, which, as usual, had been stationed ahead to lookout, but had not perceived the danger sooner, owing to theextreme haziness of the weather.15th of September.—In the morning, it was arrangedthat the Lyra should proceed in shore in search of a harbour,while the frigate remained in deep water. At ten o'clock Ithought we had discovered a place of security, and havinganchored the Lyra, sent three boats to examine it. Asort of harbour was found, formed by coral reefs; but thepassages being all intricate for large ships, and the watershallow inside, it is by no means safe. We fell in withseveral people in canoes; one man, who seemed to knowwhat we were searching for, directed us to a point of land tothe northward, and waved for us to go round it. While theboats were away, sevei'al natives came oft' to the Lyra. Nopeople that we have yet met with have been so friendly;for the moment they came alongside, one handed a jar ofwater up to us, and another a basket of boiled sweetpotatoes, without asking or seeming to wish for anyrecompense. Their manners were gentle and respectful;they uncovered their heads when in our presence, bowedwhenever they spoke to us; and when we gave them some

62 TOYAGE TO THErum, they did not drink it till they had bowed to everyperson round. Another canoe went near the Alceste, anda rope being thrown to them, they tied a fish to it, and thenpaddled away. All this seemed to promise well, and wasparticularly grateful after the cold repulsive manners of theCoreans.The day was spent in trying to beat round the point towindward, but the tide was too strong against us, and whenit became dark, we found ourselves awkwardly situated.To the east and west of us there were islands at the distanceof a few miles. To leeward was a circular coral reef, justappearing above the surface at low water; and to windwardwere seen the reefs upon which we were so nearly wreckedon Saturday. As the exact position of these numerousdangers was unknown to us, we were determined to anchorfor the night, though in eighty fathoms water.16th of September.—At daylight we weighed, and beatto windward all the morning; but owing to the tide beingcontrary, it was two o'clock before we passed the pointmentioned above; which we had no sooner done, than wecame in sight of an extensive town, having a harbour filledwith vessels at anchor. On steering towards the town, wehad to sound our way cautiously amongst coral reefs, whichwere tolerably well defined by the surf breaking uponGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 63them*. The Alceste followed as soon as we had ascertainedthat the passage was clear, and both ships anchored at thedistance of half a mile from the town.In a short time we were surrounded by canoes, full ofthe natives, who, with their children, flocked on board.They wear a loose dress, tied with a belt round their waist;their hair is brought tight up from all sides, and formed intoa knot on the top of the head, with two metal pins stuck init. In the course of an hour, a native came on board whoappeared to be somewhat higher in rank than the rest; andwe now discovered, to our great satisfaction, that this manunderstood our Chinese servant, who had been of no use tous at Corea. As it was found that there were other chiefson shore superior in rank to this man, Captain Maxwelldeclined receiving his visit; as well with the view of inducingthe principal people to come on board, as of maintainingan appearance of dignity, a point of great importance in alltransactions with the Chinese and their dependents, whoinvariably repay condescension with presumption. Aswe had heard of these people being tributary to China,it was natural to conclude that there might be some* This circumstance is by no means common, and therefore cannot bedepended on. In fine weather these reefs give no warning whatever, and a shipon approaching them ought invariably to have a boat ahead.

*! l64 VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 65similarity in manners. At all events, it was evidently mucheasier at any future time to be free and cordial with them,after having assumed a distance and reserve in the firstinstance, than it would be to repress insolence, if at firstencouraged by too hasty familiarity.Before this man went on shore, he requested to knowthe reason of our coming into this port; the interpreter wasinstructed to acquaint him that the ships had experiencedvery bad weather, and had been a long time at sea; thatthe large ship had sprung a leak, and required repairswhich could only be done in a secure harbour: furtherexplanations, it was observed, would be given to thesuperior chiefs when they came on board. We had beenprepared for these inquiries, not only from the receptionwe had met with at Corea, but' from the well-knowncharacter of the nations in this quarter of the globe; andit was so far fortunate, that the Alceste was actually in wantof repairs; because to have assigned curiosity, and a desireof gaining information as our object, to people whollyunconscious of such feelings, would naturally have led themto ascribe our actions to some more interested, and consequently more dangerous motive.The canoes which we have seen to-day are mostly madeof one piece of wood ; they have two sails, and are movedwith considerable velocity, by two or more paddles, assistedby an oar over the stern, which acts both as a scull and arudder. There is a neat low seat, made of rattans, for eachperson in the canoe.As the day closed, the fishing canoescame in great numbers from sea, and all came on board theships on their way; some of the fishermen pulled up ourlines and baited the hooks.The whole shore abreast of theships was covered with people, but the crowd was greateston two pier-heads, forming the entrance to the harbour; andthe variety of colour in their dresses made this a very livelyexhibition.In the evening, Captain Maxwell and I rowedround to examine the anchorage, which we found tolerablyclear of rocks.An officer was at the same time sent toexamine the inner harbour, but he did not go far withinthe entrance, which was much too shallow for the frigate.On returning to the Lyra, I found that Mr. Cliffordhad been entertaining several respectable looking nativeswho had paid him a visit.As they readily comprehendedhis desire to know their words for various things, he hassucceeded in collecting a considerable number, among which,we are surprised to find their name for tobacco the same asours; all the others are quite new to us.«l?th of September.—I carried the interpreter to theAlceste, after breakfast, where I found two chiefs, who hadK

66 VOYAGE TO THEbeen on board some time, and had been taken care of bythe officers, as Captain Maxwell was not prepared to receivethem.A message was then sent to intimate that the Ta-yin(a Chinese title, used also by these people to personsof rank) was desirous of seeing the chiefs, and they wereintroduced into the after-cabin, where they were receivedin form.They objected to sitting down, making at thesame time many low obeisances, which they did by stoopingthe body, and raising the hands, closed one over the other,to their face.Their scruples about being seated were atlength overcome, and the first chief took his place onCaptain Maxwell's left hand, the next on my left, and a third,who was evidently of a lower rank, sat beyond the second.The chiefs sat respectfully silent, and Captain Maxwellfinding that he was expected to speak first, communicatedto. them that the ships under his command belonged tothe King of England; that they had gone to China with anEmbassador, carrying presents to the Emperor, at Pekin;that on their way back to Canton, they had experiencedvery, bad weather, and had been obliged to put in here to.refit, and to procure supplies.In reply, they expressed their willingness to assist us asmuch as lay in their power, but said that the harbour was tooshallow for so large a ship, and recommended our proceedingGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 67to another harbour called Kindling, which they describedas being secure and commodious, and only a few hours sailfrom this anchorage: they offered to furnish pilots and aboat to conduct us. Captain Maxwell, however, wasunwilling to quit this anchorage unless certain of finding abetter; he therefore proposed to send the Lyra to examineand report upon the harbour alluded to. The chiefs pausedupon this, and said they could not take upon them to sendpilots to the Brig without consulting the Great Man onshore. We were very curious to know who this greatpersonage might be, but they evaded all our inquiries.Captain Maxwell asked where the king resided, and intimatedhis intention of waiting upon him; to this they stronglyobjected, declaring moreover, that it was impossible, as hismajesty lived a thousand miles off. They did not seem'aware of their inconsistency, when they undertook, immediately afterwards, to get an answer from court about pilotsfor the Lyra, in a few hours.We had been led to hope, from the frankness and kindness of these people, that no restraint would be imposedon us; and we were the more disappointed at observing,that whenever we spoke of landing, or asked any questionsabout the king, the chiefs became uneasy, and replied in amysterious manner. We consoled ourselves, however, with

68 VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.the supposition, that upon further acquaintance their apprehension would wear off.Business being over, the chiefs were asked to walk roundthe cabin, an invitation which they accepted with manifestsatisfaction. During the conference they had preserved agravity suited to an important ceremony, and, thoughsurrounded by new and curious objects, had never expressedthe least curiosity. They were now no longer formal, andlooked over the various articles with attention, taking particular notice of the globes, books, and mirrors. Their mannersare remarkably gentle and unassuming. They are observant,and not without curiosity, but they require encouragement toinduce them to come forward, being restrained, it would seem,by a genteel self-denial, from gratifying curiosity, lest it mightbe thought obtrusive. Their dress is singularly graceful;it consists of a loose flowing robe, with very wide sleeves,tied round the middle by a broad rich belt or girdle ofwrought silk, a yellow cylindrical cap, and a neat strawsandal, over a short cotton boot or stocking. Two of thechiefs wore light yellow robes, the other dark blue streakedwith white, all of cotton. The cap is flat at "top, andappears to be formed by winding a broad band diagonallyround a frame, in such a manner, that at each turn a smallportion of the last fold shall be visible above in front,and below at the hinder part. The sandal is kept on by astiff straw band passing over the instep, and joining thesandal near the heel; this band is tied to the forepart by aslight string, drawn between the great toe and the next,the stocking having a division like the finger of a glove forthe great toe. They all carry fans, which they stick in theirgirdles when not in use, and each person has a short tobaccopipe in a small bag, hanging, along with the pouch, at thegirdle. When they had satisfied themselves with lookingover the cabin, they went away, with a promise of returningin the evening as soon as the answer from the Great Manshould arrive.During all this morning, the whole space between theships and the shore has been covered with canoes, eachcontaining about ten persons. The scene was very lively,for few of the parties which came to visit the shipsremained long on board, so that the canoes were continually passing backwards and forwards, and the numberwhich came in this way must have been immense. Theyall seemed highly gratified at being allowed to go whereeverthey liked over the ships, nor was this liberty everabused. The manners even of the lowest classes aregenteel and becoming; their curiosity is great, but itnever makes them rudely inquisitive: their language is[AI

70 VOYAGE TO THEmusical, and in most cases easy of pronunciation. Weheard a boat song to-day, the air of which was sweetand plaintive; we tried in vain to catch the words, andunfortunately, none of us had skill enough to note down theair. We observed several people in canoes, making drawingsof the s"hips, but they hid their work when they wereobserved. In consequence of what had been said lastnight of our wanting repairs, a party of shipwrights andcaulkers was sent on board the Alceste this morning, buttheir tools were of a Lilliputian order, and quite unsuited tothe rough work required.The variety of colour and pattern in the dresses of thepeople to-day, is remarkable. Many wear printed cottons,others have cotton dresses with the pattern drawn on it byhand, instead of being stamped; but blue, in all its shades,is the prevalent colour, though there were many dressesresembling in every respect Highland tartans. The children,in general, wear more shewy dresses than the men, and ofthe dress of the women we can say nothing, as none haveyet been seen. Every person has one of the girdles beforedescribed, which is always of a different colour from thedress, and is, in general, richly ornamented with flowers inembossed silk, and sometimes with gold and silver threads.This dress is naturally so graceful, that even the lowestGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 71boatmen have a picturesque appearance. Their hair, whichis of a glossy black, is shaved off the crown, but thebare place is concealed by their mode of dressing thehair in a close knot over it. Their beards and mustachiosare allowed to grow, and are kept neat and smooth.They are rather low in stature, but are well formed, andhave an easy graceful carriage, which suits well withtheir flowing dress. Their colour is not good, some beingvery dark and others nearly white, but in most instancesthey are of a deep copper. This is fully compensated forby the sweetness and intelligence of their countenance.Their eyes, which are black, have a placid expression, andtheir teeth are regular and beautifully white. In deportment they are modest, polite, timid, and respectful, and inshort, appear to be a most interesting and amiable people.Two of our friends who had visited us in the morning,and whose names we have discovered to be Ookooma andJeema, came 011 board again about half past five, and staidan hour; they had not received any answer, they said, fromthe Great Man, and therefore could not send pilots to the" hoonee gua/' or little ship. They were accompanied by achief whom we took to be a Chinese from his looks, and hisappearing to understand the interpreter better than theothers. His formal and suspicious manner did not promise

72 VOYAGE TO THEso well as that of the others. They came to say that apresent of stock and vegetables had been sent to the ships.It was intimated to them that we intended to land«the nextday, and upon their objecting to this, we said that our wishwas to wait upon the Great Man; to which they replied,that no person answering to this description resided here.We then said, that it was right we should return their visit.This argument they combated by saying that they were menof unequal rank to us, and therefore nowise entitled to suchan honour; and thatwe,at the same time, would be degradingourselves by such undue condescension. This having failed,Captain Maxwell told them of his illness ; upon which, ournew acquaintance, who seemed more earnestly bent againstour landing than the others, offered to send a physician onboard to see him. Captain Maxwell replied, that his owndoctor had recommended a ride on shore; upon which theylaughed, and turned the discourse to something else.In this way every proposal to land, or even allusion to theshore, was industriously put aside; and as it was our wishto gain their good will, the matter was dropped for thepresent. Before they went away, Captain Maxwell, pointingto their pipes, begged them to smoke if they wished it; theywere grateful for this considerate attention, but would noton any account begin till we shewed them the example, byGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, 73t^smoking with pipes which they prepared for us. Theyappeared more at their ease after this incident, and aftersitting for some time, took leave for the night on the mostfriendly terms.18th of September.—Captain Maxwell sent to me to saythat he meant to land on a point at some distance from thetown, in order to observe the sun's meridian altitude with anartificial horizon. Just as I was setting out to accompanyhim, I was taken by surprise by two well-dressed natives^,who were halfway down the cabin ladder before I knew oftheir approach. One came to superintend the measurementof the Lyra, and the other, who seemed of inferior rank, toexplain why some poultry, only then sent, had not come onthe preceding night, along with the other presents. I forgotto mention, that a bullock, two hogs, two goats, a dozen anda half of fowls, some candles, wood, and water, were sent toeach of the ships. I asked them to sit down, and they wereso well satisfied with the Constantia which I gave them, thatthey remained for some time; owing to which delay, I didnot reach the shore till the time for observing the sun hadgone by. I found Captain Maxwell with Ookooma and several of the chiefs, and an immense crowd of the natives, allof whom had left the town on seeing the boat put off, andhad hastened to this spot, either out of curiosity or respect,

I I"74 VOYAGE TO THEor more probably to watch our proceedings. At our request, Ookooma, who appears to possess considerable authority, made the whole crowd, chiefs and all, sit down onthe grass in a circle round us. Their astonishment at ouroperations was strongly expressed in their countenances,and, indeed, our apparatus and behaviour must have looked,to perfect strangers, somewhat magical.In the first place the quicksilver, which to them wouldappear like melted metal, was poured into a trough, in afine stream from a wooden bottle ; while it was running outthe people repeated in an under tone " yi, yi, yi, yi \" butwere silent when the glass roof was placed over the trough.The circular instrument and sextant, fixed on stands, nextattracted their notice, and they looked on in profoundsilence while we were taking the sun's altitude. As wewere too late for the desired observation, we amused thenatives by letting them look at the two reflected images ofthe sun through the telescope of the instruments. Ookoomawas the first who looked, and being quite unprepared forwhat he saw, started back in astonishment, as if he had unconsciously beheld something supernatural and forbidden.The other chiefs, in their turn, placed themselves at theinstrument, as well as several old men who stepped forwardfrom the crowd. Some testified their surprise by a suddenGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 75exclamation; others were perfectly calm, so that we couldnot guess what they thought; and some held up their hands,and looked as if the whole matter was totally beyond thereach of their comprehension. When this was over, and therewas no longer any necessity for the crowd being seated, theyclosed round and watched us while we were putting the instruments up.Some of the boys held out their hands forquicksilver, with which they ran off, quite happy.During this time we were about fifty yards from the footof a cliff, on the brow of which was posted a group of womenwitli baskets on their heads; we were unfortunately not nearenough to discern their features, nor to make out their dressdistinctly; it appeared, however, to be like that of the men,though somewhat shorter, and without any girdle roundthe waist.The rock here rises in perpendicular rugged cliffs ofcoral, with a number of rude square excavations on its face,which, at first sight, appear to have been worn by theelements, but on examination shew evident traces of artMost of these caves are closed up by a wall of loose stones,but in one, of which the mouth was open, several humanbones were found lying amongst the sand.On removinga stone from a closed cave, a vase was observed in theinside, of an elegant shape; the people signified to us that

76 VOYAGE TO THEthese were the remains of the dead, but we did not makeout distinctly whether the bones or the ashes only werethus preserved. They made no objections to our examiningthese caves, though they certainly were not pleased with it.No notice was taken of what Captain Maxwell and I did;but Mr. Clifford, who had remained below collecting wordsfrom some intelligent natives, was strongly recommendedby Ookooma to go back to the boat; he walked up, however, without opposition, to the cave which we had beenexamining, and they ceased to importune him. A number oflittle boys who had observed us occasionally pulling flowersand plants, ran about collecting for us, and after presentingwhat, they had gathered, with much politeness, ran awaylaughing with an arch expression of ridicule at our curiosity.On our way back, instead of going directly off' to the.ships, we coasted along shore in our boats, which gave usa new view of a stone bridge, of one arch, connecting twoparts of the town. On the south side of the bridge wepassed a space of considerable extent, probably set apart asa burying ground. We saw here a number of large horseshoe tombs like those used in China, whitewashed, and-apparently kept in good repair. Most of the tombs,.however, are in the form of small square houses, with low

GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 77pyramidal roofs; some of these were tiled, others thatched.It is evident that, in what relates to the dead, they follow,in some respects, the Chinese customs.The whole coast at this place is of coral cliffs, the baseof which appears to have been scooped out by the action ofthe sea. As this excavation is at some places higher thanthe waves of the sea can be supposed to have ever reached,there is difficulty in assigning the sea as the cause; yetthe roof of the excavation is horizontal for a great extent,and its appearance, in every other respect, suggests that ithas been formed by the dashing of the waves. There is,moreover, some difficulty in accounting for coral cliffs beingso much above the level of the sea, in which, accordingto every supposition, they must have been formed.The scenery here, as in most countries in these climates,does not admit of a satisfactory description. It may be said,however, that it is more pleasing to the eye than that of islandsnear the equator, where the vegetation is so profusely luxuriant, as to overload the picture with foliage to the exclusionof every thing else. Here there is much variety; the numerous groves of pine-trees give some parts of it anEnglish air, but the style of landscape is what is calledtropical. The general character of the scenery at this spotis faithfully preserved in the drawing of Napakiang.

78 VOYAGE TO THEipth of September.—No answer having yet come fromthe Great Man, we begin to apprehend that they are goingto treat us in Chinese style, and exclude us from their countryaltogether. We have tried in vain to discover whether theKing is at this place, or a hundred, or as some maintain, athousand miles off; in the mean time, as we know theisland to be not more than sixty miles long, it is fair tosuppose that they wish to deceive us.We conjecture that a large building on a rising ground,three or four miles from us in an eastern direction, withtwo flag-staffs near it, is the palace mentioned in the account quoted by Pere Gaubil, Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses,Tom. XXIII. The natives always refuse to give any information when asked about this building.Whenever the natives come on board, if at all welldressed, they are asked into the cabin, where we treatthem with cherry brandy and Constantia. In the courseof conversation they contribute a number of new words,and, in general, when they see what the object is, are verywilling to lend their assistance, and take much pains to teachus the true pronunciation of their words. One man, however, who was not so quick as they generally are, was inthe cabin to-day for some time; Mr. Clifford was gettingfrom him the Loo-choo words for sour, sweet, salt, &c.;GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 79and in order to make him comprehend the questions, madehim taste different things that were sour, sweet, and so on :the poor fellow stood this very well, till some quassia wasgiven to him to get the word " bitter;" he had no soonertasted it, than he ran off quite astonished at the manner inwhich he had been entertained.It blew hard this morning, so that there was little intercourse with the shore; but towards sunset it moderated,and Ookooma, Jeema, and four other Chiefs, came on board,bringing with them a present of a bullock, two hogs, goats,and vegetables. The Chief whose name is Shayoon isthe most clever of them all; he is next in rank to Ookooma,but he generally takes the lead in discussion; he has aquick intelligent look, with more determination in hismanner than any of the others. They were very particular on all these state occasions to observe the order ofprecedence, and no one sat down till his superior wasseated. When any subject was discussed, one at a timerose to speak, but not in order of rank, and they never attempted to interrupt one another.The weather at this moment looked so stormy, that Iwent on board the Lyra to prepare for a gale; by which Ilost a very interesting conference with the chiefs. I learnt

80 VOYAGE TO THEfrom Captain Maxwell afterwards, that he had remonstratedwith them on their inconsistency and the pretended difficultyof getting answers from court; he gave them to understand, that he did not conceive it was treating the King ofEngland with due respect to deny his officers permission towalk on shore. Again, that they had promised to send pilots,but that none had come; and that many other promises hadnot been performed. He desired the interpreter to say, thathe was not pleased with their telling him so many differentstories, all of which could not be true; first they said thatthe bullocks, hogs, &c. were gifts from themselves; then, thatthey were sent by the Great Man; then, that there was noGreat Man here: in fine, he urged them strongly to tell himthe truth on all points. They made the interpreter repeat sixtimes over what Captain Maxwell had desired him to say;they then consulted amongst themselves a long time, and atlast assured Captain Maxwell, that a reply to the communications made by them to government would reach thisplace next day.As the stock and vegetables received by the ships had,by this time, amounted to a considerable quantity, a bagof dollars was offered to them, and they were urged totake payment for what had been sent on board; thisGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 81offer, which had been made more than once before, wasstill declined; upon which they were informed, that we considered it improper, as servants of government, to receivepresents to such an extent from individuals. Upon thisthey gave their assurance, that the stock had been senton board by order of the Loo-choo government, on theirbeing informed that the King of another country's ships hadarrived. No payment they said could therefore be taken.With this Captain Maxwell was satisfied. Their wish seemsto be, to prevent our opening any communication withtheir government, and they appear so decided upon thesematters, that they will probably succeed, notwithstandingall our efforts.The chiefs have dresses adapted to the state of theweather; yesterday being cold and threatening, they allcame on board with a sort of cloak or great coat made of athick blue stuff'like woollen cloth, buttoned in front. It istighter than the ordinary dress, and is worn over it. It isonly in fine weather, and on state occasions, that they wearthe band turban, called by them " hatchee matchee;' atall other times they go uncovered, having their hair dressedlike the rest of the people.20th of September.—The mercury in the barometer felllast night from 29- 72, to 29- 51, and the sky assumed aM

82 VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 83yellow appearance. We expected a heavy gale, more particularly as it was so near the equinox, but we were sosheltered by the land, that though it appeared to blow hardat sea, we felt nothing of it where we lay.Three or four canoes came round the south-west pointof land this forenoon; the people in them were supposedto have come from the other side of the island, for they didnot appear to have seen the ships before. One of thesepeople was much delighted with a looking-glass which wasshewn to him j he took it in his hands, and calling his companions about him, shewed them in turn its effect. Havingdone so several times, he held it opposite to his own facefor four or five minutes without altering his countenance inthe least; at last he smiled, and immediately and involuntarily nodded assent to the image in the glass, which had soexactly expressed what he felt himself; he seemed, however, aware, that it was a reflection of his own countenance,as he pointed to himself, yet he could not restrain hiscuriosity from looking behind, but instantly turned it roundagain. While the glass was in his hands, he made us severallong speeches, in which he frequently repeated the word" Kagung," the Loo-choo name for mirror; but, from hisbehaviour, it is probable he knew it only by name. One ofthis party sold his " Jeewa" or head ornaments for a wineglass. Sometime afterwards, the others saw a bottle, whichthey wished to purchase in the same way; it was, however,given to them as a present, and they went away very wellsatisfied. These canoes were of pine, from twelve to twentyfeet long, and from two to four wide; their anchor is madeof wood loaded with stones.As no answer came this morning from the Great Man,Captain Maxwell took the ships into a more secure anchorage at the north-east corner of the bay; our first anchorage being too close to a reef, and moreover open tothe south-west winds. The place we had now shifted to,xthough apparently exposed, is, in fact, sheltered by a chainof reefs under water outside of us to the westward. By thischange, we have been brought close to the bridge .spoken ofbefore, and are now abreast the east end of the town: theLyra not being more than a quarter of a mile from theshore. A strict watch is kept on shore, so that noboat leaves the ships without being observed. Ordershave been given for the whole anchorage to be carefullysounded; in doing this, the boats often approach the shore,and whenever this happens, a crowd of the natives, headedby one or other of the chiefs, repair to the spot, and wavethem to keep farther off.21st of September.—There appears to be some embargo**

VOYAGE TO THEupon the canoes, for there has not been one near us this*morning, and only one on board the Alceste. It was foundnecessary to-day to move the frigate still farther in, andfour or five hawsers were laid out for the purpose of warpingher a-head. While this was going on, the beach, and allthe heights near us, were crowded with people, wondering,no doubt, how the ship was made to move without sails, forthe hawsers were low down, and might have escaped theirobservation. In the canoe which visited the Alceste, therecame two men, who had not been seen before; they remained but a short time, which was spent in examining thehawsers and the mode of warping the ship. As soon asthey had made themselves master of this subject, they wenton shore, as if to make a report. During their visit theysaid little, being intent upon what was going on; but theinterpreter learnt from one of them, that a Great Man hadactually come, or was expected in the town to-day. Areport prevails, that the King of the island has lately beenon board in disguise. We cannot trace the report to anygood foundation, and it is probably false. At the sametime, if his Majesty has any curiosity, it is not unlikelythat he may have come near enough to see such a strangesight as we must be.It is possible that our moving up so close to the townGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 85has alarmed the people, and may have prevented theirvisiting us as heretofore; at all events, it is very unfair inour friends, the Chiefs, neither to let the people come onboard, nor to allow us to go on shore to look at them.9Our' occupation in the mean time is to observe thenatives through the telescope placed on a table on theLyra's poop.The stone bridge appears to be a greatthoroughfare, several roads from the country leading to it;it seems also to be the only entrance to the town on thisside.Nobody crosses it without stopping to look at us,and a crowd of idle people have taken post on and aboutit. We see a number of women coming from the countrywith baskets on their heads. Their outer dress differs fromthat of the men, it is open in front, and they have nogirdle; they have an under dress, or sack, which is alsoloose, but not open; in some we can see that this comesnearly to the feet, in others just to the knee, and we imagine that those who work in the fields have the short dress:most of them allow their upper garment to flow out withthe wind behind them.We observe a woman carrying achild across the hip as in India, with its hands on itsmother's shoulder, while her arm is round the child's waist.One young lady has been seen for some time amusing her-! self by making a dog bark at the ships. We see women

VOYAGE TO THEbeating rice in wooden mortars". On the banks of thestream which the bridge crosses, there are a number ofpeople washing clothes, which they perform in the Indianway, by dipping the clothes in water and beating them onstones. From one end of the beach to the other there is arange of people watching us, they are formed here and thereinto groups; one of which, on a craggy knoll abreast ofthe ships, has struck us as being particularly interesting. Afine majestic looking man, whose full beard and flowing garments remind us of a figure in the Cartoons of Raphael, isstanding in the middle of a circle of old men, who are lyingon the grass, and appear to be listening to him.22nd of September.—This morning brings us no news,no permission to land! A number of flags and streamers aredisplayed on the masts of the vessels in the inner harbour,and there seems to be something going on on shore; no boatshave come to us, and we have no occupation but lookingthrough the glass, which, however, affords a good deal of entertainment, particularly as the people whom we see with itact in the usual way, being unconscious of our scrutiny.In the afternoon a number of boats left the shore andproceeded to the Alceste in procession. In the foremostboat there seemed to be a person of consequence, whomwe immediately conjectured to be the Great Man alludedGREAT LOO-CHOC ISLAND. 87to by the people yesterday. He got on board the Alcestebefore us, and the natives also had left their canoes, sothat we found the ship's decks crowded with people. TheChief, whom we found seated in the cabin, was clothedin purple silk, with a light purple hatchee matchee. Anofficial communication of our history was now repeated atthe old man's request. He listened with great attentiontill Captain Maxwell concluded his statement, by informinghim that the ship was leaky and required frequent pumping. He then begged permission to see this operation, ifit would not give too much trouble. As this was exactlywhat we wished, the chain pumps were ordered to be gotready, and the conference went on, consisting principallyof compliments. Observing that we took notice of hisbeing a little deaf, he seemed anxious to explain that thiswas the effect of age. He made us feel his pulse, and lookat the withered state of his hand, then taking ours andfeeling the pulse, held them up along with his own, andlaughed with great good humour at the contrast which agehad produced. He was about sixty years old, and hisbeard of thin hair was as white as snow: he had a cheerfulness of expression, and a liveliness of manner, which areremarkable for a man of his years. His manners weregraceful and elegant, and from the first moment he seemed

K88 VOYAGE TO THEquite at his ease. Every thing about him, in short, indicated good-breeding, and a familiarity with good society;and we could not help remarking his decided superiority inappearance over the other chiefs.When the pumps were ready, he was escorted to the maindeck, where he sat for some time in great admiration of themachinery; and seeing the labour required to work it, heseemed really affected at our situation, which he naturally -thought must be very bad, from the immense quantity ofwater thrown out by the pumps. The ship being upright, thewater did not run off freely from the deck, and in a short time/it flowed round the chair in which the old man was seated.Three or four of the sailors seeing him somewhat uneasy atthis inundation, took him up chair and all, and placed himon a dry spot. The old gentleman was surprised, not displeased, and very graciously replied to the low bows whichthe sailors made him. On returning to the cabin, they wereall entertained as usual with sweet wine, cherry brandy,and pipes. The old man filled pipes for us, and as soon asthis part of the ceremonial had been gone through, a formalrequest was made for permission to land the Alceste's casksand stores, in order to stop the leak and make other repairs.This produced a long discussion amongst the chiefs, inwhich the old man joined but little; he spoke, however, nowGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 89and then, and whatever he said, appeared to be to thepurpose. Whenever the chiefs spoke, they rose and addressed themselves to him in a most respectful manner. Atlength, having agreed about an answer, they communicatedto Captain Maxwell that there was no good place here forthe purposes he wanted, and that as our present anchoragewas unsafe, they recommended our going round to theharbour alluded to on a former occasion. At this place,which they call Winching or Oonching, he said we mightput on shore whatever we chose. On our asking if in Winching the water was deep enough to admit a large ship, along discussion arose, during which they appeared to beconsidering the merits of the harbour. They seemed apprehensive of giving it too high a character, and that on ourreaching it we should be disappointed. The old man atlength suggested sending the " little ship" to see whether itwould answer. To this Captain Maxwell agreed, onlyrequesting that a person might accompany us, in order tosave time in the search. Simple as this appears, they took along time to consider it, and ended by saying that no replycould be given till the next day.While the subject of this harbour was under discussionthe old man drew on a sheet of paper, a chart of the islandand pointed out the place where the harbour lay. It provedN

90 VOYAGE TO THEafterwards, when we had surveyed the island, that thissketch possessed considerable accuracy, as the situation ofthe harbour of which they spoke corresponds exactly withthat of Port Melville, discovered in the Lyra. It i& muchto be regretted that this curious sketch is lost.The Chief now walked about the cabin, examined theglobes, books, and pictures, with great attention. Thewainscot struck him particularly, as well as the machineryand finish of the windows and sliding shutters. CaptainMaxwell tried to make him comprehend our track on theglobe. He had felt it becoming to preserve some statewhile business was going on, but he now became quitechatty and familiar. He went all over the ship, accompanied by the other chiefs and his own personal suite,consisting of a pipe bearer, a man who carried his largecamp chair, another with a cover of red cloth for the chair,and a man who carried a round Japan box for the hatcheematchee.Two others took it in turn to fan him, and tohold his arm by the elbow and wrist whenever he walkedabout; probably as a piece of state, for the ship had verylittle motion: these fanners were very expert at theirbusiness, for not content with cooling his face and neck,they lifted up his large sleeves and fanned his arms. Onreturning to the cabin, he saw Mr. Clifford using gloves,GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 91and begged leave to try them on; with the right one hesucceeded very well, but the nails of his left hand beingabout an inch long, he found it not so easy a matter:he seemed to think them the oddest things he had met with,and laughing much, held them up repeatedly to the otherchiefs.The old man brought a present for Captain Maxwell,and sent another to the Lyra, consisting of a hog, a kid, twobags of potatoes, a basket of charcoal, thirty bundles ofeggs (five in each), a bundle of vermicelli, and a jar of anardent spirit called samchew. All the chiefs, who were intheir best attire, were severally accompanied by a mancarrying a box for the ha'tchee-matchee; their dresses wereof various colours, and their sandals and stockings allalike. On rising to go away, the old man bowed to me, andsaid that he meant to visit my ship; but this being evidentlycomplimentary, I begged him not to take so much trouble:he, in return, expressed himself obliged to me for beingsatisfied with the politeness intended. The Embassador'sbarge was manned to take him on shore, but as soon as hesaw what was intended, he drew back, and declared that hecould not land in any boat but his own. As it was supposedthat his modesty prevented his accepting this offer, he wasurged to overcome his scruples, and land in the manner

VOYAGE TO THEproposed; he still, however, declined the honour, but atlast went down the ladder, and having stepped into thebarge, made a bow to Captain Maxwell, as if in acknow-rledgment of the attention, but immediately afterwards wentinto his own boat and pushed off, under a salute of threeguns from each ship.Our intention of returning this visit the next day wasnot mentioned during the discussions in the cabin, from thecertainty of its being -combated, and perhaps overruled:but when the last of the chiefs was getting into the boat,the interpreter was desired to tell him, in a careless way, asa matter of course, that next morning this visit would bereturned on shore. As had been foreseen, this did notreceive their approbation; the interpreter went into theboat, where every persuasion was used to convince him ofthe impropriety of our intention : they could not succeed,however, in making him yield this point, and at. length wentaway. This interpreter is called " John" by all parties, andthough merely an under servant of the factory at Canton,he is a very shrewd fellow. His English is certainly not thebest, and probably the Chinese he speaks is the base provincial language of Canton; so that misunderstandingsare no doubt often caused by his erroneous interpretation.John's report after the boat had put off, and from whichGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.we gather that we shall be expected, was as follows: " Theyax me, ' what for my Ta-yin come sho?' I say, ' to makechin-chin* they Ta-yin;' they tell me, ' You Ta-yin toe-much great mandarine, no can come sho;' I say, ' Whatfor my Ta-yin no come sho ? He great man; he -f- Ta-wang-tee too much great man; he let you Ta-yin come boardship, and you no let him come sho, chin-chin you Ta-yin ;Avhat for this ?' Then they speak long time together; by andby ax me, ' how many people bring sho you Ta-yin ?' So Ishake my head, I no like give answer long time, (theyalways take long time answer me). When they ax me again,I say, « Ta-yin bring five people mo besides me/ They say,' too much men come;' I say, «ax, ' What time come ?' I give no answer."No, no too much.' They23d September.—As we had not contemplated suchadventures as these, we had made no preparations forthem; and now that it was necessary to make somereturn to the chief whom we were going to visit, we foundgreat difficulty in preparing a suitable present.CaptainMaxwell took with him several dozens of wine, some books,glasses, various trinkets, and a large piece of blue broad* Chin-chin in the corrupt dialect of Canton, means the ceremony of salutation, which consists in the action of holding up the closed hands, pressedtogether before the face, and bowing at the same time.•f Ta-whang-tee is Chinese for Emperor, King.

100 VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 101;jr"ii[II HIM!.sailors, who had been kept in the boats for fear of theirdoing mischief, had not been neglected by the Chief, whohad sent them part of the feast, nor did it seem that theyhad any objection to the sackee. We looked anxiously onthe right and left as we passed through the crowd, in hopesof seeing some of the women, but in this expectation wewere disappointed. At a considerable distance indeed, onthe opposite side of the harbour, we saw a group of women,several of whom came down to the causeway to obtain abetter view of the boats as they passed. Six or eight younggirls ran to the pier head, round some rocks near the end;they reached this spot just as we rowed past, but lookedquite frightened at finding themselves so near us, andimmediately drew 'back out of our sight. We fancied thatwe could discover a good deal of beauty in some of theirfaces, and that their figures were handsome ; but as we hadnot seen a fair lady's face for nearly half a year before, ourjudgment in this case is not perhaps to be depended on.Ookooma and his associates put off to accompany us in oneof their own boats, but as it blew hard, they came no fartherthan the pier head: Jeeroo, however, was sent along withus, to see that there were no stray sheep.What is to follow is uncertain, but it is clear that we havemade little progress of late, while fresh obstacles have beenhourly rising against our landing; in the meantime, the Loochooansshew no little sagacity and kindness of dispositionin supplying us liberally with all kinds of stock.24th of September.—Last night and to-day it has blowna hard gale of wind, beginning at north north-east, andshifting to north-west, but the reefs and the land break itsforce, and enable us to ride in perfect security : in all probability it blew severely in the open sea. The barometerfell from 29. 62, to 29. 50, yesterday; in the evening it hadreached 29. 48, and this morning stood at 29. 40. Aboutfour in the morning it began to rise rapidly, and the severityof the gale did not come on till it had risen a good deal.The thermometer both in the day and night stands at 82°,with very little variation, but the sky being constantlyclouded, no observations could be made.25th of September.—Jeeroo came on board this morningwith a present of vegetables and fruit, and afterwards wenton board the Aleeste to join Ookooma and Jeema. Theybad preceded him with a present from the Chief, by whosedesire they made a number of kind inquiries, and repeatedlyexpressed, in his name, surprise and satisfaction at ourhaving been able to ride out the gale. They also apologizedfor not visiting us yesterday, which the gale had renderedimpossible. It was represented in the conference to-day,that our limbs were getting quite stiff for want of exercise,

VOYAGE TO THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 103and that it became absolutely necessary for us to land, onaccount of our health: they debated amongst themselvesfor some time, and then said that a final answer would begiven to-morrow. They have quite forgotten their promiseto send a pilot for the harbour to the northward: they wishalso that we should forget it, since they change the subjectwhenever it is spoken of, and affect total ignorance of ourmeaning. The government probably think it best to keepus where we are, and therefore discourage our investigatingthe island any further.Jeeroo, who begins to get quite familiar with us all, is alaughing good-humoured man, about thirty: he shakes everyone cordially by the hand when he comes on board, and engages in all our amusements with great cheerfulness. He isvery useful to us, because the anxiety he has to learn Englishmakes him communicate freely the knowledge of his ownlanguage: thus there is little difficulty in fixing him over aglass of Constantia, upon which occasions he contributeslargely to Mr. Clifford's vocabulary. Some of our words theLoo-chooans cannot pronounce; the letter I preceded by cappears the most difficult; they call Clifford " Criffar," andeven this requires many efforts : not one of the natives hasyet been able to make any thing of child; they call it shoidah,choiah, and chyad.26th of September.—No boats have been near us to-day,and we might readily land if we chose it; but Cap tain Maxwell is resolved not to do so till he gets the consent of thenatives.27th of September.—As we were still prevented fromgoing on shore, we amused ourselves by examining a reefwhich forms the north side of the anchorage. We found afield of coral about half a mile square, dry at low water,with the surf breaking very high on the outer edge, whichlies exposed to the waves from the north. The surface ofthe rock is every where worn into small holes, which beingleft full of water as the tide goes out, are occupied by anumber of beautiful blue fish. The coral is exceedinglyhard, and though at many places it sticks up in sharp'points, it requires a hammer of considerable weight tobreak it, and emits sparks like flint when struck; in ashort time it entirely defaces the hammer. This extentof level space has suggested the idea of measuring a baseon it in order to survey the anchorage, since there appearsso little chance of our being allowed to land for this purposeon the beach.While we were deliberating on this matter, we had astriking proof of the inconvenience to which we were likelyto be exposed during this survey, by the tide rising and

104 VOYAGE TO THEfairly washing us off. Notwithstanding this, we determinedto commence next morning, and returned to make preparations, in high spirits^ at the prospect of an occupation,if not on terra firma, at least out of the ship, within whosesides we had been confined so long. On returning, wefound that Captain Maxwell had arranged a party to visitthe small island and reef which we were so close to on the14th instant; the survey was therefore postponed.Jeeroo sent us off some fresh fish to-day ; some were red,and one or two blue: he came himself afterwards, and washappy to find us much gratified by his present. A formalmessage was sent to-day to the chiefs in attendance,stating that both ships were in want of fresh water, and thatthe boats must go on shore with casks to bring some off.In a short time after this message had been delivered, anumber of canoes came alongside with large tubs of water; astrong proof of their alertness in getting rid of all our excusesfor landing, and at the same time, it must be owned, of theirreadiness to supply our wants. An elderly gentleman, not achief, visited us to-day, accompanied by his secretary. Hisappearance and manners being greatly in his favour, we paidhim all the attention in our power. His wish was to bepermitted to go all over the ship at his leisure; and in thisGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 105way he examined every thing on board with far more attention than any body had done before him. His secretary,who was equally inquisitive, accompanied him in order totake notes. He employed himself for about six hours inexamining the upper deck, and never quitted any thing tillhe understood its use. While he was thus occupied, he wasattended by the sailors, who were pleased with his reverendappearance, and very readily assisted the old man in hisenquiries.It was interesting to observe, indeed, how early thegentle and engaging manners of all classes here Avon uponthe sailors, no less than upon the officers. The natives fromthe first were treated with entire confidence; no watch wasever kept over them, nor were they excluded from any partof the ships; and not only was nothing stolen, but whenany thing was lost, nobody even suspected for an instant,that it had been taken by them.The old man next came down to the cabin, where heremained a long time examining the books and furniture,and occasionally engaging in conversation with Mr. Clifford, for whose Vocabulary he supplied many new words,and corrected others which had been written down erroneously. He would not accept any thing valuable, butwas grateful for samples of rope, canvas, and cloth. Thisp'Hi;

106 VOYAGE TO THEold gentleman renewed his examination of the brig nextday; nor was it till the third day that he completed hissurvey.28th of September.—At sunrise we set out for ReefIsland, which lies about six miles from the anchorage: wereached it in about an hour, but as it was low water, thecoral was left almost bare for a considerable way out, andour large boat could not get near the beach.In this dilemma we took possession of a canoe which was at anchor,and in several trips all the party landed.Near a hut wesaw about a dozen people who stood looking at us till welanded, and then ran away, leaving their tobacco-pipes,pouches, and various other things on the ground about thehut, in which we found a pot of boiled sweet potatoes andseveral jars of water.Having, in vain, tried to allay theapprehensions of the natives by waving to them, to inducethem to approach us, we sat down to breakfast; which wehad hardly done, when two of them, an old man and a boy,came to the door of our tent and prostrated themselvesbefore us, apparently in great alarm, for they answered incoherently, " ooa" (yes) to every question we asked them.At last Ave raised the old man on his knees, but he wouldnot quit this posture till we gave him a glass of ruin, whichre-assured him a little, and shortly afterwards he consentedGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 107to stand on his legs. Having thus gradually gained confidence, he made signs that we had taken his canoe: uponwhich an order was given to the coxswain to restore it. Heguessed immediately what was said, and in the joy of hisheart was proceeding to prostrate himself again, but wasstopped by our holding out buttons and some pieces ofmeat and bread to him, which he received in both hands,and touching his head each time with the presents, madethree low obeisances and retired.On rising from breakfast we found, near the tent, abouta dozen natives, who, in most respects, resembled ourfriends at Napakiang, but were not so neatly dressed; andtheir hair, instead of being formed into a knot, was allowedto fly loose. During the morning the party amused themselves in various ways. Some took their guns and went insearch of curlews and sea-snipes: others set out to explorethe reefs; and two or three remained near the tent, for thepurpose of making observations on the sun at noon; but asit became cloudy about this time, the latter party failedin their object. The rest were more successful; the sportsmen having shot some game for dinner; and the otherparty having found all things favourable for inspectingthe reef.The examination of a coral reef during the different

I " 111I1"" I108 VOYAGE TO THEstages of one tide, is particularly interesting. When thetide has left it for some time it becomes dry, and appearsto be a compact rock, exceedingly hard and ragged; but asthe tide rises, and the waves begin to wash over it, thecoral worms protrude themselves from holes which werebefore invisible. These animals are of a great variety ofshapes and sizes, and in such prodigious numbers, that, ina short time, the whole surface of the rock appears to bealive and in motion. The most common worm is in theform of a star, with arms from four to six inches long,which are moved about with a rapid motion in all directions, probably to catch food. Others are so sluggish, that they may be mistaken for pieces of the rock,and are generally of a dark colour, and from four to fiveinches long, and two or three round. When the coral isbroken, about high water mark, it is a solid hard stone, butif any part of it be detached at a spot which the tide reachesevery day, it is found to be full of worms of different lengthsand colours, some being as fine as a thread and severalfeet long, of a bright yellow, and sometimes of a blue colour:others resemble snails, and some are not unlike lobsters inshape, but soft, and not above two inches long *.* A large collection, which was at this time made of these Zoophites, wasunfortunately lost in the Alceste.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 109The growth of coral appears to cease when the worm is nolonger exposed to the washing of the sea. Thus, a reefrises in the form of a cauliflower, till its top has gained thelevel of the highest tides, above which the worm has nopower to advance, and the reef of course no longer extendsitself upwards. The other parts, in succession, reach the surface, and there stop, forming in time a level field with steepsides all round. The reef, however, continually increases,and being prevented from going higher, extends itselflaterally in all directions. But this growth being as rapidat the upper edge as it is lower down, the steepness of theface of the reef is still preserved. These are the circumstances which render coral reefs so dangerous in navigation ; for, in the first place, they are seldom seen abovethe water; and, in the next, their sides are so steep, that aship's bows may strike against the rock before any changeof soundings has given warning of the danger.The island at high water is formed into three parts,which at low water are joined by reefs; the whole beingabout two and a half or three miles from east to west, andtolerably clear of rocks on the south side; but on the northit is guarded by a semicircle of coral extending upwards ofa mile from the shore. On the centre island is only onehut, which, as there was reason to believe it to be the actual

110 VOYAGE TO THEabode of the inhabitants, it may be allowable to describe.The walls were sunk under ground, so that only the roofappeared from without, the inside was fifteen feet by six:the walls of neatly squared stones, being two feet high, andthe roof in the middle about six or seven high, formed of aridge pole supported in the centre by a forked stick; therafters of rough branches were covered with reeds, andthatched over with the leaf of the wild pine, which growson all the coral islands. The fire-place was at one endon a raised part of the floor, and the other end appearedto be the sleeping place. It was conjectured, that thiswretched place could only be meant as a temporary residence of fishermen, whose nets we saw lying about; butthe number of water jars and cooking utensils which wefound in and about it, gave it the appearance of a fixedhabitation.It was almost dark when we quitted the island, and thetide carrying us out of our proper course, we missed theships and grounded on the reefs near the town; but asthe tide was flowing, we easily got off, and by coastingalong, soon gained the anchorage.Sunday, 29th of September.—This day is memorable,on account of its being the first on which we were permitted to land.IGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. IllYesterday, when we were absent at Reef Island, thechiefs had come on board to say that we might land, butthat our walk must be confined to the beach, and thatwe were neither to enter the town, nor to go into thecountry. At one o'clock several of the chiefs came onboard and accompanied us to the beach, where we landedamidst an immense crowd, and were handed along byOokooma and the rest, who, in their desire to be civil, heldus by the arms. The day, however, being excessively hot,and the sand deep, we found this troublesome, and beggedleave to walk alone, to which they reluctantly consented,and we proceeded along the beach for a quarter of a mile.Beginning to get tired of our walk, we stopped and expressed some surprise at such a reception, and told themhow disagreeable it was to us to be in the sun at such anhour. But our remonstrances did not produce much effect,for, on our objecting particularly to the heat, they shewedus to a sort of cave in a rock on the beach, where they putdown a mat and wished us to drink tea in the shade, sincewe disliked the sun. This could not be submitted to, however, and we told them that our object in landing was notto sit down on the beach to drink tea, but to walk aboutunder the trees in order to recover our health, impaired bya long stay on board ship. They tried all their eloquenceto persuade us that our walk, thus limited, was perfectly

112 VOYAGE TO THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 1131pleasant; till at length Captain Maxwell gave them to understand, that he wished to go to the top of the hills underthe trees; but that, as he did not mean to advance a singlestep beyond what was approved of, he would return instantlyto the ship if they persisted in confining him to the beach.A consultation was held upon this, during which, frequentreference was made to several elderly men, whose opinionsappeared to have great weight. They did not wear thedress of chiefs, but, from all that passed, we suspectedthem to be persons about court, who had been sent toassist the councils of the local commission, without superseding its authority. They at last agreed to our going tothe top of the hill, taking the precaution before we set out,of sending on a couple of runners, probably to give warningto the women who might be in that direction. About halfway up the road, which winds along a steep face, there is aneatly-built well, supplied by a stream which runs along acarved water-course, and near it were three or four rudelycarved stones about a foot long and four inches across, withslow matches and a small quantity of rice laid upon each.Mr. Clifford distinctly made out that this was meant as areligious offering, but its precise object could not be discovered, though it was conjectured that the guardian deityof the well might have some title to the honour. The sideof the hill is cut into horizontal irregular terraces, whichare cultivated with apparent care, and irrigated by meansof ditches leading from the well. On gaining the browof the hill which overlooks the anchorage, the chiefsstopped, but as we were within a few yards of the summit, where we saw a shady grove, we begged them toproceed, to which, after a short deliberation, they consented. By gaining this eminence, we commanded a viewof an extensive valley, more beautiful than any thing we hadever seen; and on the side opposite to us we saw the largebuilding spoken of before, generally suspected to be theKing's palace: our questions, however, on this subject w"ereValways answered in so evasive a manner, and with such apparent distress, that we seldom made any allusion either toit or to the King.Here we remained under the trees for an hour, drinking tea and smoking pipes in company with all the chiefs,besides four or five of the old men mentioned before. Weamused them by lighting their pipes with a burning glass;but one old gentleman, who suspected some trick, anddid not join in the surprise shewn by the rest, held outhis hand that it might be • exposed to the focus; and hewas soon undeceived, to the great amusement of the circle.The magnifying power of the glass engaged the attention of them all, but they were differently affected by it:Q»

114 VOYAGE TO THEa start and an exclamation of pleased surprise was themost usual effect; some laughed immoderately at everyexperiment, while others were made very grave by it, whohad not been particularly serious before. Advantage wastaken of the moment when their admiration of the glass wasat the highest, to present it to Jeeroo, whose good-will it wasthought expedient to conciliate: he had not expected this,and felt obliged to us for so public a mark of our esteem.A man on horseback happening to ride by, it wasgravely suggested to the chiefs that nothing would so materially contribute to the establishment of our health as thisspecies of exercise; but they insisted upon treating ourrequest as a mere joke. On the way back an attempt wasmade to vary the walk by turning to the left on reachingthe brow of the hill, and so walking along the edge of thecliff to another road; the chiefs observed upon this that weshould Infallibly tumble down and kill ourselves; affecting,notwithstanding the absurdity of any such apprehensions,to be greatly distressed at our danger: so we turned back,after having had a short interview with an old man seatedin a shed on the edge of the precipice. His white beard,which covered his breast, suited well with his sedate andcontemplative air, and gave him much the aspect of a hermit.Our appearance did not in the least discompose him, norGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 115did he take any notice of us till desired to do so by Ookooma;he then bowed slightly, but immediately resumed his fixedlook, as if he had been quite alone.As we drew near to the place where we had landed, ourcompanions surprised us by an invitation to a feast, prepared, they said, on our account in a temple close to theshore. Here they gave us painted eggs, smoked salt pork,and various preparations of eggs and fish, with sweet cakesin numberless forms, besides tea, pipes, and sackee, a lightkind of wine made hot. Nothing could be more cheerfulthan they all were to-day: they placed us on the floor atthe upper end of the room, and, for some time, they wouldnot allow us to move; but Mr. Clifford, who, from the progress he has made in their language, has become a greatfavourite, was invited to join a merry party in the verandah,to which they brought flowers, fruits, and every thing theycould think of, in order to learn their English names, andgive in return those of Loo-choo.On reaching the boats, Jeeroo and two of his friendsseemed disposed to go on board; they were accordinglyinvited to do so, which made him so happy, that he tooka rudely-carved ivory ornament, in the shape of a monkey,from his tobacco-pouch, and gave it to me. Dinner was ontable when they came on board, but there was time before

lie VOYAGE TO THE Itaking my friends below, to intimate to the servants, thatthese gentlemen were going to dine with me, so that whenwe reached the cabin, three plates were laid in addition. Theyhad probably not expected to find dinner ready for them onboard, for they expressed surprise at these preparationshaving been made, and would not sit down for some time.When the covers were removed, they became silent, andlooked on either hand for directions how to proceed. Onbeing helped to soup, they did not stir till they saw us takespoons, in the management of which they shewed but littleawkwardness. The knife and fork gave them more trouble,but they set seriously about acquiring a knowledge of theiruse, and, in a short time, found no difficulty.Their grave propriety on this occasion is the moreworthy of remark, from its standing in some measureopposed to our own behaviour under similar circumstances :for instance, when we first tried to eat with their chopsticks : on that occasion there was a sort of giggling embarrassment shewn by some of us, a contempt as it were ofourselves, for condescending to employ an effort to acquirethe use of a thing apparently so unimportant. Their diminutive cups and odd dishes, too, sometimes excited mirthamongst us. Our Loo-choo friends, however, never committed themselves in this way; a difference of manners, whichGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 117may arise from their looking upon us as their superiors, andvice versa; but even admitting this, which we were sufficiently disposed to do, it is certainly no excuse for us.On this occasion Jeeroo and his friends had evidentlymade up their minds to find every thing quite new, for allthree made a slight involuntary exclamation when one ofthe covers was lifted up, and shewed a dish of their ownsweet potatoes. They ate of every thing, using a greatdeal of salt, with the fineness and whiteness of which theywere much pleased. A tart, however, being put on thetable, they all objected at first to touching it; they wouldnot say why: they were at length prevailed upon to tasteit, which they had no sooner done, than they exclaimed thatit was " masa! masa \" (good! good!) It was made of Scotchmarmalade, and Jeeroo, in recommending it to his friends,told them it was " injassa, amasa," (bitter, sweet), a unionwhich they appeared not to have met with before. Theydrank wine with us, but said they feared it would makethem tipsy; upon which we shewed them our mode ofmixing it with water, which was evidently new to them, forthey relished it so much in this form, that they were in afair way of running unconsciously into the very excesswhich they dreaded. As soon as the cloth was removed,they rose, and went to walk about the ship: on our

4118 VOYAGE TO THEshewing a wish to accompany them, they intreated us tokeep our seats.During dinner, though it was the first they had ever seenin the European style, these people not only betrayed noawkwardness, but adopted our customs, such as drinkingwine with each other, so readily, that we were frequently ata loss to determine whether they had but just learned thesecustoms, or whether their own usages in these cases weresimilar to ours. As they pushed off in their boat they wereasked to sing, which they did at once, and by their mannerwe suspected that the song had some allusion to us, butwe could not make out the words.30th of September.—During the whole of this morningwe were engaged in the survey, accompanied by several ofthe midshipmen of both ships. We measured a base, andcontinued taking angles till the tide rose and drove us off.1st of October.—As a free intercourse was now establishedwith the natives at this place, and little doubt remained ofour being able to gain their permission in a day or two forlanding the Alceste's stores, it became an object to ascertain,without further delay, whether or not this anchorage wasbetter than the harbour described by the natives as being afew miles only to the northward. While any apprehensionsexisted of our not being able to land here, it was not thoughtGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 119prudent to send the Lyra to look for that harbour, lest theehiefs should become still more suspicious of our intentions.At this moment, however, there was reason to believe thatthe chiefs wished the Alceste to remain where she was, andit was expected that any show of moving to another har7bour would stimulate their exertions to render our presentsituation agreeable.The Lyra was accordingly ordered to weigh this morningat daylight, for the purpose of examining the coast forten or twelve leagues to the northward. We went out bya narrow passage through the reefs, and in the courseof the morning beat up to Sugar Loaf Island. We didnot land upon it, but passed near enough to see that it isrichly cultivated on the lower parts, and that all the housesare collected into villages, shaded as usual by large treesround the bottom, and for one-third of the way up the sidesof the peak. As this was our furthest point in the presentsurvey, we tacked on reaching the Sugar Loaf, and coastedround the shores of a large square bay on the west side ofthe great island. The wind shifted gradually as we sailedalong, blowing directly off the shore at every place, bywhich means we were enabled to complete the circuit of thebay before dark, after which we anchored in sixty-five fat-horns water. Next morning we resumed our examination ofill,,]

120 VOYAGE TO THEthe coast, but as the weather was fine, we hoisted out a boatand pulled close along the shore, while the brig kept hercourse at the distance of several miles. In this manner wetraced the whole shore, till we came close to Napakiang,without seeing any port. We tried to land at severalplaces, but were every where kept off by coral reefsstretching along the coast, at the distance of two or threehundred yards, and forming, to strangers at least, an impenetrable barrier. The canoes of the natives paddled awayfrom us, and passed through the surf by passages which wewere afraid to approach. We returned to the brig abouttwo o'clock, and at three anchored in our former place atNapakiang.The departure of the Lyra had excited a great sensationon shore; the chiefs came off to inquire of Captain Maxwell where the " honee gua" (little ship) was; but he didnot choose to satisfy them, except by saying that they hadtrifled with him so long, and refused to let him land hiscasks and stores with such obstinacy, that he must endeavourto find some more favourable place at which to refit hisship. The effect was exactly what he wished; they intreatedhim not to think of moving from Napakiang; offered himnot only large boats to put his stores in, but said he shouldhave store-rooms on shore for whatever he desired, whileGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 121his ship was refitting. They moreover granted him permission to land with his officers, and to go to the top of thehill without being guarded as formerly.On the Lyra's anchoring, the chiefs came on board ingreat agitation, desiring to know what we had discovered.As we had actually nothing to relate, there was little difficultyin keeping our secret. They accompanied me on boardthe Alceste when I went to make my report, but CaptainMaxwell, having found the advantage he had already gainedby keeping them in ignorance of his intentions, was nowisecommunicative. They now offered to allow his people toland for the purpose of washing their clothes, which theyhad before refused to do, and in short, were in a mood togrant any thing, provided we were willing to remain at thispart of the island. They did not pretend that this was outof regard for us, and it was easy to see that they apprehendedmore trouble in managing uS any where else than at thisplace. Amongst the arguments used by them to dissuadeus from going to the other end of the island, they said it wasinhabited by savages. It came out accidentally too, thatin the event of the ship's actually proceeding to other partsof the island, the six chiefs were to accompany us: so thatthey were probably influenced by considerations of personalconvenience to make every exertion to prevent our moving.RII'liiilll

132 VOYAGE TO THE3d of October.—The Lyra's crew were allowed to goon shore to-day to wash their clothes, and amuse themselves by running about on the side of the hilL Two of thesailors of this party, who happened to be singing near thewell, drew a number of natives round them, who expressedgreat pleasure at hearing their songs. At first the crowdconsisted entirely of the peasantry, who listened with greatattention, and never interrupted the sailors; but in abouthalf an hour, a person of some rank, with a number ofattendants, came up, and begged them to sing severalof their songs over again : we could not find out who thisperson was, but it was probably one of the chiefs, some ofwhom are remarkably fond of our music.4th of October.—The survey on the reef was completedto-day: the only inconvenience we had experienced here,was the limited time which the tide allowed u& each day,otherwise the situation was well adapted for a base, from itscommanding a view of all parts of the anchorage. Duringthe progress of the principal survey, the young gentlemensent by Captain Maxwell, in conjunction with the midshipmen of the Lyra, completed a survey of the reef itself. Anative of a genteel appearance^ but not in the dress of achiefj visited the Lyra to-day, and gave me a present of twapipes and two bags of sweet potatoes.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.5th of October.—Captain Maxwell called for me thismorning at sunrise, on his way to the shore. The chiefs hadnot expected us so early, and our only companion for sometime was an old peasant, who now and then ran on beforeto give notice of our approach. Two well dressed peopleshortly afterwards came up, and continued with us duringour walk, which at first lay along the beach, but afterwardsled into the country; some exception was taken to thisby our companions, but as no attention was paid to them,they desisted.After walking about a mile, we passed through a groveof young trees, and found ourselves close to a village, whichlies in the bottom of a glen highly cultivated, the housesbeing almost entirely hid by trees, of which the bamboo isthe most conspicuous.This village is surrounded by a close hedge, and everyseparate house also has an inclosure: some of the houseshave attached to them neat arbours, formed of a lightframe of bamboo covered with a variety of creepers. Therice fields are divided by small banks of earth, made toretain the water, and along the top of each bank there is afoot-path; the whole valley having much the air of a scenein India. A number of the villagers, accompanied by theirchildren, came out to meet us, but there were no women

124 VOYAGE TO THEamongst them: we passed on, as they were evidently averseto our entering the village.On our way across the valley we were attracted by theappearance of a cottage, so buried in foliage as to be completely hid from our view till we were within a few pacesof the door. It was surrounded by a slight fence of rods,about an inch apart, with a line of creepers along the top,and hanging down on both sides : a wicker gate admittedus, and we entered the house, which we found divided intotwo apartments, eight feet square, besides a small verandahat one end. The floors, which were made of slips of bamboo, were raised about six inches from the ground, andcovered with a straw mat. The walls were five feet high,being neatly wattled with split bamboo, above which rose apointed thatched roof. It was occupied by an old man,whom we appeared to have disturbed at breakfast, for cupsand tea-things were arranged on the floor; he asked us to sitdown, and gave us pipes and tea. The little apartment wewere in was as neat as any thing we had ever seen : on oneside there was a set of shelves, with cups, bowls, and cookingutensils; on the others were hung various implements ofhusbandry, with hats and various dresses, all clean and inorder. Higher up was a sort of loft or garret, formed bybamboo poles, laid horizontally from the top of the walls;GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 125on this were placed various tools, nets, and baskets. Thefire-place was in the middle of one side, and sunk below thelevel. On the outside, in the space between the house andthe fence, there was a pigeon house and a poultry yard, andclose to the little verandah spoken of before, there stoodtwo spinning-wheels of a light and ingenious construction.All round on the outside of the fence, the trees were highand thick; and though the sun was above the hills, thehouse was completely shaded except at the end, where asmall opening admitted the rays into the verandah. Westaid some time with the old farmer, trying to express ouradmiration of the simplicity and beauty of his cottage, andthen went up the opposite side of the valley.Here we found a road like a dressed walk in a garden:following this, we passed through a series of beautiful grovesof bamboo and other trees, till at length, after windingabout a good deal, we came to a double row of tall pinetrees, interspersed with many others whose names we didnot know, so as to form a walk which must be shady atall hours of the day. This road we knew would lead to thetown, and therefore when we had reached the highest pointwe turned to the right, and after a short walk reached thegrove of trees which had -been made the limit to our firstwalk on the 29th ultimo. At this place Captain Maxwellsurprised the natives a good deal by shooting several birds

126 VOYAGE TO THEon the wing, but they could not be prevailed upon to firethemselves, nor even to pull the trigger when no powders was in the pan.6th of October.—After divine service to-day on boardthe Alceste, a long conference was held between CaptainMaxwell and the five chiefs, when, after a good deal of discussion, it was agreed on their part to allow the Alceste'sstores to be landed, for the purpose of getting at the leak.Our means of interpreting on these occasions are not thebest that could be wished ; but John, our Chinese, is nevertheless a keen fellow, and very ready with answers whenpressed.We generally explain as fully as possible to Johnwhat our wishes are, and then leave him to communicatethem the best way he can.An instance of his quicknessoccurred to-day, which seems worth mentioning. Johnhad communicated to them, by Captain Maxwell's desire,that as the leak complained of was in the magazine, itwould be necessary to land the powder: they debated along time upon this, and then asked John" Why the powderwas not put on board the little ship ?"John, who was notaware of any good reason, affected to be surprised at thisquestion, which he refused to interpret, saying that ifCaptain Maxwell thought such a measure right, he wouldsurely not have waited till they suggested it. The light inwhich he had thus put the question, made them earnestlyGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 127desire him not to mention any thing about it, declaring atthe same time, that they would willingly give a place forthe powder, and for any other stores which Captain Maxwellmight wish to land.To-day for the first time they talked unreservedly, of theking, whose name even they had hitherto studiously avoided:they spoke freely of his majesty's having sent all the stockand vegetables with which we were daily supplied. CaptainMaxwell, who of course was very desirous of opening acommunication with the court, intimated his wish to payhis respects as soon as might be convenient. They heardthis with apparent satisfaction, and signified that his requestshould be made known to the king. We are at a loss todiscover what can have caused this change of manner. Wecan only conjecture, that perhaps the king, on hearing somany reports about us, may have become desirous of seeingus himself. At all events it is clear that some alteration inthe instructions to the chiefs must have been made, other*wise they would have shewn their usual reserve when theking's name was mentioned, and would on no account haveallowed us to talk of visiting him.At one o'clock we went on shore to look at the placeassigned by the chiefs for the reception of the Alceste'sstores. It is an oblong inclosure, sixty yards by forty, surt

128 VOYAGE TO THErounded by a wall twelve feet high, rather well built withsquared coral: the entrance is by a large gate on the southside, from which there extends raised gravel walks, withclipped hedges, the intermediate spaces being laid out inbeds, like a garden. The temple in which we were feastedon the day of our first visit, occupies one corner of theinclosure; it is completely shaded by a grove of trees, whichalso overhang the wall. In that part of the garden directlyopposite to the gate, at the upper end of the walk there isa smaller temple, nearly hid by the branches of several largebanyan trees; and before it, at the distance of ten or twelvepaces, a square awkward looking building, with a raised terrace round it. The temple first spoken of is divided by meansof shifting partitions into four apartments, and a verandahrunning all round, having a row of carved wooden pillars onits outer edge to support the roof, which extends considerably beyond it. The floor of the verandah is two feetfrom the ground, thereof is sloping and covered with handsome tiles, those forming the eaves being ornamented withflowers and various figures in relief; there are also severalout-houses, and a kitchen communicating with them bycovered passages. In one of the inner apartments, at theupper end, there is a small recess containing a green shrub,in a high narrow flower-pot, having a Chinese inscription onGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 129a tablet hanging above it on the wall. On another side ofthe same room, there hangs the picture of a man rescuing abird from the paws of a cat; the bird seems to have been justtaken from a cage, which is tumbling over, with two otherbirds fluttering about in the inside: it is merely a sketch,but is executed in a spirited manner. In one of the backapartments we find three gilt images, eighteen incheshigh, with a flower in a vase before them. The roof of thetemple within is ten feet high, and all the cornices, pillars,&c. are neatly carved into flowers and the figures of variousanimals. The ground immediately round it is divided intoa number of small beds, planted with different shrubs andflowers; and on a pedestal of artificial rock, in one of thewalks close to it, is placed a clay vessel of an elegant form,full of water, with a wooden ladle swimming on the top.On a frame near one of the out-houses, hangs a large bell,three feet high, of an inelegant shape, resembling a longbee-hive; the sides are two inches thick, and richly ornamented : its tone is uncommonly fine.It was determined to appropriate part of the largetemple to the use of the sick and their attendants; theassistant surgeon of the Alceste taking one room, and thegunner, who was to have the whole inclosure in his charge,another. The small temple at the upper end, being a retired

ISOVOYAGE TO THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 131spot, was fixed upon for the Lyra's observatory; thesquare building in the centre seemed well adapted for amagazine,At the gate a notice was hung up, both inEnglish and Loo-choo, signifying that no person was toenter without a written pass from Captain Maxwell, or fromone of the chiefs.7th and 6th of October.—These days have been occupiedin carrying the arrangements of Sunday into effect.It wasvery interesting to observe the care which the natives tookof the sick, whom they assisted all the way from the beachto the temple; a number of people attended to supportsuch of them as had barely strength enough to walk.When they were safely lodged, eggs, milk, fowls, andvegetables, were brought to them; and whenever anyof them were tempted by the beauty of the scenery towalk out, several of the natives were ready to accompanythem.The powder was landed, and Mr. Holman, the gunnerof the frigate, began the operation of drying it on hidesspread in the sun round the magazine.other stock were also landed.The cows andOne of the cows calvedthat night, to the surprise of every body, and the greatjoy of the natives, who took a great fancy to the littlebull born amongst them.Mr. Mayne, the master ofthe Alceste, took up his quarters in the temple, in order tobe near his observatory, which was in the centre of thegarden. The stores of all kinds were sent on shore fromthe Alceste, which produced an apparent confusion, andthe chiefs, seeing so many valuable things lying about, beganto fear that they would be taken away; at least, it was supposed that they had such an apprehension, for the wall of thetemple was immediately fenced in by a sort of net-work oflong bamboo poles, the ends of which were fixed in theground at the foot of the wall on the outside, and the topsmade to cross one another four or five feet above the wall.This contrivance, instead of rendering the place more secure,made it more accessible; but as our opinion was not asked,and we had no apprehensions of theft, we let them proceedin their own way.Mrs. Loy, wife of the boatswain of the Alceste, wasthe only female in our squadron, and as such excited nosmall interest at this place. She was a perfectly well behaved person, and sufficiently neat in her dress, but withoutgreat pretensions to good looks. The natives, who froimthe first paid her much attention, shewed at all timestheir desire of granting her every indulgence. They evenwent so far as to say she might go into the city; but, uponconsulting with her husband, who was apprehensive of some

132 VOYAGE TO THEIaccident, she declined it. When this circumstance becameknown to us, we easily convinced the boatswain that nomischief could possibly arise from trusting his wife amongstsuch kind people; but Mrs. Loy could not be persuaded ofthis; and thus was lost the only opportunity of seeing thetown which occurred during all our stay.Two of the natives have been studying English withgreat assiduity, and with considerable success. One is calledM&dera, the other Anya. They carry note books in imitation of Mr. Clifford, in which they record in their owncharacters every word they learn. They are both keen fellows, and are always amongst the strangers. From the respect occasionally paid to them, it is suspected that theirrank is higher than they give out, and that their object inpretending to be people of ordinary rank, is to obtain amore free intercourse with all classes on board the ships.Madera, by his liveliness and his propriety of manners, hasmade himself a great favourite; he adopts our customswith a sort of intuitive readiness, sits down to table, uses aknife and fork, converses, and walks with us, in short, doesevery thing that we do, quite as a matter of course, without«any apparent effort or study. He is further recommendedto us by the free way in which he communicates every thingrelating to his country; so that as he advances in English,PRIEST andtf*

GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 133I •I n,: i„and Ave in Loo-choo, he may be the means of giving usmuch information. As an instance of his progress inEnglish, it may be mentioned, that one day he came onboard the Lyra, and said, " The Ta-yin speak me, * yougo ship, John come shore;' " by which we understood thatCaptain Maxwell had sent him on board the brig for theinterpreter. This was about three weeks after our arrival.Most of the natives have acquired a little English, sothat Mr. Clifford has now no difficulty in rinding peoplewilling to instruct him, and to take pains in correctinghis pronunciation. One of his teachers, called YackabeeOomeejeero, will not permit him to write down a singleword till he has acquired the exact Loo-choo sound: buthe is like the rest in shewing an invincible objection togiving any information about the women. He admits thathe is married, and gives the names of his sons: but whenhis wife or daughters are alluded to, he becomes uneasy,and changes the subject. On Mr. Clifford's gravely tellinghim that he believed there were no women on the island,he was thrown off his guard, and answered hastily, thathe had both a wife and daughter, but instantly checkinghimself, turned the conversation another way. On thepicture of an English lady being shewn to him, he commended it highly, saying, at the same time, " Doochoo in-

134 VOYAGE TO THEnago who6co oorung" (Loo-choo women are not handsome."}This old gentleman is a better teacher than scholar; hecalls the letter L " airoo;" veal, " bairoo;" flail, " frayroo;"in which instances of mispronunciation, we may recognizea difficulty not uncommon amongst English children.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 135CHAPTER III.As soon as the survey of Napakiang anchorage was completed, and a perfectly good understanding established withthe natives, it was determined to make a survey of thewhole island, and the Lyra was ordered upon this service.She were absent about a week, during which period thegeneral chart of the island was constructed. It will beobvious to every one acquainted with the subject, that, inso short a time, a very exact survey of the coast of anI ilThe Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo—Discovery of Port Melville—Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its Banks—Lyra nearlywrecked—Interview with Natives at the South Point—Return to Napakiang—Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's Funeral—Madera's Character andConduct—Sociable Habits of the Natives—Dinner given to the Chiefs of theIsland by Captain Maxwell—Madera's Behaviour on this Occasion—TwoWomen seen—A Lady of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife—Captain Maxwell fractures his Finger—Loo-choo Surgeon—Concern of the Natives—Visit of the Prince—Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter—Madera appears in a new Character—Feast given by the Prince—List ofSupplies given to the Ships—Behaviour of the Prince on taking Leave—Preparations for Departure—Madera's Distress—Last Interview with theChiefs—Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customs ofLoo-choo—Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island.i! I •"

(Ill.1!,1VOYAGE TO TOEisland nearly sixty miles long could not have been made:yet, as the weather was in general fine, and other circumstances favourable, the chart will be found sufficientlycorrect for most practical purposes. As the chart and thenautical and hydrographical details are given in the Appendix, I propose at present to relate only such particulars of the cruise as seem likely to interest the generalreader.9th of October.—At daybreak we got under weigh andstood to sea through a passage discovered by the boats; itwas so extremely narrow, that the least deviation from thecourse brought us close to the rocks. We were regulated insteering by two marks on the land, which lie in the samestraight line with the centre of the passage; these it isnecessary to keep always together: but not conceiving thatsuch nicety was required while sailing out, the marks wereallowed to separate, by which we found ourselves in aminute or two within a few yards of a coral reef, the raggedtops of which were distinctly seen two or three feet belowthe surface, whilst, at the same time, the leadsman on theopposite side sounded in nine fathoms. This early proofof the danger of navigating amongst coral, by teaching usthe necessity of extreme caution, was of great importanceto us in our future operations.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 137As the coast lying between Napakiang and the SugarLoaf had already been examined, we proceeded at onceround that island, which, from its having the same aspecton every bearing, and being quite different in shape fromany land in this quarter, is an excellent land-mark fornavigators.The natives call it Eegooshcoond, or castle*. The English name was given, I believe, by CaptainBroughton.Having rounded this peak and stood in for the northwest side of the Great Loo-choo, where there is a deepbight, a small island was observed close in shore, behindwhich it was thought there might be shelter for ships; thecoast, however, being unknown to us, it was not thoughtsafe to carry the brig very close in, and a boat was therefore dispatched with an officer to reconnoitre: he returnedat eight o'clock to say that there was a harbour in the mainland, the entrance to which lay on the inside of the smallisland mentioned before; but that the passages were narrowand winding, and that a more careful examination wasnecessary before the brig could venture in.llth of October.—In the morning we again stood in,* We first discovered the meaning of this word by hearing one of thenatives apply it to the castle on the chess board: he used the same term whendrawings of towers and castles were shewn to him.

i138 VOYAGE TO THEusing the precaution of sending a boat a-head to sound theway; when we had nearly reached the entrance we anchored, and proceeded in three boats to examine the harbour discovered last night. As it was near noon when wepassed the small island, we landed and observed the meridian altitude of the sun; after which we entered the harbouriri the main island, by an intricate passage of about aquarter of a mile in length, and at one place not two hundred yards wide. Here we found ourselves in a circularbason upwards of half a mile across, with deep water, andcompletely sheltered from all winds. On its western shorewe saw a large and beautiful village almost hid amongsttrees, with a high wooded range behind it stretching to thesouth. The eastern shore was low and laid out in saltfields, with a few huts here and there. At first sightthis bason did not appear to have any outlet except bythe one we had examined; but on rowing to its upper orsouthern side, we found that it joined by a narrow channelwith another harbour still larger, and if possible more beautiful than the first, for here the land was high on both sides,and richly wooded from top to bottom. Proceeding onwards through this bason, which had all the appearance ofan inland lake, we came to another outlet, not above a hundred yards wide, formed by cliffs rising abruptly out of theGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 139water to the height of a hundred feet. Both sides beingcovered with trees, which almost met overhead, the spacebelow was rendered cool and pleasant, and the water, thussheltered from every wind, was as smooth as glass. Werowed along for some time by various windings throughthis fairy scene in total uncertainty of what was to comenext, and at last, after advancing about three miles,it opened into an extensive lake several miles in length,studded with numerous small islands.The depth of water in the lake varied from four to sixfathoms; but in the narrow neck which connects it withthe sea the depth is from ten to twenty fathoms, beingdeepest at the narrowest parts. Ships might ride in anypart of this extraordinary harbour, in perfect safety duringthe most violent tempests: and the shores are so varied, thatevery purpose of re-equipment might be served. At someplaces natural wharfs are formed by the rocks, and eight andten fathoms water close to them. Ships might lie alongsidethese places, or might heave down by them: there are alsoshallow spots on which ships might be careened. Many ofthe cliffs are hollowed into caves, which would answer forstorehouses; and in the numerous lawns on both sides encampments might be formed of any number of people.We rowed directly across, and landed at the southern' I "lllW

140 VOYAGE TO THEside at the foot of a wooded range of hills, which forms thesouthern boundary of the lake. As no road was observed,it was resolved to go directly up the hill, and, in about anhour, after a good deal of scrambling amongst the bushesand long grass, we gained the top, where we found a neatpathway with a ditch on each side, and a hedge growing onthe top of the mound, formed of the earth from the ditch;it resembled not a little an English lane. Without knowingwhere this might take us to, we followed it, in the hope ofmeeting some of the people, but in this we were disappointed. Yet this place must, at times, be frequented, aswe observed a number of similar paths leading to the rightand left.The trees on this range of hills are low, and of no greatbeauty; the fir is the most common, but we did not knowthe names of the rest. After walking about a mile, ourpath took an abrupt turn down the brow of the hill, andappeared to lead to a large village at some distance. Theview from this elevation was very satisfactory, as it enabledus to check our rough eye draught of the harbour andcoast. The road down the hill was so steep that it wasjust possible to stand upon it, being inclined, as was conjectured ori the spot, at an angle of 45°. At the foot ofthe hill there was a little cottage, consisting of two parts,GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 141made of wattled rattans, connected by a light open bambooroof, so covered with a large leaved creeper as to afford acomplete shelter from the sun. The cottage, which wasthatched, was enveloped in creepers, encircled by the usualrattan fence at two or three yards distance. One of the wingswas occupied by goats; the other, which was dark, seemedto belong to the people, who had deserted it on our approach.There being only a small hole in the wall to admit light andair, and to allow the smoke to escape, every thing inside wasblack and dirty. Two spears hung on one side, which, uponenquiry afterwards, we were told were for striking fish. -On coming to our boats, we found them surrounded bya party of the natives, smaller in stature than our friends atNapakiang, and shewing less curiosity : probably their surprise at our sudden appearance had not subsided sufficientlyto allow of their indulging curiosity in detail. A large partyof them watched attentively while a musket was loaded, andwhen pointed over their heads in the air, they seemedaware that something was going to happen, but from theirnot shrinking or removing out of the way, it seemed theyknew not what. When it was fired, the whole party fell asif they had been shot, but rose instantly again, and lookingto the right and left of each other, indulged in a timorouslaugh. A cartridge was given to one man, with which he

142 VOYAGE TO THEwas nearly blowing himself up by placing it on his lightedpipe. The officer of the boat informed us that a gentleman had come to him and offered his horse to ride;he had dismounted for that purpose, but the horse wasfrightened, and would not suffer the officer to get uponhim. We saw this person riding along when we were atthe top of the hill; he called out to us repeatedly, probably to offer his horse, but we thought he wished to dissuade us from walking over the hill, and accordingly tookno notice of him.In the meantime Mr. Clifford, who had been unwell,and felt unequal to the labour of climbing the hill, proceeded in one of the boats towards a large village on theeastern side of the lake. He was met by a number of theinhabitants, whose dress and appearance were inferior towhat we had been accustomed to see at Napakiang; on hisasking them in Loo-choo for some water, they gave itcheerfully; but they shewed little curiosity, and the partywhich followed wherever he went, seemed to have no otherobject than to prevent disturbance. They made no objectionto his going into the village, where he saw in one inclosurea complete farm-yard. The principal house was closed,but to the offices there was free access. In the stable weretwo handsome bay ponies; there was also a well.stockedGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 143pig-sty, and a poultry-house. In another quarter stood amill for husking corn, consisting of a grooved solid cylinderof wood, fitting neatly into a hollow cylinder, the sides ofwhich were also grooved; near this lay a hand flour-milland several baskets of cotton. In another part of thecourt was a granary erected on posts about six feet abovethe ground, having billets of fire-wood piled below it. Atanother place, under a tree in the village, he saw a blacksmith's anvil fixed in a block; the forge was of masonry,having an air hole, but the bellows was wanting.In the centre of the village stood a building like atemple, surrounded by a stone wall. It was filled withelegant vases of different shapes and sizes, closed up andranged in rows on the floor; the verandah encircling thebuilding was also covered with vases. According to theaccount of the natives, the remains of the dead are deposited in these jars. Round the building bamboo poleswere placed so as to lean against the thatched roof, havingnotches cut in them, to which bundles of flowers were hung,some fresh, others decayed, apparently funereal offerings;but their exact import Mr. Clifford was not able to learn.The elegant shape of the vases, and the tasteful way inwhich they were arranged, with the flowers hanging all round,gave to this cemetery an air of cheerfulness, which we are inill

144 VOYAGE TO THEthe habit of thinking unsuitable to a depository of thedead.This village, which is at the head of a bay, is shelteredfrom the north wind by a row of trees between it and thebeach; behind it is sheltered by a range of hills.A broadroad runs between it and the water; trees are plantedamong the houses, so as nearly to conceal them.In themiddle of the village near the cemetery, in an open square,there is a cluster of granaries like the one described above;the walls are made of wattled rattan, and overhang thelower part.Mr. Clifford tried in vain to see the Chief of the village;but either there was no such person, or he was out of theway :the inhabitants pointed out a man on horseback as aChief, who passed on to another village; this was probablythe same man who offered his horse to Mr. Hall, the officerof the boat. Mr. Clifford went to the top of the rangebehind the village, and afterwards into the valley on theother side, which he found highly cultivated.From the heights we saw that the large space whichwas at first considered a lake, communicates with thesea to the north-eastward, as well as by the narrow passage through which we had come, but there was not timeto allow of its being fully examined.As we returnedGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 145by the narrow straits, we called at some of the small villages on the eastern side. At one of these, the people of thevillage, headed by a man who appeared to be superior tothe rest, came towards the boat, and stopped for someminutes at the distance of fifty yards; after which, appearing to have gained confidence, they came on, with theold man in front, carrying a green bough in his hand. He•would not come close, however, till invited by Mr. Cliffordin Loo-choo to look at the boat; he then advanced andpresented his bough, in return for Avhich we broke a branchfrom a tree, and gave it to him with the same formality hehad used towards us. Soon after this exchange was made,they left us, and went to examine the boat, to fishermenalways an object of great interest.On our entering the village we were met by a man whoappeared to be the principal person of the place; he wasvery polite, shewed us through the village, and took us overhis garden, where he had some sugar-cane growing; thiswe admired very much, upon which he ordered one of thefinest of the canes to be taken up by the roots and presented to us; we immediately gave him a few buttons offour jackets, with which he was quite pleased. On its beginning to rain while we were in the garden, he invited usinto his house, which, from the walls being of wattled cane,u

Illllllll I I•,. 11146 VOYAGE TO THElooked like a large basket. Rude pictures and carvedwood-work figures were hanging on the walls, together withsome inscriptions in Chinese characters.On returning to the lower harbour of all, we went to thelarge village before spoken of, which is by far the mostfinished of any that we have seen on this island. The streetsare regular and clean swept; each house has a neat canewall, as well as a screen before the door; plantain and othertrees are growing so thickly in the inside of the fence, thatthey completely shade the house. Near the beach wereseveral large houses, in which a number of people were seatedwriting: on going up to them they gave us tea and cakes,and afterwards allowed us to go over the village withoutrestraint; they were curious to know whether the brig wascoming into the harbour or not, and if so, how many dayswe meant to stay; they expressed neither pleasure norregret when we said that we were not coming in. In frontof the village, and parallel with the beach, there is a splendidavenue thirty feet wide, formed by two rows of large trees,whose branches join overhead, and effectually screen thewalk from the sun; here and there are placed woodenbenches, and at some places stone seats are fixed near thetrees: this space, which is about a quarter of a mile long,is probably used as a public walk.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 147A range of hills of a semicircular form embraces thevillage, and limits its extent: at most places it is steep, butat the point where the north end joins the harbour, there isan overhanging cliff about eighty feet high, the upper partof Avhich extends considerably beyond the base; at eightor ten yards from the ground on this inclined face, a longhorizontal gallery has been hewn out of the solid rock:it communicates with a number of small square excavationsstill deeper in the rock, for the reception of the vases containing the bones of the dead.The trees and creepers on the edge of the precipice hungdown so as to meet the tops of those Avhich grew below, andthus a screen was formed which threw the gallery into deepshade: every thing here being perfectly still, the scene wasvery solemn and imposing. It took us somewhat by surprise, for nothing in its external appearance indicated thepurpose to which the place was appropriated : happening todiscover an opening amongst the trees and brushwood, andresolving to see what it led to, we entered by a narrow pathwinding through the grove. The liveliness of the scenerywithout, and the various amusements of the day, had put usall into high spirits, but the unexpected and sacred gloom ofthe scene in which we suddenly found ourselves had an instantaneous effect in repressing the mirth of the whole party.

148 VOYAGE TO THEThis village is called Oonting, and is certainly the samethat is alluded to by the chiefs, and which we formerly wrotedown Winching and Oonching.This excellent harbour, which we discovered, has beennamed Port Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville,First Lord of the Admiralty.It was quite dark when we reached the brig. As aheavy swell was rolling in, no time was lost in getting underweigh, but before we could succeed in running well off thereefs, the wind suddenly changed, and the weather, whichbefore had been fine, became so dark and squally, that wealmost lost sight of the shore.Our situation was now verycritical, for we had just sufficient knowledge of the coast,to be sensible how extremely dangerous it was; and thewind, which blew directly on the shore, came in suchviolent gusts, that there was every reason to apprehendthe loss of our topmasts; to reef the sails was impossible,as the delay which this operation must have caused wouldhave been fatal.While things were in this state, it becamenecessary to tack, but owing to the heavy and irregularswell, the brig came round again against our will, andbefore the sails could be properly trimmed, she had gonestern foremost almost to the verge of the reef, on which thesea was breaking to a great height.Had this occurredGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 149a second time, nothing could have prevented our beingwrecked. After beating about in this awkward predicamentfor two hours, the wind shifted a little, and enabled us tostretch off clear of all danger.12th of October.—It blew so hard that we kept out atsea clear of the shore.13th of October.—As the weather had become moderate,we stood in, and determined the position of five islandswhich lie to the northward of Port Melville.14th of October.—During this day the whole of theeast side of the great island was explored.The north andnorth-east sides are high, and destitute of cultivation;nearly in the middle, on this side, there is a deep indentureon the coast, and the wind being such as to admit of sailingout again, we ran in under low sail with the usual precautions; notwithstanding which we were very nearly on thereefs, for the water shoaled suddenly from twenty-four toeight fathoms; and although the brig was instantly tacked,*the soundings as she came round were only five fathoms,and to leeward of us the ragged tops of a rock just levelwith the surface were discovered at the distance of onlyfifty yards.In exploring such places there ought to bea boat on each bow, as well as one a-head.The coastfrom this bay to the south point of the island has a belt

150 VOYAGE TO THEof coral reefs at the distance of ten and fifteen miles fromthe shore, and therefore cannot be approached by a shipwithout great danger. The extreme south point is comparatively clear of coral; we therefore anchored off it atsunset, proposing to land next day to determine its position.We found the iron cables of great use when anchoringamongst coral reefs.loth of October.—It blew hard last night, but in theforenoon it moderated sufficiently to allow of our landing.We ascertained the latitude of the extreme south pointwith precision, and made several other observations, allcircumstances being favourable.We had scarcely landed when the natives began to assemble in groups on the top of the cliffs, and in a shorttime they came down to us, most of them carrying longpoles in their hands; we were sufficiently aware of their inoffensive character to have no apprehension of their intentions, otherwise their appearance would have been somewhatformidable. There was no person of rank among them;they were communicative and full of curiosit}?, which difference in manner from the inhabitants on the shores of PortMelville ma.y have arisen from these people knowing something of us by reports from Napakiang, which is not aboveten miles distant. It was to be expected that we shouldGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 151liave become a topic of discourse at so short a distance, andprobably what was said of us would be favourable, or atall events such as would excite curiosity rather than fear.Most of these people had fish spears tatooed on their armsin the form of a trident, with rude barbs. When drawn onthe right arm it is called " Oodeemaw ;" when on the left," Tooga." This is the only instance we have met with ofthis practice. Our curiosity was farther excited by the appearance of these spears, from the circumstance of our neverhaving seen any warlike weapon on this island; but thepeople invariably called them " Eeo stitchee" (fish spear).Several of the tallest of these people were measured, but nonewere above five feet six inches; they are, however, stronglimbed and well proportioned. One of them wore a ringon his finger, which is the only instance we have met with ofany ornament being worn at Loo-Choo. The ring finger iscalled in the Loo-choo language, " Eebee gannee/' finger ofthe ring; and it seems a fair inference from this, that amongstsome part of the community rings are habitually worn;probably by the women. The coast here is formed ofcliffs, about seventy or eighty feet high, with numerouscaverns hollowed out by the waves. The pools of water leftby the tide were full of beautiful fish of a great variety ofcolours.

HUM,ii152 VOYAGE TO THE16th of October.—In the morning we weighed andstood to the westward, among the group of islands calledAmakirrima by the natives. At one of these there seemedat first sight to be a harbour for ships; but on sendingthe boats to explore, it proved only safe for small vesselsbeing filled in every part with coral. On our way acrossfrom the south point of the great island to the Amakirrimas,we passed near a coral reef exactly circular, and half a milein diameter; it is just level with the water's edge at half«bb, so that in fine weather the sea does not break uponany part of it. As it is upwards of seven miles from anyland, and lies directly in the passage toAvards Napakiang,,it is exceedingly .dangerous, and ought not to be approachedin the night by a stranger.At four o'clock we anchored in our old place in-shore ofthe Alceste. As we stood towards the anchorage we couldsee the coral from the masthead so distinctly as to be ableto trace the forms of all the reefs as we passed among them.This can rarely be done, although the water is always clear,because an unusual degree of smoothness in the surface is/requisite to make the rocks visible; and the sun must alsoshine upon the water at a particular angle. A stranger cannottherefore calculate upon having the danger pointed out inthis way; but when such circumstances do occur they mayGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. loSbe taken advantage of to check the surveys of reefs madein boats.We find things at Napakiang nearly as we left them;the best understanding seems to exist between CaptainMaxwell and the chiefs. Every body is allowed to walkabout and do as he likes. The frigate has been bountifullysupplied with stock and vegetables; and the sick on shoreare rapidly recovering under the kind care of the natives,-who take a peculiar interest in their comfort.A young man belonging to the Alceste had died duringour absence. When the natives were informed of this circumstance, they requested permission to make the grave,and begged Captain Maxwell to point out a place for thispurpose. Captain Maxwell said that no situation could bemore appropriate than under the grove of trees near thetemple, a spot already rendered sacred by many Loo-chootombs.Next day the body was carried to the grave with all theformalities usual on such occasions, Captain Maxwell,according to custom, Avalking last, with the officers andcrew before him. The ready politeness of the natives wasnever more strikingly displayed than now; for perceivingthat those who were of the highest rank walked in the rear,they considered that their station must of course be in front;

154 VOYAGE TO THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.looI."" I"Ifand they accordingly placed themselves at the head of theprocession, and preserved throughout the ceremony themost profound silence* They were all dressed in whiterobes, which we have reason to believe is their mourning.On the next day the natives requested leave to raise atomb over the grave; this was of course agreed to, andwhen it was completed, they performed their own funeral service over it, by sacrificing a large hog, and burning a quantity of spirits. Jeeroo officiated on this occasion, and whenhe had done, he carried the hog to the sick in the hospital.. The chiefs also gave directions for a small square stoneto be smoothed and prepared for an epitaph; which beingtraced upon the stone by Mr. Taylor, the clergyman of theAleeste, was carved very neatly by the natives. Theepitaph^ after mentioning the name and age of the deceased,stated briefly, that he and his companions in his Britannicmajesty's ships Aleeste and Lyra, had been kindly treatedby the inhabitants of this island. When the purport of thewriting was interpreted to the chiefs, they appeared verymuch gratified at our acknowledging their attentions.18th of October.—Our friends expressed much pleasureon meeting us again, particularly Jeeroo, who seems to takegreat interest in our concerns: he carried us up to thesailor's tomb, where we were joined by Ookooma, Jeema,Iand some of the others, who unaffectedly expressed theirsorrow for this man's untimely fate.I found my peoplewho had been landed previous to our sailing on the survey,•much recovered, and very grateful for the kindness of thenatives.Milk, eggs, meat,and vegetables, had been broughtto them every day, and whenever they felt disposed to walkthey were accompanied by one or two of the natives, whotook their arms on coming to rough ground, and oftenhelped them up the steep side of the hill behind the hospital,to a pleasant grassy spot on the summit, where the nativeslighted pipes for them: in short, I suppose sailors werenever so caressed before.The chiefs were anxious to know what we had been doingduring the week in which we had been absent. From anapprehension that they might be displeased at our havinginstituted a regular examination of the whole island, wesaid we had been looking at the harbour they had spokenof; they immediately mentioned the village of Oonting,and asked how we liked it. But they guessed that we hadbeen round the island, from seeing that we returned by thesouth, though we had sailed to the north; they saidrepeatedly, that the island was very small, appearing to beanxious to depreciate it; our reply of course was, that itwas very large and beautiful.

156 VOYAGE TO THEMadera has made great improvement in English, andhis character is altogether more developed. He is quite athis ease in our company, and seems to take the mostextraordinary interest in every thing belonging to us; buthis ardent desire to inform himself on all subjects sometimesdistresses him a good deal; he observes the facility withwhich we do some things, and his enterprising mind suggeststo him the possibility of his imitating us; but when he is madesensible of the number of steps by which alone the knowledge he admires is to be attained, his despair is stronglymarked. He sometimes asks us to read English aloud tohim, to which he always listens with the deepest attention.One day, on shore, he saw me with a book in my hand: hebegged me to sit down under a tree, and read : Jeeroo wasthe only chief present, but there were several of the peasantsin attendance upon him; they all lay down on the grass,and listened with an attention and interest which are naturalenough: every one expressed himself pleased and satisfiedexcept Madera, whose anxiety was to read in the samemanner himself. From the earnest way in which he inquiredinto every subject, we were sometimes inclined to think thathe must have been directed by the government to informhimself 011 these topics; and certainly a fitter person couldnot have been selected; for he adapted himself so readilyGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.to all ranks, that he became at once a favourite, and everyperson took pleasure in obliging him.Jeeroo is esteemed in another way; he is uniformlygood humoured and obliging, and not without curiosity;but he is not clever, and has none of the fire and enthusiasmof Madera. We all think kindly of Jeeroo, and shake himcordially by the hand when we meet him; but Madera isadmired and respected, as well as esteemed, and his societyis courted for his own sake.Madera is about twenty-eight years of age, of a slenderfigure, and very active; his upper teeth project in frontover the lower ones, giving his face a remarkable, but not adisagreeable expression. He is always cheerful, and often.lively and playful, but his good sense prevents his ever goingbeyond the line of strict propriety. When required byetiquette to be grave, no one is so immoveably serious as:Madera, and when mirth rules the hour, he is the gayestof the gay: such indeed is his taste on these occasions,that he not only catches the outward tone of his company,but really appears to think and feel as they do. His enterprising spirit and versatility of talent have led him toengage in a number of pursuits; his success, however, is themost remarkable in his acquisition of English. About amonth after our arrival, he was asked what had become of

158 VOYAGE TO THEhis .companion Any a; he replied, " Anya, him mother sick,he go him mother house;" and when asked if he would return,he said, " Two, three day time, him mother no sick, he comeship/' With all these endowments and attainments he is^unaffectedly modest, and never seems aware of his beingsuperior to the rest of his countrymen. We were a longtime in doubt what was his real rank; for at first he kepthimself back, so that he was well known to the midshipmen,before the officers were at all acquainted with him : hegradually came forward, and though he always wore the dressof the ordinary respectable natives, his manners evidently.belonged to a higher rank, but he never associated with thechiefs, and disclaimed having any pretensions to an equality-with them. Notwithstanding all this, there were occasionalcircumstances, which, by shewing his authority, almostbetrayed his secret. One morning a difficulty arose aboutsome supplies which the chiefs had engaged to procure, butwhich they had neglected to send; as soon as Madera wastold of the circumstance, he went to Captain Maxwell, andundertook to arrange it to his satisfaction, at the same timebegging that if any difficulty occurred in future, he might;foe applied to. Whatever may beMadera's rank in his ownsociety, it is highly curious to discover in a country so circumstanced, the same politeness, self-denial, and graceful-GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 159ness of behaviour which the experience of civilized nationshas pointed out as constituting the most pleasing andadvantageous form of intercourse.The great interest which Madera took in the English^and the curiosity he always expressed about our customs athome, suggested the idea of taking him with us to England,where he would have been an interesting specimen of apeople so little known; and he also might have carried baekknowledge of the greatest use to his country. When it wasproposed to him, he paused for some minutes, and then,shaking his head, said, " I go Injeree,—father, mother,childs, wife, house, all cry! not go; no, no, all cry I"In our absence a number of watch-houses had beenerected on the heights round the anchorage; they are meresheds of cane thatched over, in which three or four of thenatives remain, day and night^ in order 1 to be ready toaccompany any person who may happen to land, whereverit be. They have also erected a long shed, with a floor ofsplit bamboo; in this place, which is on the top of the hillabove the usual landing place, the chiefs generally assemblein the morning; they invite every one who passes to drinktea and smoke pipes, which is very convenient when theboats happen not to be ready to take us on board. Eachof the chiefs is attended by a boy, generally his son, whose

"I160 VOYAGE TO THEbusiness it is to carry a little square box, in which there areseveral small drawers, divided into compartments, filledwith rice, sliced eggs, small squares of smoked pork, cakes,and fish; and in one corner a small metal pot of sackee,besides cups arid chopsticks. By having this always withthem, they can dine when and where they choose. Theyfrequently invite us to dine with them, and if we agree tothe proposal, they generally ask any other of the chiefswhom they meet to be of the party and join dinners. Theplace selected for these pic nics is commonly under thetrees, in a cool spot, where a mat is spread on the grass;and every thing being laid out in great order, the partylies down in a circle, and seldom breaks up till the sackeepot is empty.An artist of the island brought a drawing of the AlcesteOn board to-day for Captain Maxwell: it is about two feetby one and a half, and is altogether a most extraordinaryproduction, in which perspective and proportion are curiously disregarded. The captain and officers are introducedin full uniform, and a number of the sailors on the riggingand masts. With all its extravagance, however, it hasconsiderable merit; there is nothing slovenly about it, andthere is enough of truth in it to shew that it was sketchedon the spot.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 161A dispute has arisen between John the interpreter andthe chiefs, who it seems had positively promised to get ahorse for Captain Maxwell to ride; as they have not kepttheir word, John declares that he will have nothing to sayto people who do not speak truth. They have again promised, however, that a horse will be got ready, and in themean time, a fresh stock of beef and vegetables has beensent to both ships, which has pacified John a little. Wehave had much occasion to lament not having been accompanied, by one of the gentlemen of the factory acquaintedwith the Chinese language, for although to have John is muchbetter than to be without any interpreter, it is probable thathe is not very delicate in his requests, and makes use ofexpressions and arguments unsuited to our character, andcontrary to our wishes and instructions.19th of October.—In the morning, before breakfast,Captain Maxwell was informed by one of the chiefs, that ahorse was ready for him on the beach; he landed accordingly, and found a little pony saddled, and two of thechiefs mounted. They objected to his riding in the country,where the roads were uneven, so that for the present hisride was confined to the beach. The saddle is made ofwood, and so uneven as to be very unpleasant: it is proposed to have one made of a blanket and mats in future.

VOYAGE TO THETo the stirrup there is tied a box, large enough to receivethe whole foot.A dinner was given to-day by Captain Maxwell to thechiefs Ookooma, Shayoon, Issacha Sandoo, Jeema, andIssacha Hackeeboocoo ; Jeeroo was also invited to it, butdid not attend; being the junior, he had probably been leftin charge of the beach and store-rooms.Madera also madeone of the party, though not originally included in theinvitation.As he had never laid any claim to an equalityin rank with the chiefs, it had not been thought right toinvite him along with them: but Madera, who probablyknew that he would be very welcome, put himself in CaptainMaxwell's way just before dinner, and was prevailed upon,after a little persuasion, to remain.Dinner was served at five o'clock in as sumptuous a styleas possible.Ookooma was placed on Captain Maxwell'sright, and Shayoon on his left; I sat beside the former,and Mr. Clifford next the other; then the two chiefs nextin rank, and beside them two of the officers of the ship :the first lieutenant, Mr. Hickman, sat at the foot of thetable, with Hackeeboocoo on his right, and Madera on hisleft. They were all in great spirits, and ate and drankfreely, and though they complained of the size of theglasses, and of the strength of the wine, tasted every thingGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 163from punch to champagne: the briskness of the last indeedsurprised them not a little, and effectually muddled two ofthem for some time. Cheese was the only thing they allobjected to, probably on account of its being made of milk»which they never taste. The interpreter not being present,the conversation was carried on through Mr. Clifford andMadera, and partly by signs. Whether intelligibly or not^every body was talking. Madera has dined often on boardthe ship, and is quite perfect in our customs. On thisoccasion he took great charge of the chiefs at his end of thetable, speaking sometimes in one language and sometimes inthe other. Observing Jeema eating ham without mustard,he called to Captain Maxwell's servant, and pointing toJeema, said, " Tom, take mustard to him." When thedesert was put on table, and the wine decanters ranged ina line, they exclaimed in astonishment, " Moo eeyroo noosackee," six kinds or colours of wine; but the sweetmeatsand prepared confectionary pleased them most.After sitting about an hour and a half after dinner, anddrinking with tolerable spirit, they rose to depart; but thisthey were not allowed to do, and they were informed that itwas the English custom to sit a much longer time. Theyrepresented that the sun had set, and they would never beable to find their way on shore, but would all be drowned in

\\m164 VOYAGE TO THEattempting it. This alarming difficulty was easily overruled by a promise of the barge, and they sat down again.While the discussion was going on between Captain Maxwell and his guests, Madera kept his seat, and looked abouthim in his keen observant way, to discover, if he could,what was likely to be the issue of this adventure. Havingobserved that in general we were anxious to keep our company at table as long as we could, he naturally enoughthought that we would not let this opportunity pass ofentertaining the chiefs according to our fashion. Heappeared to have settled this question with himself just asthe chiefs resumed their seats, for rising half off his chair,and with a mixture of archness and simplicity, as if he hadmade an amusing discovery, cried out in English, " Whenall drunk then go ashore \" Though Madera, as will be seen,was not quite right m his guess, there was enough of truthin his remark to raise a hearty laugh among those whounderstood him; and as he joined in this laugh at his ownjoke, it was some time before he could explain what he hadsaid to the chiefs, who, being in a merry humour themselves,tpok it in perfect good part, though their mirth was evidentlydashed by a little apprehension of the fate which M&derahad anticipated for them.The health of his Royal Highness the Prince Regent wasGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 165then given, all the company standing in the most respectfulmanner. This was followed by the health of the King ofLoo-choo, which was drank with similar observances. Onsitting down after the latter toast, the chiefs conferred afew minutes across the table, and then all rose to proposeCaptain Maxwell's health; their wishes being explained byM&dera. When they sat down, Captain Maxwell proposedthe health of Ookooma and the other chiefs, but as we inreturn stood up to drink to them, their modesty disclaimedthis part of the compliment, and they rose likewise; norwas it till a good deal of persuasion had been used, that theyconsented to be seated while we were standing.These four bumpers made the party very merry, and itnow was intimated to them, that as all the usual formalitieshad been observed, they might drink just as much as theyliked, or pass the bottle altogether; a permission of whichfew of them took advantage. They lighted their pipes,laughed, joked, and seemed so happy, that it was agreed onall hands, that conviviality is no where better understoodthan at Loo-choo. After a time, at our request, they playedsome games, of which we had heard them speak. The objectof these games was drinking; a cup of wine being the invariable forfeit. That every thing might be in character duringthe games, some of their own little cups were put on table.ifil

166 VOYAGE TO THEOne person holds the stalk of his tobacco-pipe between thepalms of his hands, so that the pipe rolls round as he moveshis hands, which he is to hold over his head, so as not toSee them. After turning it round for a short time, he suddenly stops, and the person to whom the bowl is directedhas to drink a cup of wine. Another is a Chinese game:one person holds his hand closed over his head, he thenbrings it quickly down before him with one or more fingersextended; the person he is playing with calls out thenumber of them, and if he guesses right, he has to drinkthe cup of wine. These and other games caused a gooddeal of noisy mirth, and at length it was proposed by themto go out, in order to look at the sailors who were dancing ondeck. Before leaving the cabin, they shewed us a Loo-choodance round the table: Madera placed himself at the headbefore Ookooma, while the others ranged themselves in a linebehind him; he began by a song, the air of which was verypretty, and nearly at the same time commenced the dance,which consisted principally in throwing the body into avariety of postures, and twisting the hands about. Sometimes the hands were placed flat together, at others separate,but generally the former; the movements both of the bodyand hands were regular and of a waving description. Thehead was-made to incline slowly from side to side, so asGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 167almost to touch the shoulders; the feet were moved with aslight shuffling motion, with an occasional long sweepingstep to one side and then back again; but the perfectionof the dance appeared to be in the proper use of the hands,and body. The words of the dance song were " Sasa sangcoomah,sangcoomee ah! sangcoomee ah! kadee yoosheedaw;" when they came to the last word they all joinedin the chorus and clapped their hands. Although Maderawas the leader both in the dance and song, he was occasionally joined in the latter by several of the others, thewhole party repeating the last word several times over.In this way they went several times round the table. Madera had a graceful carriage, and his dancing, though fantastic, was really elegant; his singing too was in good taste.The others danced clumsily, though in perfect good time,and joined with some spirit in the chorus.The ship was illuminated, and the sailors were dancing onthe upper deck. The chiefs were much pleased with thisscene, which was lively enough. After watching the dance ofthe sailors for a few minutes, Madera, who, to use a commonphrase, " was up to every thing," ran among the sailors, andseizing one of them by the shoulders, put him out of thedance, took his place, and kept up the reel with the samespirit, and exactly in the same style and step as the sailors..

168 VOYAGE TO THEThe other dances were left off, and the whole ship's companyassembling round Madera, cheered and clapped him till thedance was done. The chiefs joined in the applause, seemingno less surprised than ourselves at Madera's skill, for hisimitation of the sailors* odd steps and gestures was as exactas if he had lived amongst seamen all his life. The officersthen danced a country dance, after which the chiefs, unasked, and with a sort of intuitive politeness, which rendered every thing they did appropriate, instantly steppedforward and danced several times round the quarter-deck,to the infinite gratification of the sailors.On returning to the cabin to tea, they were all in highspirits, and while amusing themselves with a sort of wrestling game, Ookooma, who had seen us placing ourselves insparring attitudes, threw himself suddenly into the boxer'sposition of defence, assuming at the same time a fiercenessof look which we had never before seen in any of them.The gentleman to whom he addressed himself, thinking thatOokooma wished to spar, prepared to indulge him; butMadera's quick eye saw what was going on, and by a wordor two made him instantly resume his wonted sedateness.We tried in vain to make Madera explain what werethe magical words which he had used to Ookooma. Heappeared anxious to turn our thoughts from the subject, byGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 169saying, " Loo-choo man no fight; Loo-choo man write—no fight, no good, no, no. Ingerish very good, yes, yes,yes; Loo-choo man no fight." Possibly he consideredthat Ookooma was taking too great a liberty; or, perhaps,he thought even the semblance of fighting unsuitable withthe strict amity subsisting between us.Before they went away, Captain Maxwell, who had remarked the satisfaction with which the chiefs received anyattention shewn to their children, ordered a large cake to bebrought him, which he divided into portions for the familyof each. The chiefs were in a proper mood to feel this kindness, and they expressed themselves, as may be supposed,very warmly upon the occasion. When they put off for theshore they began singing, and never left off" till they landed.20th of October.—The forenoon was passed at theObservatory, and afterwards we Avalked in the countrywithout being observed, for the chiefs had not yet recoveredfrom the effects of last night's gaiety: but we had not gonea mile before Jeeroo overtook us. We were very anxiousto gain the brow of a neighbouring hill, from which weimagined there would be a good view of the palace; butalthough Jeeroo was the most obliging creature in theworld on every other occasion, he was resolute now in notletting us go far beyond our usual limits; we tried to over-

170 VOYAGE TO THErule his objections by telling him that we should do no mischief, and would not go farther than the adjoining height.He would listen, however, to nothing; and as we still walkedslowly on, he at last sent off a messenger for assistance, butbefore this reinforcement arrived we had turned back, toJeeroo's great relief. Although the object proposed hadnot been accomplished, we got a better sight of the palacethan we had yet obtained. It is so much enclosed by treesthat parts only can be seen, but it is undoubtedly a verylarge building. On returning we met Hackeebo6coo, the fatchief, coming puffing and blowing up the hill; he had setout to overtake us on being told by Jeeroo's messenger whatwe were proposing to do. He had drank a good deal ofwine yesterday on board, and said he had been " weetee"(drunk), and that his head ached very much. After hejoined us we passed near a village, where we met two womenat the turning of a road: they did not see us till within afew yards, and their alarm was great; they threw down thebaskets, which they Avere carrying on their heads, and fledinto the wood. Our two companions were very uneasy atthis rencontre, and would not listen to our reasoning uponthe absurdity of their apprehensions, looking quite miserabletill the subject, which seems to be an interdicted one, waschanged. We went afterwards to the high ground behindGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 171the hospital, in order to fill up by eye the edges of thereefs in our charts, for which regular triangles could notbe taken in the survey. While I was thus engaged, Mr.Clifford endeavoured to learn from Jeeroo whether or notthe King lived in the large house spoken of before; Jeerooas usual denied any knowledge of the King, and could notbe prevailed upon to say what the house was, or who resided there; a peasant, however, who happened to be alongwith us was more communicative, and was giving all theinformation desired, when Jeeroo, observing what he wasabout, reprimanded him sharply. On coming down fromthe height we found all the chiefs seated in a long roomerected on the outside of the garden gate: they were verymerry on the subject of last night's adventure.21st of October.—While Mrs. Loy was employed at thewell to-day washing clothes, at a moment when every bodyelse was out of the way, she was visited by a Loo-choo lady,accompanied by a numerous guard of men. She describesher as being about eighteen years of age, well dressed, fairin complexion, with small dark eyes, and not Avithoutbeauty; her hair was of a glossy jet black, made up into aknot on one side of the head. She wore a girdle tied at theside, and had on sandals like the men. Mrs. Loy wishedto touch her, but she shrunk back in alarm. Whetherf-l8t

-->•172 VOYAGE TO THEthese details be quite correct or not, the circumstance of alady of rank having visited Mrs. Loy is so far interesting asit denotes a considerable degree of curiosity on the lady'spart, together with the power of gratifying it, which, in acountry where the women are strictly secluded, perhapswould not be allowed.22d of October.—Ookooma and Jeeroo came to theObservatory to-day, together with a number of the mostrespectable of the natives; they were desirous of seeing thereflected images of the sun in the artificial horizon throughthe telescope of the sextant. As this was placed on a standthere was no difficulty in satisfying their curiosity, for theyhad only to place their eye to the tube, the angle havingbeen previously arranged. Many of them were amused bythe changes of colour in the reflected images by means ofthe different shades; others were more struck with the apparent motion of the two suns, which is very perceptiblewhen a high magnifying power is used; a few endeavouredto understand the meaning of what they saw, but with theexception of Jeeroo, I think they had no conception of itscause. Jeeroo appeared to have some notion of astronomy;his idea of eclipses was more accurate than could have beenexpected. From him Mr. Clifford got the names of thedays and months, and the various points of informationGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 17Srespecting Time, which will be found in the Vocabulary.Whenever we were actually taking observations, the nativesinvariably remained at a considerable distance. They hadbeen told that the least motion disturbed the surface of thequicksilver, and prevented our taking observations. Theyhad much patience, and sometimes sat quite still and silentfor several hours, till invited to come forward to look atthe instruments. When Ookooma and Jeeroo came tous, we observed that they were in great distress, and uponour asking the cause, the former explained that CaptainMaxwell during his ride this morning had fallen down, orrather that his horse, which was too weak for his weight,had fallen with him, and that his finger was broken: " Tayinma tawrittee, Tayin no eebee ootee" (the Tayin's horse fell,Tayin's finger broke). A Loo-choo doctor, he said, hadgone on board, who would soon cure it.On going to the Alceste we found that the Loo-choosurgeon had placed Captain Maxwell's broken finger in athick paste made of eggs, flour, and some other substancewhich he brought along with him. He then wrapped thewhole in the skin of a newly-killed fowl. This skin dried ina short time and held the paste firm, by which the brokenfinger was kept steady. The doctor went through a number

174 VOYAGE TO THEof ceremonies, such as feeling the pulse, looking at thetongue, and so on. He had a box along with him, containing upwards of a hundred medicines.Captain Maxwell mentioned, that while he was sittingin a shed after the accident, he was surprised to see aperson enter the door crawling on all fours, and half deadwith terror. This it appeared was the surgeon, who hadbeen sent for by the chiefs. He was horror-struck at theaccident, but soon recovered himself on observing CaptainMaxwelFs perfect tranquillity.Captain Maxwell's gentleness and forbearance, and hisuniform attention to the wishes of the natives, and the greatpersonal kindness which, he had shewn to so many of them,had very early won their confidence and esteem. As ourintercourse became more intimate, these feelings naturallybecame stronger, and the concern which the natives feltupon this occasion was very general, and was expressed, notonly by Madera and the chiefs, but by the lower orders,*in a manner highly flattering to Captain Maxwell.23d of October.—A deputation of the chiefs went onboard the Alceste early this morning to say, that the Princeof the island, who was the next person in rank to the King,and heir to the throne, meant to come on board the frigateGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 176this afternoon, as well for the purpose of paying a visitof ceremony, as of enquiring into the state of CaptainMaxwell's health after the accident.At noon the four senior chiefs, dressed in their state robesand hatchee-matchees, came to announce the Prince's approach, and in about half an hour afterwards he wasbrought in a closed sedan-chair to the boat, through a concourse of people, to whom he seemed as much a show as tous. The state boat was a large flat-bottomed barge, covered with an awning of dark blue, with white stars on it,the whole having much the appearance of a hearse. It waspreceded by two boats bearing flags with an inscriptionupon them, having in the bow an officer of justice carryinga lackered bamboo, and in the stern a man beating a gong.A vast number of boats were in attendance, some bearingpresents, and others following out of mere curiosity. Oneof the Chiefs came on board with the Prince's card, whichwas of red paper forty-eight inches long, and eleven wide*,and shortly afterwards the Prince's barge put off from theshore; upon which the rigging of both ships was manned,* The literal translation of the card is " Loo-choo nation, extender of lawssGreat Person (called Ko), Heang, bows his head and worships," (the commonvisiting expression among the Chinese.) It ought to be remarked, that thePrince's name is placed on one comer of the card, which is the most respectfulmode that can be used, according to Chinese usage.

176 VOYAGE TO THEand a salute of seven guns fired; when he came on boardhe was received with a guard, and under a like salute.Captain Maxwell, who had been confined to the cabin eversince his accident, desired me to receive the Prince. Noarrangement having been made with us respecting the ceremony of reception, I merely took off my hat and bowed:but all the chiefs fell on their knees the instant he came onthe quarter-deck. I took his hand from one of the chiefswho had assisted him up the accommodation ladder, andled him to the cabin.When seated beside Captain Maxwell, the Prince madeseveral anxious enquiries about his finger, expressing muchregret that so disagreeable an accident should have occurredat Loo-choo. He then called to his pipe-bearer, and havingprepared a pipe, presented it to Captain Maxwell, who returned him this compliment, by giving him one of his own.The usual questions as to our ages and families, and variouscomplimentary speeches, having passed, he said he hadheard much of the wonders of the ship, and should like tosee them himself: he rose upon this and went to the globes,which he examined with great care. He begged to be shewnIngeree, Loo-choo, Quantoong (China); Niphon (Japan);Manilla, and Pekin. The chiefs would not sit down in hispresence, and never spoke to him without kneeling. On hisTHE Fm.ii ire IEfsj-f, fa-John Mttr7~q.y,j4li>emarle Street, L?ru&?n.

GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 177expressing a wish to look at the different parts of the ship,he was conducted all round the decks. He observed everything with attention, but without betraying any great degreeof curiosity: he had heard of the boatswain's wife, andasked to see her; the lady, in her best dress, was presentedto him; he stood for about half a minute looking at her.with a sort of pleased surprise, and then, as if suddenly recollecting that this was somewhat rude, he drew his fan fromhis breast, and with an air of the utmost politeness, heldit towards her, and upon Mrs. Loy curtsying in acknoAvledgment,he sent it to her by M&dera. He asked to seethe fire-engine worked, and appeared much gratified byseeing the water thrown to so great a height. He had heardof the African negro, and begged that he might be sent for.When the black man was brought before him he lookedexceedingly surprised, and probably was in doubt whetherthe colour was natural, as one of his people was sent to rubhis face, as if to discover whether it was painted or not. Thenatives, who had flocked on board in crowds, fell on theirknees whenever the Prince passed.On returning to the cabin, the Prince was invited toa collation prepared for him in the foremost cabin:for a-long time he refused to sit down, nor could we conjecture what his objection was; at length, however, heA A

178 VOYAGE TO THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 179complied, while the chiefs, who are neither allowed to sitdown nor eat in his presence, retired to the after-cabin.He tasted every thing which was offered him, but seemedafraid of the wines, having probably heard of the proceedings on the evening of the 19th. In about half an hour herose and went to the after-cabin; the chiefs and the peopleof his suite, to the number of fifteen, then sat down at thetable he had left, and made ample amends for the temperance and moderation of his royal highness.As soon as they rejoined the party in the after-cabin,business was entered upon by Captain Maxwell's returningthanks, in the name of the English government, for theliberal way in which we had been supplied with every kindof refreshment, and for the other assistance which had beengiven to us. The Prince replied, that the King of Loo-choowas anxious to do every thing in his power for the King ofEngland's ships. Upon this Captain Maxwell observed,that he was very desirous of seeing his majesty, for the purpose of expressing in person his gratitude for the kindnesswe had received in this country. The Prince answered,that it was contrary to the laws and customs of Loo-choo,for. any foreigner to see the king, unless sent by his ownsovereign, and charged with complimentary presents.Coming from such high authority, this assurance was con-elusive, and as nothing further could now be said on thesubject, the hope of opening a communication with thiscourt, which had been so anxiously desired, seemed nowdestroyed.The Prince, however, unexpectedly resumedthe subject, by saying that a letter would be written to theKing of England, if Captain Maxwell would undertake todeliver it; his answer was, that nothing could give himmore satisfaction than being made the bearer of such acommunication: that he had earnestly desired the honourof paying his respects to his majesty, but from the momentthat he had heard that it was contrary to the customs of thecountry, he had ceased to think of it. As soon as it wasinterpreted that Captain Maxwell was willing to carry theletter alluded to, and that he no longer urged his desire tosee the King, the Prince rose and pressed Captain Maxwell's hand and mine between his, while all the chiefs fell ontheir knees in a circle round us, shewing by the expressionof their countenances, how great the anxiety had been fromwhich they were relieved by Captain Maxwell's readyacquiescence with their wishes: the Prince in particular,who had hitherto looked full of anxiety, became all cheerfulness, and his manner assumed a totally different character.The inference from this curious scene is, that the real•*••

II180 VOYAGE TO THEobject of the Prince's visit was to dissuade Captain Maxwell from urging his request to be allowed an interview withthe King; and we conjectured that the circumstance of hisaccident was taken advantage of to pay a visit to theAlceste, where they naturally thought that the remonstrancesof a man of such high rank as the Heir Apparent to thethrone, would carry more weight than any which had yetbeen tried.When the Prince again alluded to the letter, it appearedthat it was to be written by the minister, and not by theKing. This altered the case materially, and Captain Maxwell most respectfully informed the Prince, that such aletter as he described could not be received, as it would bean indignity to our sovereign to offer his majesty a letterwritten by another king's minister. The Prince at onceseemed sensible of the propriety of what Captain Maxwellhad said, and calling the chiefs round him, entered into along discussion with them: at the close of which, he declaredhimself incompetent to decide upon so important an occasion, but said that he would consult with the King, whosepleasure would be communicated in a few days. CaptainMaxwell expressed his willingness to abide by his majesty'sdecision as far as was consistent with the respect due to hisown sovereign. The Prince seemed entirely satisfied withGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 181this answer, and said something to the chiefs, upon whichthey again fell on their knees before Captain Maxwell, notwithstanding all his efforts to prevent them. Nothing moreof any consequence passed.In the early part of the interview the present wasbrought in, or at least such parts of it as were capable ofbeing thus displayed. The whole consisted of two bullocks,three hogs, three goats, and a quantity of vegetables andfruit; besides fifteen webs of the cloth of the island, thirtyfans, and twelve pipes. The Prince said he had sent apresent to me, which I found to consist of half the abovementioned things. He shortly afterwards rose to takeleave. The rigging was manned on his going away, andsimilar honours were paid him as were shewn when he cameon board.The Prince of Loo-choo, whose name is Shang PungFwee, and title Pochin Tay Foo, belongs to the highestof the nine orders of chiefs on the islands, the distinction ofwhich rank is a hatchee-matchee of a pink ground, withperpendicular rows of black, yellow, blue, white, and greenspots. He was clothed in a robe of light blue silk, linedwith silk a shade lighter, over which he wore a girdle richlyembossed with flowers of gold and different coloured silks:in other respects his dress was like that of the chiefs. HeIft

182 VOYAGE TO THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 183Ihris about fifty years old, his beard is full and white, and hisfigure well proportioned. In manners he is genteel andsedate, but occasionally a little awkward, which his retiredhabits sufficiently account for. Towards the close of hisvisit, when his reserve had in some degree worn off, weobserved him smile for an instant, now and then, with ashrewd expression in his eyes, as if he was observing whatwas passing more narrowly than we at first suspected. Itwas thought, too, that in making inquiries about differentthings on board, he shewed more discrimination than mostof those who had preceded him; but on the whole, therewas nothing very interesting in him besides his rank. Whilehe was looking over the books and other things in the cabin,a picture of his majesty King George the Third was shewnto him. As the interpreter was not present, we could notimmediately explain who it was intended to represent, till itoccurred to us to join our hands and bow to it in the Loochoomanner: the Prince instantly saw what was meant,and turning towards the picture, made a low and respectfulobeisance.His suite consisted of several chiefs whom we had not seenbefore, and six or seven personal attendants, two of whomstood behind to fan him and light his pipe. It is curiousthat these men, who from their dress and manner wereicertainly servants, derived a sort of rank from being aboutthe Prince's person ; for when the chiefs sat down to tableafter he had left it, they all stood by as if expecting to beinvited to sit down also; but Mr. Clifford, to whom CaptainMaxwell had given the party in charge, having observedhow particular they were with respect to the distinctions ofrank, did not think of asking them to be seated, till Jeemarequested him to do so; still suspecting some mistake, heapplied to Madera, who said it was perfectly correct, andthey were accordingly asked to sit down with the rest.We had never been able topbtain from the natives any clearaccount of former visitors, and as the Prince was thought alikely person to be in possession of the desired information,questions were asked him upon this subject. He said thata vessel had been here about twenty years ago, and that shewent away immediately without holding any communicationwith the court. This must have been the schooner in whichCaptain Broughton visited Napakiang in July, 1797, afterhe had been wrecked in his majesty's ship Providence, onthe island of Typinsan*. He said that he knew of no other* See Broughton's Voyage, Book II. Chap. %. for a very interesting accountof the natives of Typinsan, who appear to resemble the people of the GreatLoo-choo Island. In Book II. Chap. 3. Captain Broughton gives an accountof his visit to Napachan. He was received by the inhabitants with great kindness ; they supplied his wants, but objected to his landing, and sent back to theschooner some of the officers who had been sent on shore to examine the town.We found Captain Broughton's account of the people quite accurate.

184 VOYAGE TO THEstranger who had visited Loo-choo. On being interrogatedas to the knowledge of other countries, he declared thatthey knew nothing of the English or French, or any nationindeed but the Chinese, Corean, and Japanese. Somethingwas said about Manilla, and from its not being very remote,it is possible that some communication may have existedbetween that place and Loo-choo. Their accounts, however, were vague and unsatisfactory, and it is not impossiblethat we ourselves may have first suggested the name, andafterwards ascribed the use of it to them*.Nothing, however, that occurred to-day, attracted morenotice than Madera's assumption of his long concealedrank. He came for the first time dressed in the robes andhatchee-matchee of a chief, and not only took precedenceof all our old friends, but during the discussion in the cabinwith the Prince, maintained a decided superiority overthem all. While all the rest were embarrassed in thePrince's presence, and crouching on their knees every timethey spoke, Madera, though always respectful, was quite athis ease; and we could not help fancying that he addressedthe Prince as if accustomed to his society. It was no lessremarkable, that the Prince referred much oftener to himthan to any of the rest, and listened to what he said with* At Manilla we found that the Great Loo-choo Island was known only byname. There appeared to be no intercourse between the two places.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 185greater attention. Whether Madera owed such distinctionto his actual rank, which may have placed him about thecourt, or to the ascendancy of his talents, or to the accidental circumstance of his having had better opportunitiesof knowing us than any other of the natives, we couldnever discover. He admitted, when interrogated, that he hadoften seen the Prince before, while the other chiefs confessedtheir ignorance even of his person, before to-day.As soon as the Prince was placed in his chair and carried away, Madera came on board, and entered with greatgood humour into all the jokes which were made upon hisnew character. He declined telling why he had kept hisrank so long out of sight, but it was sufficiently obvious thathis main object was to establish an intimacy with all thedifferent classes on board the ships, and in this he completely succeeded; for he had gradually advanced in hisacquaintance, first with the sailors, then the midshipmen,next with the officers, and last of all with the captains. Bythis means he gained the confidence and good will of eachclass as he went along; and by rising in consequence everyday, instead of putting forward all his claims at once, acquired not only substantial importance with us, but gaineda much more intimate knowledge of our character andcustoms than he could have hoped to do in any other way.B BI!

186 VOYAGE TO THE24th of October.—Mr. Clifford went along with me today for the purpose of sketching the bridge, which, thoughnot above three hundred yards from the landing place, thechiefs have always objected to our examining. We tookJeeroo with us without telling him our object, which he nosooner discovered than he became quite alarmed, and sentoff for Madera, who came to us immediately, and uponlearning that nothing further was proposed than a mereexamination of the bridge, he said that we might go on;having first made us promise solemnly not to go any further.While Madera was binding us clown in this way, I expressedsome little impatience at his doubting our simple declarationof nothing more being intended than what we avowed; buthis duty I suppose was imperative, and he would not leaveus till the matter was arranged in his, own way. As soonas he was satisfied on this point he said something to Jeerooand left us; but turning back again, he came up to Mr.Clifford, and whispered, " captain no sulky ?" meaning, wesupposed, to express his apprehension that I had been angryat the stipulations so positively required by him. Mr. Clifford, having assured him that I was not sulky with him,detained him to ask him what it was he feared ? what he hadseen in us to excite such dread of our going near the town ?He replied, " Loochoo woman see Ingeree man, LoochooGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.woman cry \" He then returned; and Jeeroo, who remainedin a boat close to the bridge while I was employed measuring it and drawing it stone by stone, was greatly interested by Mr. Clifford's account of the great age of ourvenerable Sovereign, and the number of his family, whichexcited his astonishment and admiration. He conversedfreely while the subject was the King of England, but themoment the slightest turn in the discourse was made towards the King of Loo-choo he drew up, and became impenetrable. " He did not know," he said, " how old he was,nor how many children he had ;" in short he seemed scarcelyto admit that he had ever heard any thing about him.Erom M4dera, however, who had no concealments, welearnt afterwards that the King has only one wife, but hastwelve concubines; he is an old man, and has seven children. It is curious that none of the chiefs will inform Captain Maxwell whether or not the Prince who visited theships yesterday has any children ; it is hardly possible thatthey can be ignorant of the fact; but either they are keptstrangely in the dark as to what passes in the palace, orthey carry their reserve on royal topics to a singular length.From the bridge we went to the top of the hill abovethe well, where Jeeroo sung several songs. On the way upwe stopped at one of the large horse-shoe tombs mentioned

AfVOYAGE TO THEbefore, which resembles in all respects the tombs of China.On this similarity being pointed out to Jeeroo, he becameanxious to explain that it was a Loo-choo tomb, and notexclusively Chinese; meaning probably that Loo-choo persons were contained in it. He informed us that these tombsdid not contain a single person only, or a single generation,but were used as cemeteries from age to age. The bodies,according to his account, are put into coffins, and allowedto lie untouched for seven years, by which time the flesh isentirely decayed; the bones are then collected, and beingput into cases are preserved by the families of the deceased,with great care.. 25th of October.—This being the anniversary of HisMajesty's accession to the throne, the ships were dressed incolours, and a royal salute fired. Upon the natives thisproduced a great effect; they had never seen any otherflags than the single ensigns hoisted on Sundays, and thisdisplay of several hundred flags was well calculated to surprise and delight them. They were informed some daysbefore that there would be some ceremonies in honour ofour King, and great numbers of people had assembled onthe shore in consequence. This morning had also been fixedupon for returning the Prince's visit; accordingly we left theAlceste at one o'clock, forming a procession of four boats.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 189with flags in each. Captain Maxwell took twelve of hisofficers and young gentlemen, and six accompanied mefrom the Lyra, all being dressed in full uniform. Weentered the harbour, and landed at the same part of thecauseway as before, where the chiefs were in attendance, ason the occasion of our visit on the 23d ult.The Prince advanced a few yards on the outside of thegare^and having taken Captain Maxwell's hand, conductedhim to the temple, where an ingenious device was adoptedto preserve the etiquette, requiring that none of inferiorrank shall sit down in the Prince's company. The templewas divided into three rooms by ranges of columns, whichwere deemed a sufficient separation; and, at the same time,no person in the other rooms could feel himself slighted bythe exclusion, since the division by the pillars was merelynominal. The feast was sumptuous, consisting of twelveregular courses, besides tea and sackee. There were manynew dishes, principally of meat, dressed in various ways inlarge bowls. We saw what seemed to be wheaten breadfor the first time to-day. It being necessaiy to make somereturn for the presents brought on board by the Prince twodays ago, Captain Maxwell now gave him several pieces ofscarlet and blue superfine cloth, and samples of everyspecies of cloths, from the finest damask to the coarsest sail

tt190 VOYAGE TO THEcanvas; also a set of cut crystal decanters and glasses, andthree dozen of wine of ten different sorts, with several books,and a number of smaller articles. It was also stated tothe Prince, that a cow and calf had been left on shore inorder to be offered to the King as a small mark of our senseof the kindness which we had experienced. The Prince expressed much satisfaction at this gift, as the calf had becomea great favourite with the natives. My present consisted ofhalf the quantity of wine given by Captain Maxwell, a mirrortaken from a dressing-stand, samples of English stationary,Gary's map of England, an atlas, and a small brass sextant;which latter present had been suggested by the wonderwhich it had invariably excited at the observatory. Mr.John Maxwell, to whom the Prince had sent a present ofcloth and pipes after he landed yesterday, gave him a spyglass and a map of London; the map was coloured, andround the edges were the palaces, Greenwich Hospital, andother public buildings, all of which he examined with greatattention. After he had looked over most of the things,and was satisfied with the explanations, he rose and saidthat a great deal too much had been given, to which it wasreplied, that a great deal too little had been given, and thatthey were not offered as being, in any respect, an equivalentfor the supplies sent on board, but merely to shew ourGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 191sense of the kindness and attention with which we hadbeen received*. During the time that we sat at table to-,day, the interpreter was hardly ever called in, as Ma-dera and Mr. Clifford contrived between them to explainevery thing, if not as clearly as could have been wished,yet in a more satisfactory manner than could have beendone ^through the medium of John the Chinaman, of whosefidelity we were nowise certain, and whose taste and delicacy in conveying our sentiments we had great reason todoubt.* LIST OF SUPPLIES RECEIVEDH. M. SHIPS.Bullocks - - ' _Goats -Fowls - ...Fish - . _ ~_Eggs - . .Bags of sweet potatoes -SquashesJars of Samchoo, each containing about fifteengallons _ _Baskets of oranges - - _Bundles of gingerbread——————Onions - .1——•——Radishes -——•————Celery .——————Garlick - _—•————Candles -——————Wood .....Pumpkins -Baskets of vermicelli -Boxes of sugar - - - _Rolls of printed linen - ...Bundles of paper -AT LOO-CHOO BYAlceste Lyra.19 823 1015 7*216 102 * Not including29 12extra suppliesto the officers.920 455*59 27 * Not including34 14ditto.6 39 48 316 830 121287 54381660 3072 3173146

I192 VOYAGE TO THEThe Prince, after a time, rose and proposed the Kingof England's health, which was accordingly drank in acup of sackee. In return we gave the King of Loo-choo.As the surgeon had desired Captain Maxwell to drink nowine, there was very little drank at the Prince's table; butat the others every art was used to circulate the sackee pot.Indeed, little persuasion was required, for the sackee,though not strong, was very good. Ookooma presided atthe table occupied by the officers, and Jeero at that wherethe midshipmen sat.Ookooma having remarked on board, that whenever theKing's health was drank, whether his Majesty of England,or of Loo-choo, the cups were always freely emptied, tookadvantage of this loyalty of sentiment, and gave " TheKing, of Injeree's health" three or four times over, to which,of course, the officers were obliged to reply, by giving" The King of Loo-choo" as often. He carried this ratherfarther than is customary with us on similar occasions, forobserving that the company were rather backward in eatinga bowl of sweet rice-meal porridge, he stood up with hisbowl in his hand, and calling out" King of Injeree health!"swallowed the whole of it, and invited the rest to follow hisexample.The Prince seemed to enjoy the mirth of the otherGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 193tables Very much; he was himself more cheerful andengaged than when we first saw him, though he appearsto be naturally a silent man. Ookooma, by overactinghis part, got, we thought, a little tipsy, and came severaltimes into the state chamber, talking louder than wasproper, but of this the Prince took no notice. WhenOokooma came near my chair, I whispered to him, " Yaweetee," (you are drunk;) he turned round, and affecting tobe angry, called out, " Weetee nang," (I am not drunk)in a voice and manner which were in direct contradictionto his assertion : his subsequent behaviour, however, was socorrect and sedate when the feast broke up, and all wereagain upon duty, that he was probably merely pretendingto be tipsy, in order to suit what was considered to be thehumour of the company.On rising to depart, the Prince led Captain Maxwell bythe hand, not only through the gate, but about twenty yardsalong the causeway; here he stopped and took leave. Captain Maxwell availed himself of this opportunity to repeat,for the last time, his thanks in the name of his government,for the numerous attentions and marks of kindness which wehad received. He requested that what he had said mightbe communicated to the King, and assured the Prince, inthe most earnest and respectful manner, that all the circumcc

194 VOYAGE TO THEstances of our reception and entertainment should be statedto our own government. The Prince bowed to this in amanner which seemed to express his satisfaction at whatwas promised. Captain Maxwell next observed, that besidesthe high public benefits of which he had just been speaking,he felt individually greatly honoured and obliged by theparticular attention which had been shewn to himself, andto the captain of the little ship, and hoped that the Princewould accept from himself a small mark of his respect andgratitude. As soon as this was interpreted to the Prince,Captain Maxwell took from his neck a small thermometer,set in silver, and presented it to the Prince, who leanedhis head forward, and requested that it might be hung roundhis neck.This may be supposed a curious place to hang a thermometer, but we had learned during our intercourse with thechiefs, that some management of this kind was necessarywhenever it was intended to offer them presents; for theirextreme delicacy made them unwilling to accept any thingof value, lest it might appear in the light of remunerationfor their hospitality. Whenever any thing merely ornamental, or of little value, was offered, and particularly ifworn about the person, no objection was made to receivingit. It thus became the practice, as being the most convenientGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 195method, to tie the proposed gift by a ribbon round theneck; and after a time, every one had rings, seals, watchkeys,or bank tokens with holes drilled in them, prepared for these occasions. The thermometer which wasgiven to the Prince had particularly attracted his noticewhen he was on board.After Captain Maxwell had given his present, the Princeturned to me, and I put over his neck a cornelian ornament,suspended by a ribbon, in the same manner as the thermometer.He was greatly delighted with these compliments, andimmediately resuming Captain Maxwell's hand, led himalong the whole length of the causeway to the boat, andthen stepped upon the top of the parapet to see us rowaway.As soon as we had put off, every one in the boats stoodup and gave three cheers; to which the Prince bowedseveral times, with his hands closed and raised to his breast.He remained on the parapet, and continued waving his fanto us as we rowed down the harbour, as long as we couldsee him. As the boats rowed in procession out of theharbour, all the chiefs ran along to the end of the causeway, where they continued, along with a vast crowd ofnatives, waving their handkerchiefs and fans till we were

"II196 VOYAGE TO THEa great way from the shore. On each side of this groupof chiefs a gong was beat incessantly. On every side,the rocks, the trees, houses, and boats, in short, every spotwas crowded with people, waving their hands, and cheeringus as we went along. This brilliant scene had less ofnovelty in it, to be sure, than what we had witnessed at thesame place-on the twenty-third of last month, but it wasstill more pleasing, for we had now become acquainted withmany of the individuals forming this assemblage, arid couldfeel assured that their expressions of kindness and respectwere sincere. On the first occasion, too, the natives beingignorant of our intentions, were very generally alarmed atour appearance; and accordingly, though there was muchcuriosity shewn , a profound silence and stillness prevailedover the whole crowd, very different from the friendlyshouts and signs with which they greeted us as we passedamong them to-day.Precautions had been taken to prevent the ladies fromindulging their curiosity as they had done on the first visit,pot a female being seen any where.26th of October.—Last night both the Alceste and Lyrawere illuminated. At nine o'clock a feu de joie was fired,and a number of fire-works let off from the yard-arms. Agreat concourse of the natives, who had been apprised offc£Q*

1DPIGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 197our intentions, assembled on the shore, and were very highlydelighted with this brilliant exhibition.The sick, as well as the remaining stores belonging to theAlceste, were removed on board this morning, and everypreparation made for sea. While employed in completingthe series of observations at the observatory, Maderajoined us, having in his hand the sextant which I had givento the Prince yesterday. It seemed that he had beenordered to make himself acquainted with the use of it; andk more hopeless enterprise could not have been proposedto any man. But Madera was not a man to be thrownjlito despair by difficulty; on the contrary, he persevered inobserving with this sextant, and the more the difficultywas made apparent, the more keenly he laboured to overcome it. The progress which he made in a few hours in themere practical operation of taking angles and altitudeswas not surprising, because there is in fact not much difficulty in it; but he was nowise satisfied with this proficiency, and seemed anxious to apply his knowledge to someuseful purpose.With a sextant on a stand, I made him take the distancebetween the sun and moon, four or five times; on everyoccasion he was wonderfully near the truth. We endeavoured

198 »•• ' VOYAGE TO THEto confine him to one. object, merely to ascertain the timeof apparent noon; and I think we succeeded in explainingt0: him how this was to be done. He expressed repeatedlyhis regret at our approaching departure, in which sentimenthe was joined by Jeeroo and the rest of the chiefs, who werequite out of spirits. Jeeroo, poor fellow, had prepared ahandsome dinner for us under a tree near the observatory.IJe made us drink what he called " wackarittee," or theparting cup, several times over. We had a number of visitors at the observatoryj who saw the instruments packedup and sent off with looks of real regret. They all said theywere sorry we Avere going away. One man gave Mr. Clifford,as a farewell gift, a curious drawing of the Alceste dressedin flags, and executed, he said, by his son. The children,too, were all much affected by our preparations, and thewonted hilarity of the lower orders was quite gone.Having taken our final leave of the shore, we went to theAlceste, where Ave found the chiefs in conference AvithCaptain Maxwell, Avho made each of the chiefs a presentof a «ut Avine glass, Avhich he kneAV they had long desiredto possess. To Ookooma he gave a finely cut tumbler,in a red morocco case. This was much beyond his expectations, and perhaps his- wishes, for he appeared toGtlEAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 199observe the Avine glasses of the others Avith somewhat ofa disappointed look. Captain MaxAvell perceiving in amoment that Ookooma had set his heart upon a wine glass,opened the case, and placed one inside the tumbler^ toOokooma's great satisfaction; and soon afterwards thewhole party Avent on shore, saying, before they left theship, that in the morning the Bodzes Avould come on boardin order to perform some sacrifice. As they never came, itis probable that the interpreter misunderstood them, paiticularlyas Isaacha Sandoo said to Mr. Clifford, " Achahoonee nittee Doochoo mang hoonee oocooyoong/' " Tomorrow the ships will go, and all the Loo-choo people willpray for them, or Avish them well;" Avhich Avas probablywhat Avas meant when the interpreter reported that theBodzes Avere to come on board.While Ave Avere at dinner, Madera came into the Alceste'scabin for the purpose of asking some questions about thesextant. He had not, been aAvare of our being at dinner, andlooked shocked at having intruded; and Avhen invited to sitdoAvn, politely, but firmly declined. From the cabin hewent to the gun room, to see his friend Mr. Hoppner,-thejunior lieutenant of the Alceste, with Avhom he had formeda great friendship. Mr. Hoppner gave him a picture of the

200 VOYAGE TO THEAlceste and some other presents; upon which Madera, whowas much affected, said, " To-morrow ship go sea; I gomy father house, two day distance: when I see my father,I show him your present, and I tell him, me, Henry Hoppnerall same (as) brother," and burst into tears!Sunday, 27th of October.—At day-break we unmoored,and the natives, on seeing us take up one of our anchors,thought we were going to get under weigh immediately,and give them the slip, which was not at all intended.This alarm, however, brought the chiefs off in a great hurry;not in a body in their usual formal way, but one by one, inseparate canoes. Old Jeema called on board the Lyra on/his way to the frigate; he was a good deal agitated, andthe tears came into his eyes when I put a ring on his finger.He gave me in return his knife.The other chiefs called alongside on their way to thefrigate, but went on when I told them that I was just goingto the Alceste myself. In the mean time Madera came onboard, with the sextant in his hand; he was in such distressthat he scarcely knew what he was about. In this distractedstate he sat down to breakfast with us, during which hecontinued lighting his pipe and smoking as fast as he could;drinking and .eating whatever was. placed before .him.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 201After he had a little recovered himself, he asked what booksit would be necessary to read to enable him to make use ofthe sextant; I gave him a nautical almanack, and told himthat he must understand that in the first instance: he openedit, and looking at the figures, held up his hands in despair,and was at last forced to confess that it was a hopelessbusiness. He therefore put the sextant up and bade usfarewell. Before he left the Lyra he gave Mr. Clifford hispipe, tobacco pouch, and a crystal ornament; saying, as heheld out the last, " You go Ingeree, you give this to yourchilds."Mr. Clifford gave him a few presents in return, andexpressed his anxiety to be considered his friend. Madera,with the tears streaming down his cheeks, placed his handseveral times upon his heart, and cried, " Eedooshee,edooshee !" My friend, my friend!To me he gave a fan and a picture of an old man lookingup at the sun, drawn, he said, by himself: he probably meantin his picture some allusion to my usual occupation at theobservatory. After he had put off in his boat, he called out,"Ingeree noo choo sibittee yootoosha," I shall ever rememberthe English people. When he went to the Alceste, one ofthe chiefs remarked that he had neither his hatchee-matcheeon nor his robes, and told him that it was not respectful toD D

202 VOYAGE TO THEwait upon Captain Maxwell for the last time, in his ordinarydress; particularly as all the others were in full array.Madera, who, poor fellow, had been too much concernedabout other matters to think of dress, was shocked at thisapparent want of politeness, and went immediately toapologize to Captain Maxwell, who took him by the hand,and gave him a present, telling him, at the same time, thathe was always too happy to see him, to notice what dress hehad on.On going into the cabin, I found the chiefs seated in arow, all very disconsolate, and apparently trying to concealemotions different, in all probability, from any which theyhad ever before experienced.Captain Maxwell had madethem his parting present, and I therefore gave to eachchief some trifle, receiving from them in return, theirknives, pipes, pouches, and fans.In the mean time theanchor was hove up, and every thing being ready formaking sail, the chiefs rose to take leave.Ookooma wishedto say something, but was too much affected to speak, andbefore they reached their boats they were all in tears.Madera cried bitterly as he shook hands with hisnumerous friends, who were loading him with presents.The chiefs, as well as the people in the numerous canoeswhich had assembled round the ships, stood up, and con-GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 203tinued waving their fans and handkerchiefs till we werebeyond the reefs, and could see them no longer.ALMOST every thing respecting the manners and customsof Loo-choo, with which we have had an opportunity ofbecoming acquainted, has been laid before the reader in theforegoing narrative. It is proposed to insert here a few particulars which in the hurry of the moment were noted downwithout date. They might easily have been embodiedwith the narrative, but it has been considered of less consequence to sacrifice arrangement, than to interfere in anyway with the integrity of the Journal, in which nothinghasbeen inserted out of the exact order in which it is known tohave happened.The religion of Loo-choo appears to be that of Fo, saidto be introduced by the bodzes one thousand years ago*.We found great difficulty in discovering any thing precise onthis subject from the natives; but from all that we couldgather, religion does not appear to be made a matter ofgeneral instruction as in Europe, being left, as in China, tothe priests. This we infer from the careless way in whichthe subject was at all times treated by the natives, and the* See Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses^ vol. 23.

204 VOYAGE TO THEignorance which they professed of the forms and ceremoniesused in the temples. The bodzes are not respected oresteemed in society; they are prevented from marrying,and are not allowed to eat meat: few people associatewith them, and even the children turn them into ridicule.On the occasion of the Loo-choo funeral service over thegrave of the seaman, the bodzes stood behind, and werenot called upon to officiate, the service being entirely performed by Jeeroo.In the large temple we saw three gilt idols and variouspictures; but with the exception of the funeral servicejust alluded to, we never met with any thing in the leastdegree resembling a religious ceremony. The bodzes keptthe temple clean swept, and took care of the walks andhedges, and this appeared to be their only employment.It is fair to suppose, however, that the occupation of thetemple by us may have caused a temporary cessation oftheir religious observances.They have large tombs or cemeteries for their dead,being mostly of the Chinese form, viz. that of a horse-shoe.They are formed of stones and mortar, and are coveredwith a coat of cheenam, (shell lime), which is always keptnicely white-washed and clean swept: some are more highlyfinished than others ; their size varies from twenty to thirtyfeet in length, by twelve to fourteen broad. The coffin.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 205when closed, is placed in the vault under the tomb, and isnot touched for six or seven years, by which time the fleshis found to have separated and wasted away; the bones arethen collected, and put into jars ranged in rows on the inside of the vault. Burning is never used at any stage of theproceedings, nor under any circumstances. In the courseof time, when these vaults become crowded, the vases areremoved to houses appropriated to their reception aboveground : snch must have been the building described byMr. Clifford in the village near Port Melville. The lowerorders, who cannot afford these expensive tombs, takeadvantage of hollow places in the rocks, which by a littleassistance are made secure vaults. In the cliffs behind thevillage of Oonting, the galleries cut for the reception ofthe vases must have been the work of men possessed ofpower and authority. Not being fully aware what theChinese customs are with respect to the dead, in ordinarycases, it is impossible for us to say how nearly they resemblethose of Loo-choo, but there are certainly some points ofresemblance.From Mr. Clifford's notes on the Loo-choo inscriptions,I have extracted the following particulars." A number of carved stones, called by the nativesKawroo, were found at many places, particularly in thegroves on the hill. The Kawroo is two feet long, by oue

206 VOYAGE TO THEwide, and one high; it is excavated a little on the upperpart, on which an offering of rice is placed. On the sides ofthis stone are carved a variety of characters, denoting therank of the person who makes the offering, as well as theobject of his petition, together with the date." Two of these inscriptions, copied at the time, have sincebeen translated by a gentleman acquainted with the Chinesecharacters. The first gives an account of a man about to sailfor China, in the reign of Kien Lung, the late monarch ofthat country; this person implores the divine aid in protecting him during his voyage. The other is dated in thetwenty-first year of the reign of Kia-King, the presentemperor of China, answering to the year 1816, in which wevisited Loo-choo. This is an invocation to the deity forsuccess in a literary pursuit." Two narrow strips of paper, with characters inscribedon them, which by consent of the natives were takenfrom a pillar in the temple, and which have since beentranslated, prove to be invocations, one to the supremedeity, and the other to the evil spirit. The first ison a slip of paper, two feet long, by two inches wide,and contains a supplication for pardon. The latter invocation begins by seven rows of the character symbolical of the Devil. In the upper line there are seven,and in the last one, so that a triangular page is formed ofGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 207twenty-eight characters, each signifying the Devil; andthe prayer itself is written in a narrow perpendicular lineunderneath; the whole inscription resembling in form akite with a long tail attached to it."Polygamy is not allowed in Loo-choo as in China, andthe king, it appears, is the only person permitted by law tohave concubines; they invariably spoke with horror of theChinese practice, which allows a plurality of wives, and weremuch gratified on learning that the English customs in thisrespect were similar to those of Loo-choo. The women arenot treated so well as we were led to expect from the mildness of character in the men, and their liberality of thinkingin general. The upper classes of women are confined agood deal to their houses, and the lower orders performmuch of the hard work of husbandry. We saw them at adistance, in great numbers, carrying loads on their heads.Madera says that the women are not treated with muchindulgence, being even restricted from using fans; andthat when they are met out of doors by the men, theytake no notice of one another, whatever may be the degreeof relationship or intimacy subsisting between them. Theperseverance with which they kept the women from oursight is curious, and leads us to conjecture that the generalpractice of the island is to seclude the women at all times.In this respect they differ from the Japanese, who are

VOYAGE TO THEsaid to allow wives to every stranger. This degree ofseclusion does not prevail in China, as we had opportunitiesof observing at several places never before visited by Europeans. The Chinese account quoted in the Lettres Edifiantes

210 VOYAGE TO THEwhich had the appearance of a warlike weapon, but we hadevery reason to believe that this was used for the sole purposeof catching fish, having seen others not very dissimilar actually employed in this way.They looked at our swords andcutlasses, and at the Malay creeses and spears, with equalsurprise, being apparently as little acquainted with the oneas with the other. The chiefs carried little case knives inthe folds of their robes, or in the girdle, and the lower ordershad a larger knife, but these were always of some immediate practical utility, and were not worn for defence noras ornaments. They denied having any knowledge of wareither by experience or by tradition.We never saw any punishment inflicted at Loo-choo:a tap with the fan, or an angry look, was the severest chastisement ever resorted to, as far as we could discover.giving orders, the chiefs were mild though firm, and thepeople always obeyed with cheerfulness.InThere seemed tobe great respect and confidence on the one hand, and muchconsideration and kind feeling on the other.In this particular, more than in any other that fell under our notice,Loo-choo differs from China, for in the latter country we sawnone of this generous and friendly understanding betweenthe upper and lower classes.One day when we were drinking tea and smoking pipesGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 211-with the chiefs, on the top of the hill, a boy began to exhibit feats of tumbling before us; in a short time all eyeswere turned towards him, and his modesty caused him todesist. We offered him buttons and various things, but hewould not. resume his tumbling: we then asked Jeema tointerfere; he did so, and told the youngster to go on; buthe kept his seat, and Jeema became angry, or rather pretended to be so, yet the tumbler sat obstinately still. " Well,"said Jeema to us, " what, is to be done ? It was for his ownamusement that he began, and probably for his amusementhe will do so again/' The boy, when left alone, in a shorttime resumed his tumbling. I mention this to shew Jeema'sgood sense in not forcing the boy to do that as a task,which he had begun as an amusement, and which he haddiscernment enough to know would be unpleasant for us towitness in any other way. By this treatment of their children,mutual cordiality and freedom of intercourse are encouraged. It was probably owing to this mode of educationthat the children became at once familiar with us. One daywhile I was employed sketching the village and trees near thebridge, a boy stopped near me, and without saying any thing,endeavoured to attract my notice by performing variousgambols before me. I took no notice of him for some time,but at last looked up and smiled ; upon which the boy criedII

VOYAGE TO THEout in perfectly good English, " How do you do? Verywell, I thank you;" and ran off, quite delighted at havingdisplayed his proficiency in English.The chiefs were generally accompanied by one or two oftheir sons, who took their places near them, and were alwaysput forward when there was any thing curious to be seen. Inthis way they were encouraged to make themselves acquainted with every thing, and yet nothing could be morerespectful or affectionate than they always were. Greatpains were taken to form the manners of the children, and wenever observed an instance of rudeness in any one of them,though they were as full of life and spirits as the wildestEnglish school-boys. John the Chinaman afforded themmuch amusement: he was a great coxcomb, and thereforefair game for the boys; they used to surround him andpretend to pull his long tail; but they never actuallypulled it, but merely teazed him a little, and then ran away.These little traits seem worthy of notice, as they belong toa style of education quite different from what we had seenin China and some other eastern countries, where the children are made to look like men in miniature.During our intercourse with these people, there did notoccur one instance of theft. They were all permitted to comeon board indiscriminately; to go into the cabins, store-GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 213rooms, and wherever they liked, unattended. At the templethe Alceste's stores of every kind were lying about, as well asthe carpenter's and armourer's tools; and in the observatory,the instruments, books, and pencils were merely placedunder cover; yet there was not a single article taken away,though many hundreds of people were daily admitted, andallowed to examine whatever they pleased. This degree ofhonesty is a feature which distinguishes the people of Loochoofrom the Chinese, as well as from the inhabitants ofthe islands in the South Sea and of the Malay Archipelago;among whom even fear, as was ascertained by CaptainCook and other voyagers, is altogether insufficient to prevent theft. At Loo-choo the people are considerablycivilised; but they have few wants, and they appear tobe perfectly contented. Honesty is perhaps the naturalconsequence of such a state of society.We saw no musical instruments of any kind; they were,however, aware of their use. The natives almost all sing,and we heard several very sweet airs, principally plaintive:they had many jovial drinking songs, one of which wewrote down from their singing; it was inscribed on a drinking cup, and is as follows ;" TyVack koo, tawshoo, shee kackoofing,*' Chaw ung, itchee shaw, shooha neebooroo;•1 " Ting shee, you byee, chee taroo shoo ninnee

m214I IVOYAGE TO THE" Nooboo cadsee meesee carra shaw jeeroo" Shing coodee sackee oochee noo shing."The Chinese characters on the drinking-cup werethus translated in China, " Tywack hoo *, inspired by ajar of wine, writes an hundred pages of odes or verses without end. At the market town of Chaw-ung-f- he entered awine shop to sleep. The Emperor summoned him to appear ; in his haste to obey the summons, he forgot to puton his neckcloth, and rushing into the royal presence, exclaimed, ' I am the wine-loving immortal/ "The Loo-choo dress has been so frequently mentioned,that a brief notice, in recapitulation, will suffice in thisplace. Their loose robe was generally made of cotton, andof a great variety of colours. The robe of a grown upperson was never flowered or printed over with figures, beinggenerally of a uniform colour, though instances occurred ofstriped cloths being worn by the chiefs. This robe openedin front, but the edges overlapped, and were concealedby the folds, so as to render it difficult to say whetheror not the robe was continued all round: the sleeveswere about three feet wide: round the middle was bounda belt or girdle about four or five inches wide, always* A man celebrated in the Tung dynasty for his convivial disposition: hew known in China by the name of Jai-pe.f The town of Chang-ngan in China, near the Great Wall.

- iGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 2loof a different colour from the dress, and in general richlyornamented with wrought silk and gold flowers. The foldsof the robe overhang the belt, but not so much as tohide it: the whole of the dress folds easily, and has agraceful and picturesque appearance. The garments wornby the children were often gaudily printed with flowers. Inrainy or cold weather, a sort of great coat was worn by thechiefs only, of thick blue cloth, buttoning in front over therobe, and tighter both in body and sleeves than the other.This cloth resembled the coarse cloth used in China; and itlooked like woollen manufacture, and may possibly have beenoriginally brought from England. The sandals worn by allranks were exactly the same; they were formed of strawwrought into a firm mat to fit the sole of the foot, smoothtowards the foot, and ragged underneath: a stiff smoothband of straw, about as thick as one's little finger, passesfrom that part of the sandal immediately under the ancleand over the lower part of the instep, so as to join the sandalat the opposite side; this is connected with the foremost partof the sandal by a short small straw cord which comesbetween the great toe and the next one. The upper classeswore stockings of white cotton, not unlike our half stockings, except that they button at the outside, and have a(GENTLEMAN ofplace like the finger of a glove for the great toe.Their hair is of a jet black, and is kept glossy by juice

il'jjIf216 VOYAGE TO THEexpressed from a leaf. There is no variety in the fashion ofdressing it; it is pulled tight up all round, and is formed attop into a compact knot, so as to conceal the crown of thehead, which is shaved; through the knot are thrust twometal pins, one of which has a square point and floweredhead consisting of six leaves or divisions: the other pin hasone end sharp, and the other shaped like a scoop: the lengthof these pins is from four to six inches. We did not seethe Prince's, as he remained covered during all the time ofhis visit; but the Chief of high rank, who visited the Alcesteon the 23d of September, had the flowered end of one pinstudded with precious stones. The higher orders wear, onstate occasions, what they called a " hatchee-matchee," whichis a kind of turban, apparently made by winding a broadbandround a cylinder, in such a way, that a small segment ofeach fold is shewn at every turn, in front above, and behindbelow; this is effected by giving a slight diagonal directionto each fold. The lower orders occasionally tie a colouredcloth or handkerchief round the head; this they call" sadjee:" next the body they wear a thin cotton dress.The men wear no ornaments through their flesh, nor arethey tattooed: we saw, indeed, some fishermen who had fishspears marked on their arms, but this does not prevailgenerally. An etching of these marks is given by Mr.Clifford in the second part of the Vocabulary.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 217The cattle on this island, which are of a small blackbreed, are used exclusively for agricultural purposes. Hogs,goats, and poultry, with rice and a great variety of vegetables, form the food of the inhabitants: milk is never used.We saw no geese, so that those left by Captain Broughtonmost probably did not thrive. They have no sheep norasses. Their horses are of a small slight make, and thenatives are very fond of riding. We saw no carts or wheeledcarriages of any kind, horses being used to carry loads; forthis purpose the roads are numerous, and kept in excellent order, being from six to ten feet wide.Their mode of dressing the ground is neat, and resembles the Chinese, particularly in manuring and irrigatingit. This is most attended to where the sugar-cane iscultivated: they have, besides, tobacco,. wheat, rice,Indian corn, millet, sweet potatoes, brinjals, and manyother vegetables. The fields, which are nicely squared,have convenient walks on the raised banks running roundeach. Along the sides of the hills, and round thevillages, the bamboo and rattan grow to a considerablesize. The pine is the most conspicuous tree on the island,growing to a great height and size, which we infer fromseeing canoes built with planks several feet wide; the trees,F F

I218 VOYAGE TO THEhowever,near the temple at Napakiang were not above ninetyfeet high, and from three to four in girt. The banyan-treeof India was seen at several places; the finest one overhungthe small temple at Napakiang, which circumstance led tothe enquiry whether, as in India, this tree is held sacred, butwe could gain no information on this subject.In a little plot of ground in the temple garden, Mr.Phillips, purser of the Alceste, sowed mustard-seed, peas,and a variety of other seeds, the natives taking his directions for their culture. Our total ignorance of botany prevented our making any observations on this subject whileat Loo-choo;. but to supply this deficiency, we collectedspecimens of every plant at the place. These were preserved between sheets of brown paper, and given afterwardsto Mr. Abel, the naturalist of the embassy, in order tobe arranged; but they were subsequently lost, along withthe whole of that gentleman's collection.Of their manufactures it is difficult to speak with certainty. By their own account the silks which they wearare Chinese, but the cotton cloths are made on this and theneighbouring islands; the printed patterns of these are notwithout, elegance. We saw no weaving looms, but as wewere only in a few houses, this; ;isr;not surprising: the websGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 219are thirty-six feet long, and fourteen inches broad. Tobaccopipesand fans are made at Loo-choo; as well as the sepulchral vases, of which there is a manufactory at Napakiang,from whence they are exported to Oonting, and other partsof the island. Some of the pouches of the chiefs were madeof cloth, which they say comes from China; it is exactlylike our broad cloth. We tried in vain to learn what goodsthey send to China in exchange for silks : perhaps sulphurforms a part, which these islands are said to produce, aswell as tin. From the number of vessels constantly sailingout and in, it appears that they must have some trade, butour enquiries on this and many other topics, though sedulously pursued, led to nothing satisfactory, owing probably rather to our ignorance of the language, than to anywish on their part to withhold information; because, ontopics which had no reference to the royal family or thewomen, they in general spoke freely.We had frequent opportunities of seeing their methodof making salt, and an account of it may, perhaps, be interesting. Near the sea, large level fields are rolled or beatso as to have a hard surface. Over this is strewn a sort ofsandy black earth, forming a coat about a quarter of aninch thick. Rakes and other implements are used to makeit of a uniform thickness, but it is not pressed down.*

220 VOYAGE TO THEDuring the heat of the day, men are employed to bringwater in tubs from the sea, which is sprinkled over thesefields by means of a short scoop. The heat of the sun, in ashort time, evaporates the water, and the salt is left in thesand, which is scraped up and put into raised receivers ofmasonry about six feet by four, and five deep.When thereceiver is full of the sand, sea water is poured on the top,and this, in its way down, carries with it the salt left byevaporation. When it runs out below at a. small hole, it isa very strong brine; this is reduced to salt by being boiledin vessels about three feet wide and one deep. The cakesresulting from this operation are an inch and a half inthickness.Of the population of this island we know nothing satisfactory : the natives invariably pleaded ignorance themselves ; and as we had no precise data, our estimates weremade at random, and as they never agreed with each other,they are not worthy of notice.From the south point ofthis island, to five or six miles north of Napakiang, an extent of sixteen or eighteen miles, the country is highlycultivated, and is almost entirely covered with villages. Allround Port Melville too there are populous villages, butthe north, north-east and eastern places are thinly peopled,and not cultivated to any extent.We saw nothing likeGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 221poverty or distress of any kind: every person that we metseemed contented and happy. We saw no deformed people,nor any who bore indications of disease, except a few whowere marked with the small-pox.The style of living of those with whom we associatedis generous and free; their custom of carrying about theirdinner in boxes, and making little pic-nic parties, is peculiarly striking, and they appeared fully sensible of theadvantage of bringing people together in this way, and expressed much satisfaction at the ready way in which wefell into a custom from which all formality was dismissed.They she wed, moreover, a good deal of discernment, and couldadapt themselves to the character of the particular personsthey happened to be in company with, in a manner veryremarkable; but this was evidently the result not ofcunning, but of correct feelings, and of a polite habit ofthinking.Of their manners, little need be added here to whatevery page of the narrative will show. It ought to be particularly noticed, however, that they are an exceedinglytimorous people, and naturally suspicious of foreigners.A stranger visiting Loo-choo ought therefore to keep thesefeatures of their character constantly in mind. By imitating Captain Maxwell's wise plan of treating the natives with

I,VOYAGE TO THEgentleness and kindness, and shewing every considerationfor their peculiarities, he will stand the best chance ofgaining their good-will and confidence. But if he shouldbetray any impatience, or be at all harsh in treating withthem, he may rest assured that he will lose much time,and in all probability fail at last in his attempts to establishan unreserved and friendly intercourse.As Loo-choo, however, lies quite out of the track oftrading ships, and does not appear to produce any thingof value itself, and as the inhabitants seem indifferentabout foreign commodities, and if they wished to possessthem are without money to make purchases, it is not probable that this island will be soon revisited.BB.IBKE AT NAPAIOAIKBAPPENDIX.

APPENDIX:CONTAININGCHARTSOF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOOISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE: WITH BRIEFEXPLANATORY NOTICES.TABLE OF OBSERVATIONSMADE WITH DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR: WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND ADESCRIPTION OF THIS INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS FOR ITS USE.METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 181C, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW ANDJAPAN SEAS.ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE,FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN; SHEWING THE DISTANCE BETWEENTHE DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE TIME TAKENIN PERFORMING EACH PASSAGE.GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;BEING A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS COLLECTED ON THE SHORESOF THE YELLOW SEA, COREA, LOO-CHOO, MACAO, AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS.L JH Lit'

CHARTSOF THEGULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THEGREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, ANDPORT MELVILLE.WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY NOTICES.

NOTICE EXPLANATORY OF A CHARTTHE SOUTH SIDE OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE,YELLOW SEA.IN constructing this chart, I have assumed the longitude of fast meridianused in conthefort at the mouth of the Pei-ho to be 117° 49' east of ^ctt!ngtbeGreenwich, or 11' west of the place where the squadron layat anchor. From this the difference of longitude was measured by two chronometers. The latitudes were ascertainedby frequent observations of the stars, as well as of the sun.The coast on the south and south-west sides of this Aspect of thesouth and south-Gulf is very low, resembling, in this respect, the shore at west coaststheentrance of the Pei-ho, or Pekin river, where it isuniformly low and sandy; occasionally a few houses are tobe seen, and also square mounds or buildings like forts, butgenerally, a low white beach is all that can be discovered.The coast is not visible till within about three leaguesdistance, and the eye elevated eighty feet from the sea, ,which is the height of the Lyra's fore top-gallant yard. The sounding*.depth of water when the land first came in sight, was generallyfive fathoms; at some places only four fathoms, and at the* Sculpt.

Kq i a 5 a_ , 'v L.i ^ / HrSti SA? -V."1 fSIIhfciIit^\ i

JlVIColour of the\vatef.Tides on thewestern side ofthe Gulf.Bottom of theGulf.APPENDIX.very bottom of the Gulf, it could not be discerned till inthree and a half fathoms. It may be said generally, that atten miles distance the soundings are from four and a half tosix fathoms; at twelve miles, from six to eight fathoms.There is a wonderful uniformity in the depth from the Pei-horound to the south-east corner of the Gulf; the bottom ismud, sometimes a little gritty, particularly towards thesouthern parts.The colour of the water was mostly of the same dirty3rellow or green which was observed off the Pei-ho, but we didnot observe any red coloured water, as was frequentlynoticed at that place; at the bottom of the Gulf, indeed,there were several changes in the colour of the water,accompanied by long lines of foam, indicating, it wouldseem, the vicinity of a great river.On the west side of the Gulf the ebb tide runs to thesouth-east by south, and the flood north-west by west;the periods are very regular, being generally about sixhours: they vary, however, in rapidity. As we anchoredon the flood we were enabled to measure its velocity; as wegot deep in the Gulf it decreased: at the Pei-ho it frequentlyran two and two and a half knots, but far south it wassometimes hardly perceptible; it is worthy of notice, too,that the perpendicular rise and fall decreased from ten feetoff the Pei-ho, to one, or at most two feet, in the bottom ofthe Gulf.The most southern point of our track was 37° 15' north;at this time we could perceive the low coast stretching to theeast and west; the distance it is difficult to assign veryaccurately, but it was probably seven or eight miles, forAPPENDIX. viiwith a glass we could perceive a number of people on theshore. I took great pains to ascertain the latitude statedabove, by the meridian altitudes of several stars; thelongitude is 1* 39' east of the Pei-ho,. or 119° 28' east ofGreenwich.The coast from the south-west corner of the Gulf to the south-easternpeninsula of Teu-choo-foo, is of a totally different character fr°mtheoPP°site.from that opposite to it, for it is high, and well marked : arange of mountains stretches from south-west to north-east,at the distance of three or four leagues inland; their outlineis peaked, and they are intersected by deep ravines withoutany verdure ; the summits are also barren.One of these mountains is very remarkable, having two M»uut EJJ;S.peaks or paps by which it can be distinguished at thedistance of fifty miles, and bears the same aspect whenviewed from all parts of the Gulf. It lies in 37° 6' north,and 2° 11' east of the Pei-ho, or 120° east of Greenwich. Ithas been called Mount Ellis, in honour of Mr. Ellis, the thirdcommissioner of the Embassy. ,Between this range of hills and the shore, there is a lower Aspect of thei ., coast.belt of elevated ground in a state of high cultivation, coveredwith many towns and villages, and interspersed with scattered trees and several extensive woods; .the ground, too,presents a varied surface, so that the whole offers a pleasingcontrastwith the rugged land behind. There are two smallislands on this line of coast; the southern one lies in 37° 2l'north, and 2° 5' east of the Pei-ho; the other is in 37° 28' J«»*iae.north, and 2° 19' east of the Pei-ho. Dougia8 island.There is a dangerous shoal about five leagues off thes»ore, abreast of these islands, upon which the Lyra nearly

vmAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.ixSoundings andlidos.Winds.int.Teu-choo-foocity.Cheatow Bay.struck at midnight on the 17th instant. When at anchorjust outside the shoal, the south island bore south 20° east,and the other, east 21° south; on the shoal there was twoand a half fathoms, hard bottom. It seems to extend in anorth and south direction, and is very narrow. It lies in37° 32' north, which I ascertained by altitudes of the polestar, under favourable circumstances. It is 1° 58' 30" east ofthe Pei-ho.The soundings on this side of the Gulf are somewhatdeeper than on the other, but not so deep as might have beenexpected from the bold nature of the land. The ebb tideruns to the north-eastward, and the flood into the Gulf.The wind was south-east and quite light, from the llthAugust to the 17th, when it shifted to north north-east tillabout eight P.M. when close in shore near the southern of thetwo islands; it then blew off, with all the appearance of aregular land breeze. On the 19th it blew a gale of windfrom the north-east, with a short, high sea; during the galewe lay at anchor off a remarkable point, connected with themain land by a low sandy neck; the ground felt soft to thelead, but it was probably rocky under the mud, as bothships lost a bower anchor by the cables being cut. Thispoint lies in 37° 42' north, and 2° 35' east of the Pei-ho.We found the city of Teu-choo-foo to lie in 3° 4' east ofthe Pei-ho. The latitude observed in Teu-choo-foo roadswas 37° 53' north, and the longitude 2° 54' east of thePei-ho. The western Meatow Island bearing north.The latitude of a small island at the north-east corner ofthe Bay of Cheatow or Zee-a-tow, was determined by thesun's meridian altitude on shore, to be 37° 35' 52 north,and longitude east of the Pei-ho 3° 45', or in 121° 34' eastof Greenwich.The latitude of Oei-hai-oei was observed on shore to be od-hai-oei.37° 30' 40" north, and lies 4° 25' east of the Pei-ho.The variation of the compass in the Yellow Sea was variation of thecompass.found to be 2° 16" westerly.The rise and fall of the tide at the anchorage of thesquadron off the Pei-ho was twelve feet. It was high waterat full, and change at III. The flood tide runs to thewest-south-west, and the ebb generally about east and eastsouth-east.Its strength and direction are a good dealinfluenced by the prevalent winds.

NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHARTTHE WEST COAST OF COREA.% Inadequate timeallowed for soextensive a survey.General remarks'survey.THIS chart extends from 34° to 38° north latitude, andfrom 124° to 127° east longitude. The time of our stay onthe coast being only nine days, no great accuracy is to beexpected, and this chart pretends to be little more than aneye-draught, checked by chronometers and meridian altitudesof the sun and stars. Under circumstances of such haste,much has unavoidably been left untouched, and what isnow given is presented with no great confidence.What follows is extracted from notes made at the timeby Mr. Clifford and myself. The longitudes by chronometerhave all been carefully recomputed, and the greatest carewas taken in ascertaining the various latitudes. Thetrue bearings are in every instance set down, the variationbeing allowed for at the moment. The variation of thecompass recorded in this notice, was determined by twoazimuth compasses, and the method recommended byCaptain Flinders, of repeating the observations by turningthe compass first one way and then the other, was invariablyfollowed.

APPENDIX. XIHis Majesty's ships Alceste and Lyra, after quitting the The shipsport of Oei-hai-oei, which is in latitude 37° 30' 40" north,and longitude 122° 16' east, on the north coast of ShantungPromontory, stood to the northward and eastward till inlatitude 38° north, and then ran to the eastward. On the Make the coastmorning of the 1st of September, 1816, we saAv the land,bearing about east. By sights with chronometer on themeridian of these islands, we ascertained that the west endof the northern one lies in 124° 44i' east. The latitude of f0 **s Hali'sthe south end of the eastern island was ascertained bymeridian altitude of the sun to be 37° 441' north. There isa rocky white islot off the west end of the middle island.We had from twenty to thirty fathoms on rounding thesouth-west end of the islands, but on the south side of thesouthern one there is a bight with seven fathoms, black sandin the centre : here we anchored. There is good anchorage Anchorage onn 11 1-1-11 if 11-1 the south side ofall over the bay, which is sheltered rrorn all winds except an island.between west south-west and south-east, being open to thesouthward. There are two villages here. From the top of thehighest peak on this island, which is about seven or eighthundred feet high, we could discern the main land of Corea,high and rugged, stretching north north-west and southsouth-east, distant from eight to ten leagues. Along thecoast abreast of us there were seen many islands. Thechannel between the middle island of the group and the onewe were upon appeared clear and broad ; but the northernand middle islands seemed connected by a reef which shewsabove water at several places.The inhabitants were suspicious and unfriendly : we character of the1 J inhabitant!.saw some cattle and many fowls, but neither money nor any-'IS

XllLose sight ofthe coast.Group of fiveislands.Bearings.Run among theislands.Bearings. -APPENDIX.thing else that we had could induce them to part witheither.In the evening we weighed and stood to the southward;next morning there was no land in sight. At noon we werein longitude 124° 47' 52" east, and latitude 36° 44i' north,no land in sight. We hauled in shore to the eastward, andanchored in the night in deep water.3rd of September.—Weighed at 3.30 and stood in shore;at 7- 45 A. M. we were due south of the western of a groupof islands. Many sights were taken as we passed to settlethe place of this group : it lies between 125° 42s' east, and125° 57*' east, and in latitude 36° 44' north. After passingthis group we stood to the south-east towards a vast clusterof islands : at noon, when we were just entering the cluster,the latitude was observed 36° 18' 21" north, and longitude126° 10' east. The south-west extreme of the islands boresouth 40° west. There were eight islands near us betweensouth-east and south-west, and a high bluff dark rock southone-quarter east, four miles: and on the main land a veryhigh hill, east 19° north. When we had got well amongthe islands it fell calm, and we anchored in eight and a halffathoms. It remained calm during the night.4th of September.—Weighed on a breeze springing up,and stood in shore. Observed in 36° 13' north, longitude126° 30* east; at this time the following bearings weretaken.A remarkable peak 011 the main land, east.High mountain on the main land, east 381° north.White cliff on the east end of the fourth island to theleft of the wide entrance into the cluster, north.APPENDIX. XlllSmall round island, north 30° west.Another, north 35° west.Extremes of a large bluff island from north 38° west, tonorth 32 5° west.Rock, north 72° west.Outer island, north 75° west.Extremes of the outer cluster, from north 77J west, towest 1° south.Large island, from west 14° 30' south, to west 18° south.These islands being within from ten to fifteen miles,were laid down by estimated distances, but it was quite impossible to assign places to the immense number of otherswhich stretched away to the south and south-east, asfar as the eye could reach. We stood in shore for the purpose of discovering whether there was any place of shelterin the main land, but in general it proved shallow andunsafe. At length we discovered a bay which promised Basil's Bay.shelter, but on running into it, the depth was found not toexceed three or four fathoms. This bay is open towardsthe south, and is formed by a curved tongue of land on thenorth and west. The longitude of the south end of thispoint is 126° 42' 22" east, and latitude 36° 7' 38" north.We remained here during the night, and the forenoon of.the 5th. The natives came on board, but made great ob- unsocial du-7 e position of thejections to our landing. inhabitants.The tide rose and fell fifteen feet and a half; it was lowwater at 8 P. M., and high water at 2. 30 A. M. This wastwo and a half days before full moon.The Alceste's boats were sent to sound in the easternquarter, but they found shoal water every where.

xiy APPENDIX.Proceed to the 5th of September.—At 11 A. M. we got under weighsouth-westward. 111 iand stood to the south-west among the islands, carryingseven, eight, nine, ten, to fifteen fathoms, and occasionallydeepening to seventeen fathoms. At 4. 45 we observed inlongitude 126° 24i' east, and latitude 35° 52' north at thistime.Bearings. TWO islands bore north half east, seven miles.A remarkable small black island, west 32°, north fourmiles.Another, west 22° north, seven miles.A range of islands, from east 10° north, to east 16° south.A long island, from south 25° east, to south 11° east.The islands off which we anchored on trie 2nd instantbearing about north 10° west.Two islands, from south 16° west, to south 25° west.Main land. rf\ie main land from south south-east to north-east, highand rugged. /We had a sea brefeze to-day, and fine weather. Variation 2° 10' westerly. We ran on by moonlight till IIP. M.,and then anchored among the islands. Latitude, observedby Polaris 35° 26' north. Longitude, at anchor by chronometer next morning 126° 23' 22" east. From this spotthe main land was seen from east 12° north, to south 20°east.Bearings. A rock, west 7° south, four miles.An island, from west 15° north, to west 31° north, 4i'.Three islands, extending from west 36° south, to west45° south, 3'.Two distant ones in the same direction.Cluster of islands, from west 64° south, to west 84i° south.APPENDIX. xvLarge island, north 12° west, ten or twelve miles.A cluster of islands, from north 15° east, to north 28°east.Two distant islands, north 32° east.Two others, north 42° east.6th of September.—Weighed and stood to the southward. At noon observed in 35 17' north, longitude 126° 28£east, being then in the centre of a semicircle of islands,extending from north-east to south-east and south-west.During the forenoon the flood tide set strong to the northnorth-east against us. Most of the channels between the channels be-0 tweentheislandsislands were deep, but to-day we tried one which had not ecnera% deepmorethan five and a half fathoms. At 4. 30. took sights,when a long bluff island bore east north-east a quarter of amile. Longitude 126° 6' 37" east; latitude 35° tf north.This island is the most westerly of the range of islandswhich lie between the latitude 35° and 36° north. High andconnected land was faintly discernible to the eastward.The soundings were generally from nine to fifteen fathoms, deepening in most cases on approaching the bluffislands.7th of September.—We anchored last night about ten Rood tide nms0 to the north-O'clock in seventeen fathoms; the flood tide had made; it wardrannorth nearly three miles an hour, till four A. M. whenwe got under weigh, and drifted fast to the southward withthe ebb. At 9- 30. got sights, which gave longitude125° 52' 45" east, latitude 34° 42' north; at this time a veryremarkable hill on an island bore east 8° south; it has the Windsorcastie.appearance of a turret or large chimney. The other bearingsfrom this spot were—iI

xviBearings.soundings.compass.Bearings.APPENDIX.Western extreme of a large island stretching west northwest, and east south-east; north 27% east 4 or 5'.Round rock, north 18° east, 8'.Cluster of islands from north 50° west, to north 74° west.Round bluff small island, west 9° south.Large island, west 429 south, 7 or eight leagues.. Two small distant islands, west 53° south, 10' leagues.Small island, south 11° east.Extreme of distant land, south 37° east: besides, asusual, innumerable distant islands. The flood tide madeagainst us between ten and eleven. The soundings thismorning have been from twenty-three to nineteen fathoms.The weather extremely hot and the water smooth. Theebb made about four, and there being no wind, it carried usrapidly towards some rocks joining two islands. We anchored in twenty-one fathoms. The variation of the compass21° westerly. The bearings at anchor this evening were asfollows:Small island, south 3° 22' east.Large island, from south to south 20s0 east.A small island, south 22° east.Another, south 285" east.High bluff island, south 31° east.Island from south 9° east, to south 18° west.Sharp peaked rock, south 25° 40' west.Island from south 63° west, to south 65° west.Distant island, from south 631° west, to south 66° west,nine or ten leagues.Distant small island, west 1° 10' north, seven or eightleagues.APPENDIX. x-vnDistant island, from west 6° 39' north, to west 9° north, Bearings.formed of one large flat space and five hummocks, eight ornipe leagues.Island, west 28° 50' north.Large island, from west 31" north, to west 38° 19' north.Round bluff island, off which we observed at noonto-day, west 39° 52' north.Distant small island, west 44°28'north, four or five leagues.Large island, from west 71° north, to west 81° 30' north.An island, afterwards called Thistle Island, south 79°east, to east 14° 52 north, besides numberless islands, inthick clusters, extending as far as the eye could reach, in thenorth-east and east quarters. In the afternoon a boat wentinside Thistle Island, and reported that there was a clearanchorage.8th of September.—At noon we weighed and sailed round saa into MOTthenorth end of Thistle Island, carrying seventeen fathoms,till the north end bore south; we then shoaled to ten andeleven, and one cast nine fathoms. On rounding the islandwe steered south, and anchored in eleven fathoms, softbottom, about four hundred yards from the middle part ofthe island. The islands at this place are so situated as toform a capacious and secure anchorage, with passagesamong the islands in all directions. The latitude observed Latitude observedon shore.with an artificial horizon on shore, was 34° 22' 39" north; longitude by mean of two chronometers, agreeing nearly, Longitude.126° 2' 52" east. The tides run at the springs at the rate of Tides.three and four knots, the flood to the north north-east; therise and fall is fifteen feet. Strong eddies are felt amongthe islands. The variation of the compass is 2° 30' westerly, variation of thecompass.

XVJ11Appearance ofthe AmherstIsles, from thetop of a peakedisland.Difficulty of estimating thenumber ofislands on thiscoast.Winds andweather.Barometer andthermometer.APPENDIX.On the 9th of September Captain Maxwell and a partywent to the summit of a high peak, on an island to thesouth-east of the ships, in latitude 34° 20' north, and longitude 126° 6' east. From this spot, elevated about sevenor eight hundred feet above the sea, the view of the islandswas very striking: we endeavoured to number them, butour accounts varied, owing to the difficulty of estimatingthe number in the distant groups; it will serve, however, togive some idea of this splendid scene, to say that the lowestenumeration gave one hundred and twenty islands.Many of these islands are large and high, almost all arecultivated, and their forms present an endless diversity.High land was seen to rise above the distant islands inthe east and north-east; this probably was the main land ofCorea, for it seemed more extensive and connected thanany group of islands we had seen.We had now ran along upwards of two hundred miles ofthis coast, and at every part which we approached, theislands were no less thickly sown than here; so that ourattempts to enumerate them all, or even to assign places onthe chart to those which we passed the nearest to, becameafter a time quite hopeless.During our stay upon the coast of Corea, between the1st and 10th of September, the winds were principallyfrom the northward; the weather was moderate and clear;and occasionally calm during the heat of the day.The barometer rose and fell gradually between 29- 78-and 29. 98. The thermometer was never above 82°, andnever, even at night, under 72°. For further details respecting the winds and weather, see the Meteorological Journal-I"-

NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE GENERAL CHARTOFTHE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND,AND THECHARTS OF NAPAKIANG, AND PORT MELVILLE.GREATLOOCHOOTHIS island is called Loo-choo, and sometimes Doo-choo, Different names. ., ,. T ., . -, ... , . ofthisisland.by the natives. In our maps it is variously written, butmostly Lekayo: the Chinese know it by the name of Lowkow.The spelling used by Mr. Horsburgh in his directions,Lieou-kieou, or Lieu-chew.The island lies between 26° 4^' and 26° 52i', north, and Geographicallimits and gebetween127° 34' and 128° 18' east, being very nearly sixty ""^aspect.miles long in a north-east direction, and preserving a tolerablyuniform breadth of about ten or twelve miles. The northend is high and bold, with wood on the top of the hills.The north-east coast is also abrupt, but quite barren. Thesouth-east side is low, with very little appearance of cultivation. The south, south-west, and western faces, particularly the two former, are of moderate height, and presenta scene of great fertility and high cultivation : it is to thisquarter that the mass of population have resorted. Thenorth-west side is generally rugged and bare.There are two deep indentures, one on each side of the Deep bay.island; that on the west has at least one hundred fathoms_ ___T——T- ' '-^-

XXAPPENDIX.411Barrow's Bay.General cautionrespecting coralreefs.Sugar Loaf orEegooshcoond.Two safe anchoring places.Geographicalposition ofNapakiang.depth, and appears to have no coral in it: while the easternbight is extremely shallow, and is not only skirted by abroad fringe of coral, but has reefs in the centre; and theselast are very dangerous, for they give no warning either bybreakers or discoloration of the water, or by soundings:and this remark will apply generally to all the reefs roundthis island, rendering the navigation, particularly at night,very dangerous.The most remarkable headland is the island calledby Captain Broughton the Sugar Loaf, and by the natives Eegooshcoond (tower or castle); it can be seendistinctly at the distance of twenty-five miles when the eyeis elevated only fifteen feet. It is a high conical mountain,varying very little in its aspect when viewed from differentquarters: as there is no other peak like it on or near thisisland, it cannot be mistaken. The latitude of the peak is26° 43' north; and I have reason to believe that this iswithin one mile of the truth. Its longitude is 127° 44', or6' east of the observatory at Napakiang, by two chronometers. The base of the cone and one-third of the way upis covered with houses; and the whole island has theappearance of a garden. When nearly on the meridian otthe Sugar Loaf its top seems rounded off.There are two places where ships can ride in safety,Napakiang Roads on the south-Avest, and Port Melville onthe north-west side of the island. The first of these is theone in which his majesty's ships Alceste and Lyra lay forupwards of a month. By means of a base of 1319 feet ona coral reef, which dried at half ebb, we were enabled tomake the survey which accompanies this notice. The,1I:I

HIAPPENDIX. xxiThe test Passagelatitude of the observatory was determined to be 26° 13'34" north, the mean of three meridian altitudes of the sunby a sextant of Gary's, and five by a circle of Troughton's,the extreme difference being 20". The longitude is 127°38' east; this was ascertained by measuring the differenceof longitude between the observatory and Lintin Islandoff Canton river in a run of six days; on which occasiontwo chronometers on board the Lyra gave within one milethe same difference of longitude, viz. 13° 50', with that shewnby two others on board his majesty's ship Alceste; thelongitude of Lintin being 113° 48' east of Greenwich. Thelongitude, by lunar observations, is 127° 37' 28". The plan Plan ofof Napakiang roads will be found sufficient without manydirections for ships wishing to enter it. The principal danger Directions on1 ° " * * ° approachinglies in the outer reefs, which do not show when the weather NaPaMan&is very fine arid there is little swell; on such occasions aboat ought to go a-head at least a quarter of a mile, andthe ship should put about instantly upon approaching thereefs, which are every where bold. A ship coming from Reef island.the westward ought to steer between the north-eastern ofthe group of high islands to the south-westward, and a lowgreen island with extensive reefs to the northward, in latitude 26° 15' north. On passing which she should haulup east by south, giving Reef Island a birth of at least amile.On approaching the main land a conspicuous wooded Directions forr * ° _ _ entering Napapointwill be seen, having rocks on its summit like the ruins kians roadsofan abbey; this forms the south side of the anchorage,and is considerably more to the westward than the northeast side. The harbour of Napakiang will soon be seen atthe south side of the bay; steer directly in for this, giving,

xxn APPENDIX.Abbey Point a birth of half a mile, and when directly between the south end of the outer reefs and Abbey Pointcapstan Rock, haul up east by north. There is a very remarkable rock onthe south-east side of the anchorage resembling the headof a capstan. It would be safest to anchor when this bearsabout south-south-east half a mile at most, in order to avoida dangerous coral tongue, which lies north a little easterlyfrom it, three-quarters of a mile; but as this anchorage isexposed, the ship may proceed farther in as soon as theexact place of the reef has been ascertained by boats; andif she proposes staying any time, she may warp into Barnpool,taking the precaution of placing a boat on each sideof the entrance. There are two rivulets at this place, andBest anchorageoff the mouthsof two rivulets.The northernentrance.Not to be attempted by astranger.probably the best anchorage is off their mouths, the bottomconsisting of the mud brought down by the stream. Thereis a well on the eastern side supplied by a spring, and thereare landing places at the entrance of both harbours. Thereis a safe passage between the reef, on which the base wasmeasured, and the outer ones. The Lyra passed throughthis three times; and if the object is to go to the northwardit ought to be followed, provided the wind will admit ofsteering north and two points on each side of it. Theleading mark for going by this passage is Capstan Port orRock, on with a remarkable nose formed by the trees onthe highest distant land; these are on when they bearabout south by east half east. It would certainly not beadvisable for a stranger to enter by this passage, but hemay run on coming from the northward along the shore atthe distance of two or three miles till Reef Island bearswest, and then he should look sharply out for the reefs,keeping outside them till near Abbey Point, then act asAPPENDIX. xxnibefore directed. On running down towards Napakiang Appearance ofland in comingfrom the northward a remarkable bluff table land will be from the norttlwardtowardsseen to the southward of Abbey Point. The west face of NaP*iM>e-Abbey Point ought to be kept just on with the east end ofthe table land; this will take you further out than isabsolutely necessary; but it is safe; and when Reef Islandis just on with the northern of the group of distant islandsyou will be exactly off the north entrance.On coming from the southward the only danger that Dangerous cwai& J O reef about fourlies in the way is a coral reef even with the water's edge; itis of a circular form, and at low water several rocks shewon it On every occasion that we passed the sea broke highupon it; but from what we saw of other similar reefs, itseems very probable that when the water is smooth it willgive no warning: it is about eight miles west, 15° north ofthe extreme south point of the island, and lies in latitude26° 7' north, and longitude 127° 26' east of Greenwich.Port Melville is on the north-west side of the island. Port MeivA ship wishing to enter it ought to make the Sugar LoafPeak, and steer between it and the cluster of islands to thenorthward, directly for the bottom of the bight, which liesbetween the Sugar Loaf and the north end of the island;here Herbert's Island will be seen close to the shore, run intowards its western end, anchor when it bears east one-thirdof a mile, and the Sugar Loaf west one-quarter north, barely to anchor pre-U • • i i i • -11 us toenteringsnut m with a low dark green point or land ; here you will the harbour.have from seventeen to twenty fathoms.The entrance of the harbour is narrow, and ought not Boats should be° sent to buoy theto be attempted without previous examination by the boats channelofa ship wishing to enter it. With a very little trouble the

Ill'IXXIVAPPENDIX.Eye-draught ofPort Melville.passage might be buoyed: a large ship will probably findit expedient to warp in and out.The eye-draught, with the directions on itr rendermuch further notice here superfluous. The harbour issecure, and sufficiently capacious for a numerous fleet. Itextends in a north and south direction for about two miles,varying in breadth and form in a very remarkable manner;at the lower or north end there are two basons of a circularform, and have from nine to fifteen fathoms, soft bottom;these are about one-third of a mile across. At some placesthe steep rocks which form the banks approach within anhundred yards of one another; here the water is sixteen,eighteen, and twenty fathoms. There are many tine coves,some with shelving shores, and others steep-to. Every partof the harbour is secured from the sea, and many parts fromall winds: it is well calculated for the re-equipment of ships,for it is not only secure as an anchorage, but offers conveniences for landing men and stores, and also for heavingdown or careening a ship.There are several large villages on the shores of anextensive bay, communicating with the sea to the northeastward, at the upper or south end of the line of harbours,and one called Oonting on the west side of the lowerharbour; there is another of some extent, on the south sideof Herbert's Island, called Cooee.By permission of Captain Maxwell, I have named thisexcellent harbour, Port Melville, in honour of Lord ViscountMelville, First Lord of the Admiralty.From the top of a range of hills which we ascended,rising on the south side of the upper bay of Port Melville,[ PORT JME LVIL LEn witka.doubfe fop. yt,ft a With the outer of two rocky off" a. remarkable,t^bearitit/ SEbS.LYRAr/f>w.-Low Cultivated rangewhole of this bightfilled with reefi?.Dire c tionsThe tx>utw from the attcftorape ^before hauling up forth*. OfFife point forming the. SE #ideare two cotirpicuoi&f round. blft£ktheouterone niuftfo fee ftt on, with fAf tcpofa, distant double topped hill, on a JfJE&f bearing, till tfajfttrtouropenj. Then haulup about JSffTaruttfeer dose along the e&rtern. s-h0reirt f,f>, 5 antLf&fiith?, Thewefternsute and wbirth may be selectedatpleasure.tamf cultivatedto the SummitIt should be / ^marked thatihe distent htyhJJountaui taken as o?ieof the leading marfo if not the highest, but sccor&highejof the range.

APPENDIX. xxvwe could see the south-west corner of the great westernbay, the whole range of Port Melville, and the coastsadjacent.The latitude of Herbert's Island, which lies directly off Geographicalposition of Portthe entrance of Port Melville, is 26° 42-1-' north, by meridian Melvillealtitudeof the sun observed on shore. Its longitude, whichis also the longitude of Port Melville, is 127° 55' east, or 17'east of Napakiang observatory. The Sugar Loaf bears fromthe centre of the island, west 4sc north, about ten miles.As the whole part of this coast is skirted by dangerous cwst skirtedr • J & by coral reefs.coral reefs, the greatest attention should be paid to the lead,and the ship ought to be put about the instant that the watershoals to eight, seven, or six fathoms. On running in forthe west end of Herbert's Island, on the morning of the llthof October, we passed over a coral ledge having nine fathomson it. The west point of Herbert's Island bore at this timesouth 8° 40'west, distant four or five miles. Before and afterpassing this we had from thirty to sixty fathoms; whether itwas shoaler than nine fathoms at any place, was not ascertained, but the circumstance is deserving of notice, andought to teach the necessity of constant vigilance, whennear coral reefs.The cluster of islands to the northward of Port Melville Montgomeryislands.lies between 26° 54' and 27° 41' north, the north end of thenorthern one being in longitude 127° 57' east, or 19, east ofthe observatory. It does not appear that there is anygood anchorage about them ; and there are dangerous reefsoff the south and south-western ones.The north end of the Great Loo-choo lies in 26° 52¥ Hope Point.north, and this is probably within one, or at most two milesd111

XXVIAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.XXVHof the truth. We observed in 27° 00' 15" north, at which timethe northern extreme bore east 59° south, nine miles byestimation, an inference which was checked by the distancerun on a direct course afterwards. The longitude is 128° 9'east, or 31'east of the observatory.The coast from the north point runs south-east by east,with some minor deviations, nearly four leagues: great painswere taken to ascertain this precisely,as the former charts notonly place it many miles further north, but make the coastat this end lie east and west. The north-east point lies in26° 47' north, and longitude 128° 18' east, or 40' east of theobservatory. The latitude was determined by the meridianaltitude of Sirius and an altitude of Polaris, so near daylightthat the horizon was well defined; but as this point, offwhich there is a small island, was some miles north of theship at the time of observation, the above latitude may errpossibly two miles. It was intended to have examined twoislands which lie to the north-eastward of the north point,but a strong current in the night carried us so far to leeward,that we could not effect this object; the situation, therefore,of these two islands, may perhaps not be accurately laiddown in the chart.The deep indenture about the middle of the east sideof the island is unsafe to enter during the north-east monsoon : as the wind, however, had westing in it, we sailed up towithin three or four miles of the top, carrying from thirtyto twenty fathoms water; but when about to haul in for thenorth side, where there appeared to be a bay, we shoaledsuddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms: the helm wasinstantly put down, and when head to wind, we had onlyfive fathoms. While in stays the water was observed towash on a rock not a hundred yards to leeward of us, onwhich we must infallibly have struck, had we bore upinstead of tacking.From the north-east to the south-east point, the coast south-east coastdangerous.runs south 40° west; the shore to the north-east of this deepbight is bold, and seems clear; that on the south-west sideof it presents a formidable barrier of islands and coral reefs,which break to a great distance: in fine weather this partof the coast ought to be approached very cautiously.The southern extreme of this island lies in latitude south Pokt.26° 4' 46" north, determined with great care by the meridianaltitude of the sun on shore; and in longitude 127° 35' east,or 3' west of the observatory. There is good anchoragefrom twenty to thirty fathoms, south a little easterly, of thispoint. Between this point and the group of islands to the Reetwestward, there is a dangerous reef, already spoken of; it liesin 26° 7' north, and 127° 26' east; it bears 26' west, 15° northfrom the south point of the island, distant eight miles. Immediately round the point on the west side, there is a shallowharbour, formed by coral reefs, but the entrance is narrowand intricate.We stood over to the largest of the south-west group, on south-westerngroup.the east side of which there stands out a conical rock,behind which it was thought that a harbour might lie, butupon examination, it proved only fit for boats; it lies in26° 11' north.Reef Island lies west by north, about two leagues from Reef Maud.Napakiang Roads; on the north side the reefs stretch agreat way, but the south is more clear...I* !('

xxvmAPPENDIX.Tides.Variation of thecompass.Between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf there is noplace for ships to lie in safety; the bay immediately to thenorth was examined by Mr. Mayne, master of his Majesty'sship Alceste, when two shallow harbours were found.The flood runs to the northward and eastward, alongshore, and the ebb in an opposite direction. The rise andfall is about nine feet perpendicular. High water at full andchange IX.The variation of the compass, determined with greatprecision by the transit azimuth instrument, was 52'westerly.The longitude of the Lyra's observatory at Napakiangby the mean of thirty-six lunar observations on both sidesof the moon, is 127° 37' 28" east; by four chronometers,agreeing nearly, 127° 38' 30" east. The latitude is 26° 13' 39"north.OBSERVATIONSNAPAKIANG OBSERVATORY, GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.0 dLunars with a Sextant.O West of d26th October, 1816.0 d25th September, 1816.127° . 38' 15" East.35 1536 1534 4533 0036 0030 4528 3032 1531 30 127° . 33' .127 . 38 3039 4541 304,4, IKTtrU J.*J44 3032 1533 0031 4531 1527 30 127°. 36'.Lunars with a Sextant.* a, Arietis, East of D4th October, 1816.* D 127° . 31' 00" East.00003030454515304530151545374352543852505039" Mean 4140344339Mean by sextant 127 . 43 . 20 * East of DLunars by Circle.© West of ([' . ———— ,4th October, 1816.© fl 127° . 38' . 45"16" Mean 32 . 30'! iMean by sextant 127 . 34 .58 © W. (L Mean 127 . 35 . 37 by circleMean by sextant Q *west D 127° , 34' . 58"East (L 127 . 43 . 20Mean longitude by sextantby circleO * D 127 . 39 . 90 *

xxx APPENDIX.LATITUDE OF NAPAKIANG.By Meridian Altitudes of the Sun and Altitudes taken near Noon.By meridian altitudes observed. By meridian altitudes deduced in theusual way from sights taken near noon.1816.1816.Sextant.17th Oct. 26°. 13'. 43"• M'| 26°. 13'. 30" circle.20th Oct. 26 . 13 . 1420th Oct.~ .13 .46)A. M.26 .13 .44j ssextf26 . 13 . 58")Circle.26th Oct. 26 .13 .29 20th Oct. . P. M.4 26 . 13 . 47 Vsext.(_ 26 .13 . 57 J22dmean2A.M.&2P.M.26 .13 . 2426th 3P.M. 26 .13 . 29circle.Latitude by mean of 3 meridian altitudes 26° . 13'. 39" sextant and circle,mean of 5 altitudes near noon 26 . 13 . 50 sextant,mean of 3 do. do. 26 . 13 . 28 circle.Mean latitude . 13 . 39 north.VARIATION OF THE COMPASS AT NAPAKIANG.The declination of the magnetic meridian was ascertained with considerableprecision by means of the transit azimuth instrument: the needle seldom showedthe same variation, as it oscillated about ten minutes, but the mean position ofthe magnetic meridian was 52' 10" west of the true. A coral reef was selectedfor the place of these observations, in order to avoid the attraction arising frombuildings, or from inequalities in the ground.TABLE OF OBSERVATIONSMADE WITHDR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR:WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTRUMENT,AND DIRECTIONS FOR ITS USE.Variation observed on board by Walker's Azimuth Compass.29th Sept 1816, P. M. ship's head W. by S. variation by1st azimuth - 0°2nd 03rd 1 .30thAmplitude - 1 .A. M. - 1st azimuth - 0 ,2nd - - 03d Oct. A. M. ship's head E. N. E. 1st azimuth - 02nd - 0 .51'5317155534374830" west.30300030150000Variation by mean of 7 azimuths and 1 amplitude - 0 . 52 . 39 west.

•If„]EXPLANATION OF THE DIP SECTOR,Kg.J.REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH IT IN HISMAJESTY'S SLOOP LYRA.IIN our tables for apparent dip of the visible horizon atdifferent heights from the sea, as calculated from the knowncurvature of the earth, allowance is made for the refractionof the atmosphere, on a supposition of its being constant,but as it is known to vary, the tabular dip will often be erroneous, and, consequently, altitudes taken under differentstates of the atmosphere, will exhibit different instead ofcorresponding results.It is foreign to the present purpose to shew what thecauses are which have most effect in raising or depressingthe apparent horizon. It may be sufficient to mention,that changes in the relative temperature of the air and thesea must produce changes in the refraction near the surface.Dr. Wollaston has published two papers in the PhilosophicalTransactions on this subject, in the volumes for 1800 and1803, and to these I beg to refer the reader for precise information upon this very curious subject.The object which this sector proposes to attain, is theactual admeasurement of the dip angle; that is, to ascertainhow much the visible horizon is depressed below the horizontal plane passing through the eye of the observer. TheNWbllaston'f Dip

xxxivAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.XXXVinstrument is so contrived as to measure double the dipangle twice over, so that we obtain four times the required *dip, and one quarter of this angle is what must be appliedto vertical angles, measured from that part of the horizonwhich has been observed.Figure I. is the instrument seen in perspective, andFig. II. is a plan of it with the telescope removed. Inorder to explain its use, let A and B (Fig. II.) represent thetwo reflecting glasses at right angles to the plane of theinstrument, and also nearly at right angles to each other.It is clear that when the plane of the instrument is heldvertically, an eye situated at E, and looking through theunsilvered part of the glass A at a distant point C, will atthe same time see by joint reflection from both glasses,another distant point D at 180° from C; and D will appearto correspond with C; if a suitable motion be given to theindex glass B by the tangent screw F.The instrument may now be supposed to measure thearc CZD. If the points C and D be each three minutesfarther from the zenith than 90% the entire angle will thenexceed 180° by double that quantity. The relative positiont)f the glasses then corresponds to 180° 6', and the sixminutes of excess would be shewn on the arc at F if therewere no index error. But, by reason of the index error,the real quantity will not be known till a similar observation has been made with the instrument in an oppositedirection.If the instrument be now inverted, so that the unsilvered glass is uppermost, the arc intended to be measuredCND, or the sum of the distances of the points C and Disfrom the Nadir instead of the Zenith, which of course fallsshort of 180° by as much as the former arc exceeded thatquantity.The difference of the two arcs is consequently twelveminutes, and if the index be now moved till the objectsC and D appear to correspond, the amount of this doubledifference will be shewn by the change of position of thevernier.Hence it is evidently unnecessary that the index errorshould be previously known, and even preferable that itsamount, should be such as to avoid the needless introductionof negative quantities by positions on different sides ofzero.In the preceding description, it is supposed that the eyeis looking directly through the unsilvered glass at thehorizon, and that it also perceives the opposite horizonafter two reflections; but an inspection of the figure willshew that the observer's head would necessarily interceptthe rays from the horizon behind him. To obviate this,both the direct and the reflected rays are received in comingfrom the unsilvered glass, (and after passing through thefield-glass of the telescope) on a mirror placed at an angle of45°, which reflects them to the eye. By this ingenious contrivance, the obstruction is removed, and the opposite pointsof the horizon may be both seen at one moment.In practice, it is most convenient to direct the telescopeto the same part of the horizon in both cases. Thus, if theeast and west parts of the horizon be observed, and that theindex glass be uppermost, and telescope pointing to thewest, the observer is on the south side, and his face must^r

xxxviAPPENDIX.be turned to the north. When the instrument is inverted,if the observer turn himself round at the same time, so asto face the south, then the telescope will be pointed asbefore to the west; but since the index glass is now undermost, the inferior arc will now be measured precisely as ifhis face were to the north, but with the advantage of thesame lights seen in the erect position of the instrument.In using this instrument at sea for the first time, considerable difficulty arises from the constant change in theplane of the instrument from the perpendicular position, inwhich it is absolutely necessary that it should be held, inorder to obtain a correct observation. What at first appearsto be a defect, however, is a real advantage, namely, thatwhenever it is held in the least degree out of the verticalplane, the two horizons (that seen direct, and the reflectedone) cross each other, and it is only when the plane is vertical that the horizons can appear parallel., The object is to get the two horizons to coincide exactly,and for this purpose it will often be necessary to have themof different shades. This is managed, as in the sextant, bymeans of the screw, which raises or lowers the telescope.When the telescope is brought nearer to the plane of theinstrument, the reflected horizon becomes dark and distinct,but when screwed off it becomes fainter, and is not so welldefined. Practice alone can teach the degree of intensitywhich is most favourable. In general it is best to have onehorizon dark, and the other light; then bring them verynearly to coincide, and wait till the ship is steady, at whichmoment a slight touch of the tangent screw brings themexactly to cover one another. It will happen, of course,APPENDIX.xxxvnthat Avhen the coincidence is perfect, there is only one horizon to be seen, and a doubt remains whether all is right,but a slight motion of the instrument, by making thehorizons cross each other, defines them at once.It is advisable to take several observations, and thesafest way is to take one first with the index glass uppermost, and then with the instrument inverted, after which toreturn to the first, and so on for two or three times eachway.In the pages which follow, there is given a table containing the result of all the observations made during thisvoyage, preceded by several sets of observations in thefullest detail. From the table it will be observed howseldom the dip, actually measured, agrees with that inferredfrom the mean refraction. Some of these experiments shewvery remarkable differences, and point out the great utilityof this instrument.The practical navigator, particularly if he has been inhot climates, will recollect how discordant his observationsfor latitude always Avere, and how few even of the best observers agree in their determination of the latitude of thesame place, simple as the observation is thought to be.The cause is quite clear; and though it equally affects altitudes taken for absolute time, the disagreement is lessobvious, and it will often happen that a chronometer goingextremely Avell appears to vary every day from inaccuracyin the observations. Thus it is, I think, generally admitted,that it is almost impossible to rate a chronometer from altitudes observed Avith the sea horizon. Nor is this difficultyremoved by taking equal altitudes, because the refractionlr.1W I

XXXV111 APPENDIX.in all probability will be different at the two observations.With an artificial horizon, indeed, the changes in refractionare not felt, because, at a considerable elevation above thehorizon, the changes are very trifling. But it often happensin practice, that the artificial horizon cannot be used, andwe are then reduced to the sea horizon, where the changesof refraction are always the greatest. In the Yellow Sea,for instance, we had no opportunity of landing during allthe time that the squadron was at anchor, till the day beforewe sailed. So that during nearly a fortnight that the shipswere at anchor, the sea horizon was necessarily used. Ineed only to refer to the observations taken off' the Pei-ho,viz. from No. 37 to 62, to shew how extremely fallaciousthe results must have been.It is much to be wished that this excellent instrumentshould be brought into general use in navigation.APPENDIX. xxxixTHE FOLLOWING EIGHT OBSERVATIONS ARE SET DOWNIN THE FULLEST DETAIL, IN ORDER TO SHEW THEMETHOD USED IN RECORDING THEM.Index uppermostA + 8'. 10"8.058.00No. 31.YELLOW SEA.July 9®, 1816.—6 P. M.Instrument inverted.B-7MO"7.107-10Mean 8 . 05 Mean 7 . 10 B.Mean + 8 . 05 A.15.153 . 49 Dip.3 . 50 Tabular.1 Difference.Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.Parts of the horizon observed, WSW. and ENE.BarometerThermometerLatitude -Longitude29 . 78 inches35° north.124° east.Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky clear,and sea perfectly smooth.II„'

xlAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.xliMean 8 . 32No. 40.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.J%29,1816.—9A.M.Index uppermost.Instrument inverted.A+ 8'. 20"B - 11' 40"8. 4511 .358.3011 .50Mean 11 . 42 B.Mean + 8 . 32 A.4) 20 . 145 . 3 Dip.3 . 50 Tabular.1 . 13 Difference -f-Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.Parts of the horizon observed, NW. and SE.The low land just visible in the NW. distant 12 or 14 miles.Depth of the sea, 18 feet.Barometer - 29 . 60 inches.ThermometerLatitude -Longitude38° . 50' north.- 118° . 00' eastThere has been little wind this morning, after a very close night*No. 43.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.August 6,1816.—1 P.M.Index uppermost.Instrument inverted.*" B-ll'.55"11 . 4511 . 45Mean 50 Mean 11 . 48 B.Mean+ 7 . 50 A.4) 19 . 384.54 Dip.3 . 53 Tabular.1 . 1 DifferenceIHeight of the eye, 15 feet, 6 inches. .Parts of the horizon observed, S W. by S. and NE. by N.Depth of the sea, 29 feet.Barometer - 29. 64 inches.ThermometerLatitudeLongitudeSea 81 J°- 38° . 50' north.- 118° . 00' east.Moderate breeze from SE. by S.; rather hazy, but the horizon sharp and distinct.Index uppermost.A + 10'. 20"10.1810.35No. 50.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.August 8, 1816.—6. 15. A. M.Instrument inverted.B- 12'. 50"12. 4513.00Mean 10 . 24, 3 Mean 12 . 51.7 B.Mean + 10 . 24.3 A.4) 23. 165. 49 Dip.3 . 50 Tabular.1. 59 Difference +Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.Parts of the horizon observed, NNE. and SSW. clear of the land.Depth of the sea, 26 feet.Barometer - 29.65 inches.Thermometer {^ ®*Wind NNW. moderate.Latitude - - 38°. 50' north.Longitude - 118° . 00' east.Mem.-—The top of the fort at the mouth of the river, is just visible at 30feet from the surface of the water.

xlii APPENDIX.Index uppermost.A + 13'. 55"13.5013.45Mean 13 .50No. 53.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.August 10,1816.—6. 10. A.M.Instrument inverted.B-7'.30"7.157.25Mean 7 . 23.3 B.Mean + 13 . 50 A.4) 21 . 13.35 . 18.3 Dip.2 . 20 Tabular. •2 . 58 Difference +Height of the eye, 5 feet, 6 inches.Depth of the water, 5 feet.Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W. just clear of the land.Barometer - 29-69 inches. 1 On board His Majesty's„„Thermometer-Air 75° >• ship Lyra, distant threeSea 77° j or four miles. __Wind WNW.About one mile from the fort of Tung-coo, at the entrance of the Pei-ho river.Note.—Instrument re-adjusted.Index uppermost.A+ 15'-40"15.3015 . 35Mean 15.35No. 58.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.August 10, 1816.—2 P.M.Instrument inverted.B-8'. 50"8.508.50Mean 8 . 50 B.Mean + 15 . 35 A.4) 24 . 256. 6.3 Dip.3. 50 Tabular.2. 16 Difference +Index uppermost.A+ 15'. 20"15.1015 .10APPENDIX.Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W.Depth of the sea, 27 feet.Barometer - 29 . 68 indies.Thermometer}^ 84°LatitudeLongitude- 38° . 50' north.- 118°. 00'east.No. 59.OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.August 10,1816.—2. 15. P.M.Instrument inverted.B-7'.50"8.108.05Mean 15.13-3 Mean 8 • 01-7 B.Mean + 15 • 13-3 A.4) 23 .155 - 48-7 Dip.3.50 Tabular.1 . 59 Difference.Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.Parts of the horizon observed, NW. by N. and SE. by S.Depth of the water, 27 feet.Barometer - 29 . 68 indies.nM 4. fAir 84°ThermometerLatitude -Longitude- 38° . 50' north.- 118° . 00' east.The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under them;this is very considerable, some having about a third of the sail, others only thehull.\ Y

APPENDIX. xlv! Ixliv APPENDIX.Index uppermost.A + 6'. 85"6.356.40Mean 6 • 36'7No. 110.OFF THE CAPE.July 28,1817.—2. SO. P. M.Instrument inverted,B-5'.OO"4.555.00Mean 4 . 58'S B.Mean + 6 . 86'7 A.4) 11 . 352 • 53-7 Dip.8 • 49 Tabular.55 DifferenceHeight of the eye, 15 feet.Parts of the horizon observed, SE. and NW.t Air 64°Thermometer { gea 5QODepth of the sea, 222 feetLatitude - 34°. 57' south.Longitude 20° . 15' east.Cape Lagullus due north, distant 6 or 8 miles.Calm all day; sky clear, and weather hazy.On the 29th and 80th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather was sobad as to prevent any sights being taken.»-•—9SO1BS324Sir»»Willaait86«86_— -•—Date.1816.Jure 16.Jane 16.June 16.June 16.June S7.Juue 28.July 3.July 6.July 7.JulyS.July 16.July 21.July 23.July 23.July S3.July 27.July 27.July 28.July 28.[eightofeye.f. i15 315 314 0141616161615 314 615 315 315 315 315 315 31315 315 3Obs.Dip./ n4 35.04 33.03 594 014 21.04 22.24 08.23 534 33 493 273 443 493 493 444 023 354 21406Tab./ /'3 503 503 413 413 563 563 563 563 503 453 503 503 503 503 503 503 333 503 50Differ.+//454318202526121341223116-II3236116Therm.Sea08383J84J83848484j848584j7977477777776768383Air.082*82sh.f85)sh.}9SOB-8182828183|8582797682828276768484Differ.+*i*2223*\2iii-455511Bare.29.8629.8629.8329.8529.8129.8029.7729.7529.7929.7229.7529.7829.7829.7829.7829.7029.7029.6229.62Lat.0 '5 11 S5 05 S5 05 S5 05 S6 49 N8 0013 2920 0021 1124 373435353538 5538 5538 503850Long.Jvast.106 3106 10106 10108 10107 -19108 10112 59114114118 56124124124124118 50118 50118 00118 00~o •Pfeet60£6485727072782020Remarks.Weatber hazy. The low landof Sumatra just visible. The landwind has been blowing gently forabout four hours.East and west parts of the ho*rizon observed Coast of Sumatrajust visible. Hazy. Tile landwinddying away.The day has been extremelyhot, and almost a calm. The seabreezenot yet set in, only a fewlight flaws.A fresh breeze from WNW.The sun set in fiery dirty redclouds. Weather squally, withoccasional showers of rain. Parisof the horizon observed east andwest.Weather remarkably fine; skyclear ; and a gentle breeze fromthe souih. The sun set aboutfive minutes after these observations were taken. Parts of thehorizon observed east and west.The forenoon has been extremely hot and oppressive. Arolling swell from the SW.Parts of the horizon observedSSW andNNE, the first clear toseaward, the other clear horizon,but the maiuland of China behindit, and various islands on eachside of the NNE line.Very hazy weather : sky fiery.Clear weather, with a lightbreeze from the eastward. Sunset behind a low range of darkclouds : sky in that quarter wasunusually red. A long swellfrom the nonhward.Wind light from south ; horizon uncommonly well defined andsharp; sky clear; and the seaperfectly smooth. These sights,and the two following, may bedepended on, I think, within tenseconds.Circumstances similar to No.31Ṗarts of the horizon observedwere that immediately under thesetting sun ; viz. W 31* N, andthe opposite E 21° S, the sunbeing about 4° high. Day hasbeen remarkably clear, althoughthe wind has beenfrom the southward, which in these seas is saidgenerally to bring fogs.Weatbersomewhathazy; windeasterly.Wind easterly.These sights were taken whileat anchor uff the mouth of thePei-ho. The fort of Tung-coo,on the -south bank of the river,bearing W 50° N, distant aboutfour or five miles.kl

dvi APPENDIX. APPENDIX. xlviit"0.394041424344454647484950515253'545556Date.1816.July 28.~,^July 29.July 29.'Aug. 6.Aug. 6.Aug. 6.Aug. 6.Aug. 6.Aug. 6.Aug. 6.•Aug! 8.Aug. 8.Aug. 8.Aug. 9.Aug. 10.Ang. 10.Aug. 10Aug. 10eightofeye.f. i.15 315 315 315 315 615 315 33 9615 315 315 315 315 35 65 65 65 fObs., //3 465 3Dip.00.';5 194 544 474 592 393 26459.25 475 495 474 30.45 18.34 28.4 73 55Tab./ n3 503 503 5 >3 503 533 503 501 542 253 503 503 503 503 502 20

xlviii APPENDIX.APPENDIX. xlixNo.82838485868788899091929394(«)94(b )Date.1816.Aug. 21.Aug. 21.Aug. 22.Sept. 4.Sept. 4.Sept. 5.Sept. 7.Sept. 7.1817.March 3.March 5.March 5.March 5.March 8.March 8.K eight Dip.of -eye. Obs. Tab.f. i.1415 31612121515 315 31414 814814 814 814 8r n3 263 293 523 463 423 473 333 273 574 494504534 334 58i n t3 413 413 563 253 253 493 413 413 413 463 463 463 463 46Differ.+ —n n152117161 SI 4I 7471 121242£Therm.Sea. ii.ir.7C76758181797414I 7482838384840757576838380808084j858584Differ.+11182i i£221662f22Bart).t29.74297429.8029.8629.8629.80298429.8429.7429.7329.7329.8629 8(Lat.North.•0 t36 1036 835 4034 3234 222 183 405 12T:Long, jEast. JJ» '126 BO126 3512C 17126 34126 34102 20100 35100 141|3 .£feet.565616512C12(• Remarks.~~~~~~~1This and the following ,,.„observed towards sunset- $ *exbibrt a considerable degree ,refraction above what is mnjThe sights on this morning inZsame place gave upwards of 1greater dip. 'All other circumstances thesame as in No. 82.Fresh breeze from SE, with .remarkably clear sky. The horizon uncommonly sharp.Wind moderate from WNWClear weather.All other circumstances thesame as in No. 85. Parts of thehorizon observed SSWand NNE.Parts of the horizon observe*WNW and ESE.The morning has been exceedingly hot before the breezes Min from sea at 11 A.M.All other circumstances thesame as in No. 88.After a very hot day.Parts of the horizon observedESE and WNW. See furtherremarks under 93. InstruDMOtreadjusted.Parts of the horizon observedNEandSW. All othercirenBstancesas in No. 91.Parts of the horizon observedSSE and NNW. These lineobservations (Nos. 91, 98, tnd93) were made under the oatfavourable circumstances, tnimay be considered as shewnjthe accuracy which the instnmentiscapable of attaining. Thesea was so perfectly smooth, thUnot the slightest motion could bedetected. Thehorizon-alaUttaparts observed was sharp, u»better denned than I recollectto have seen it ; and, whatun*often the case, the opposite J«were alike in strength of hri".&c. The day has been hoM*not close, with a light! brte«from the Southward Hie was calm, i *"" , ggtwere taken with 6«=at d»ro&^SE.No.-*-~9596979899100101102103104105Date.1817.March 19.March 19.March 20.March 21.March 22.March 23.March 24.July 22.July 24.July 25.July 26.Heightofeye.f. i.14 814 814 814 814 814 814 815151515Obs.r a3 5 13 483 483 483 393 473 533 363 163 363 30Dip.Tab./ n3 463 463 463 463 46"13 463 463 493 493 493 49Difier.+t n522217-II713331319Therm.Sea. Air.O808079|807978j787159625808282828279J798072626360Difier.+ -222f2if21312Baro.298429.7829.8329.8-129.8429.8029.78"Lat.North.0 '13 3014 3015 0016 0017 0017 30South.34 034 2535 S35 SLong.East.0 /89 8089 1589 0088 3088 0088 152624 £623 4.0231 ao .5feet400372402462Remarks.The wind steady and moderateatNE; atmosphere clear; horizon well defined; a long swellfromSW. This swell, which wasnot high, produced an obviouseffect on the dip angle, as observed, the two horizons alternately separating and overlapping;this change was however so slightthat I have not been able to measure it.All other circumstances as inNo. 95. Parts of the horizonobserved NE and SW.During the night there hasbeen a light breeze from East; atthis moment it is freshening up alittle. The atmosphere is clear ;horizon sharp ; a long low swellfrom SW, as yesterday.It has been calm, or nearly so,during the night; occasionally alight ah- from SE and S. Allcircumstances favourable.During the night there hasbeen a light wind from SW. Theweather is more hazy than whenthe wmd was from the Eastward,and the horizon not so distinctlymarked ; but the above sights aregood. There is still a swell fromriW, which causes some little uncertainty as to the exact momentof taking the angle.In the night there has beena light breeze from W by S.Weather hazy ; but the horizonsharper than yesterday morning.During the night almost calm ;just now a light air from the NE.Parts of the horizon observedNE and SW.Fine fair clear weather, butwith so high a swell as to renderthe observation difficult Windlight from N, after having beenblowing fresh.Light breezes from the Northeastward ; smooth water, and aclear cool air: hazy about theland. The distance from theSouth coast of Africa was about•8 or 9 leagues. All circumstancesfavourable. No current : we haveprobably been too near shorefor it.Light breeze from the SW,with a long swell. Hazy weather.The wind has been from the Westfor 24 horn's; at first blowinghard, but latterly moderate, thecurrent setting us to the SWabout a mile an hour. A veryheavy dew falling this evening.Parts of the horizon observedEast and West.Moderate breeze from the NE ;air hazy ; long high swell from theWestward. From observationsby stars and chronometers, it liasbten ascertained that there is not-Igi-l1Ii,i iirf"r '

1APPENDIX.I0.106107108109110Date.1817.July 36.July 27.July 27.July 28.July 28.eightofeye.f. i.1515151515nip.Obs. Tab.//S 302 552 473 172 54it3 493 493 493 49349Differ. Therm.+a-/ ii1954Sea.o60566325565859ir.06359596464Differ.+ -33365Bare.Lat.0 '34 52353534 5834 57Long.East.0 '22 23212120 1520 15•o•PRemarks.feet.the least current. Distance fromthe South coast of Africa about50 miles. A high range in sightto the Northward. Parts of thehorizon observed North andSouth.420 A light breeze from the NEairhazy; a long swell from theWestward. About 50 miles distantfrom the land.24 The wind has been moderatefrom the land all night ; air hazy ;weather raw ; a very heavy dewfalling all night. The land insight to the Northward, distantabout 40 miles, is inverted fromone end to the other.240 Parts of the horizon observedNNE and SSW. All other circumstances as in No. 107.Parts of the horizon observedNE and SW. Cape LagullasNorth 2 or 3 leagues. A lightbreeze from the Eastward. Airhazy.222 Parts of the horizon observedSE and NW. Cape Lagullajdue North, distant 6 or 8 miles.Calm all day; sky clear; andweather hazy.N. B. On the 29th and 30thof Jnly we were off the Cape,but the weather was so bad as toprevent any sights being taken.METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WEREIN THE YELLOW AND JAPAN SEAS.IiffI

APPENDIX. liiiHours.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.30'. Olh30.0129.9429.98-29-8929-8929-8029.7629.80Thermom.Air.83°82Sea.84°83Winds.SouthsswswswSWbyWWNWWestwswswLat.N22°.07'Long.E115°.26'SE Coast of China.N22°.43'E11T.3VSE Coast of China.Sunday, July 14, 1816.The wind continued quitelight during the night, with oneor two slight showers, but nosqualls.About 8 A. M. the windhauled to abou SW, from.which quarter it blew a lightu breeze.Monday, July 15, 1816.The same winds during thenight.Found that we had beendriven by a current, settingabout E by N, 2i miles an hour.About 3 o'clock it becameextremely hazy ; the sun set infiery clouds, and a blood redtint was given to the low cloudsall round the horizon.

liv APPENDIX.APPENDIX. IvThermom.Thermom.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.12345678Q */1011Mid.29'. 74h29.8329.7429.7529.7829.7629.7429.7629.8029.8129.8029.8129. 8029.7629-7629.7629.7929. 8083°808080828282828179J79J80J8180818080SWwswWestWSWswswsswswSWbySSSWSouthSbyWN24°.37'E118°.50'Straits of Formosa,China.N26°.21'E122°.06'Straits of Formosa,China.Tuesday, July 16, 1816.During this day there hasbeen a moderate breeze fromthe SSW, with a thick haze,and dew at night.Soundings from 32 to 26fathoms : dark fine sand.We have seen no land all day,having ran along nearly parallelwith the coast about Chusan, atthe distance of about 30 or 40leagues.Wednesday, July 17, 1816.The weather is remarkablyhazy, and there is a very disagreeable sea coming after us.At night hazy with a heavydew; soundings 52 fathoms.To-day we quitted the Straitsof Formosa, and stood towardsthe Yellow Sea. Last eveningwe were among a cluster oflarge islands near the coast ofChina, about two-thirds of theway through the Straits of Formosa.____________ , _______ ——I1234567891011Noon.12345678Q *J1011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29'. 78h29.8029.8629.8029.8029.8029.7629.7629 . 7829.7529. 7829.7829.7829.7829.7529.7229.7229. 7229. 7481°81818179787880798080°798079787879808079SWwswsw.sswswSWbyW*SWsswSbyWSSWswSWbySSSWSouthN26°.21'To the northwardof the Straits ofFormosa.N30°.54'E123°.50'Off the Islands ofChusan 30 or 40leagues.1Thursday, July 18, 1816:The wind during all this dayhas been from the South Westward.From noon till midnight itcontinuedfresh and steady, afterwhich it lulled. Weather veryhazy, and at night a heavy dewfalling.Depth of water from 85 to 37fathoms.No land seen to-day, beingabout 30 leagues off shore, tothe Northward of the Straits ofFormosa.Friday, July 19, 1816.During this day there hasbeen a moderate breeze fromthe SSW, with a thick hazeand dew at night.Soundings from 32 to 26fathoms : iine dark sand.We have seen no land thisday, having ran along nearlyparallel with the coast aboutChusan, at the distance of about30 or 40 leagues.It!'Pi.

Ivi APPENDIX.Thermom.IAPPENDIX.Thermom.IviiHour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1Q ifC345678929! .69h29 . 7079°76°SbyWSaturday, July 20, 1816.Light SSW winds, with thickhaze and dew at night. Regular soundings 20 fathoms:mud and black sand.123456789291 . 69h29 . 7275°77°SSESbyWMonday, July 22, 1816.In the night there was abreeze from the SSW with verythick weather, and much lightning all round.29 . 707977JSouth29.717776SWbyW1011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567"81011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29 . 7229.7029.7029.7029.6629. 6829 . 6629.6929 . 72' 29 . 7629 . 7829.7929-7929-7829 . 8029 . 7829 . 7929.798080797875767777787777777677J77i77JSbyWSWbyWWSWSWbyWWSWWbyNNNWNbyWNorthNNWEbyNEastEbySSEN32°.35'E123°.50'Entering theYellow Sea.N33°.55'^E124°Yellow Sea.To-day we are about halfway between the SE part ofCorea and the Chusan islands,each being about 50 leaguesdistant ; the mouth of the greatriver Yang-tse-kiang is nearlyW 50 leagues, and the promontory of Shan-tung N by W 100leagues.Sunday, July 21, 1816.The wind after noon yesterday freshened up towards sunset from the WSW, and in thenight it hauled to the NW gradually, and so to North ; aboutnoon it became quite light as itdrew to the northward.The weather has becomequite clear since the change ofthe wind.Land in sight to-day aboutEast from us, supposed to bethe islands off the South end ofCorea-•1011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.124567891011Mid29.7129.7529-7529.7429-7529.7329-7329. 7429-7629 . 7829.8029.8029.7929-7929.7829.7629.7778797675757779817877777977767677787877|76SSWswCalmNNENbyENorthNbyWWestCalmSSESESouthSSWSESSESbyEN34°.44'E123°.55'Yellow Sea.N35°.06'E123°.0&Yellow Sea.hAfter noon it fell calm tillabout 6 P. M. when there camea light breeze from the westward which hauled to north, andabout morning fell nearly calm.Regular soundings from 44to 43 fathoms : mud.Tuesday, July 23, 1816.About 8 this morning abreeze sprung at South, whichlasted during the day, freshening very gradually — sky clear.Regular soundings 43 fathoms: mud.A moderate breeze from theSouthward, and fine clear weather.(•j

Iviii APPENDIX.Hour.1234567 891011Noon.1£84567891011Mid.1264567891011Noon.12345678q V1011Mid.Barom.£9'. 75h£9.77£9. 8££9.86£9. 88£9. 70£9.69£9. 70£9.70£9.70£9. 70£9.70£9. 70£9.70£9.70£9.66£9.66£9. 6129.61Thermom.Air.77°757675707174777675Sea.764°737472716673727275Winds.SSESEbySSbyENWNWbyWEbySSEbyESSESbyESbyWswSSWWNWCalmWNWNWbyWNWEastSESSESbyWLat.N36°.£7'Long.E1£3°.01'Yellow Sea.N37°.S£'E122°.37'Nearly on the meridian oftheNEpoint of Shantung promontory,Yellow Sea..Wednesday, July £4, 1816.The wind during these 24hours has been moderate fromthe Southward. — Quite clear,not the least appearance of fog.A very curious assemblageof clouds passed over us at noonfrom the NW.1,Soundings 40, 38, and 37athoms : brown mud.Thursday, July 25, 1816.The wind during the nighthung to the SW, with rainoccasionally..After daybreak the weathercleared up, and the breeze fellgradually as we rounded theNE point of the promontory ofShan-tung.In the forenoon it fell calm,and towards sunset a breezesprung up from ESE and SEwhich lasted during the night.iAPPENDIX.Hour.1a f)• *I \ 57891011Noon1£3• J 5678•9 1011Mid.1r£I1I910UNoon.(^__£34567891011Mid.Barom.£9'. 61h£9-61£9. 6229. 6229. 6£29. 6229.5929. 6029.60£9.60£9.69£9.69£9. 70£9.70£9.68£9. 61£9.61£9.80£9- 84Thermom.Air.74°74747673£7577767677Sea.7£°7£7266687477J767782Winds.SbyWSouthSSESouthSSWSbyWSSWswWNWSEbySSESEbyESouthSSESEEastENEEbySEby NEastEbyNSEbyElixLat.N -38°.07'N38°.5£'Long.E12£°.0'Yellow Sea.E1170.49'Yellow Sea.—— —— —— • —— • • • • ———— —— —— "— "'i'*'-' ——Friday, July £6, 1816.As the day broke, the breezewhich had been light during thenight, freshened up, and theweather, hitherto clear, becamesuddenly quite foggy; this however lasted only half an hour,and we enjoyed during the daythe same fine clear weather, withthe exception indeed of onethunder squall, which lastedonly a few minutes, and passedover, going towards the SE.N. B. This was the only instance of fog during the sixweeks that the ships were in theYellow Sea.Saturday, July £7, 1816..During the whole of this daywe had a fresh breeze from Eastand ESE, with dark cloudyweather. As we drew acrossthe Gulf of Petchelee we hadthe wind much stronger.We anchored at seven o'clockin 8 g fathoms water.In the night it blew hardfrom the East, and at sunrisewe had a violent thunder storm.

lx APPENDIX.Hcmr.1234B67891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29' . 70h29.6329.6129.6229.6029.6029.6129.6229.6129.6029.5929. 6029.6229.6029-5929.5329.5529.5529.63Thermom.Air.80°82J83J8183807982828382J80Sea.80J°8282J828282811828484i8282Winds.SEbyESEbySSWWbyNNbyENorthEbySSSESbyESouthSbyESWSWWSWNNWEbyNNESEESESESEbyELat.N38°52'42"Long.Pei-Ho,Yellow Sea.N38°.56'E118°.00'At anchor off themouth of the Peihoriver, YellowSea.Sunday, July 28, 1816.After the thunder storm hadpassed the weather cleared up,and became quite fine.During the day the breezehas been moderate, with fineclear weather.Monday, July 29, 1816.Light breezes and cloudyweather.Towards noon it fell calm.During the night a moderatebreeze from the Eastward.^ __ ._ — — -IAPPENDIX.Hour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.291 .50h29.6329.6329.6229.6529.6529. 6029.6129.6329.6229.7029.7029.7029.7129.7129.7229.84• Thermom.Air.82°8181828383848382^83Sea.82°8483J828285868282JWinds.SEbyEEastENEEbyNSEbyECalm-SWWNWESESESSESouthIxiLat. Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.Tuesday, July 30, 1816.During this day there hasbeen a light air from the Eastward, and fine clear weather.At midnight it fell calm.Wednesday, July 31, 1816.This morning there is a lightair from the eastward, incliningto calm.Towards night the breezefreshened up from the SE.*

Ixii APPENDIX.Hour.123456' 7891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29! .69h29.7029. 6929.7029.6329.6629.6629.6529.6229.6829-6729. 6329.6329.6329.6529.70Thermom.Air.83°818182807978J7978J7879Sea.84°82J82|8282828282J8382J82Winds.OfXTSWWestSW by SSSWSWbySSbyESESbyESSWSWWbySSSWSbyWSEEastSSEEastLat. Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea. 'At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.Thursday, August 1, 1816.During the night there hasbeen a fresh breeze from theSW, with rain and lightning.Towards noon it became moremoderate.And at night it was verysqually, with rain.Friday, August 2, 1816.During the whole of the nightit rained.Towards morning it blewfresh from the Westward.During the whole of the dayit has been very hazy with slightshowers of rain.Midnight, fresh breezes andclear.IHour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29! . 72h29. 8429.8429.8229. 8029.8029. 8429. 9029.6929.7029.7029. 7029. 6829. 6829. 6829. 6829.68Thermom.Air.77°77!797676757878J787877Sea.81°8182828080J8181818081Winds.EbyNNEENENENEbyNENENEbyNNorthNWWestNWWNWWSWWestswAPPENDIX. IxiiiLat. Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.At anchor off themouth of the Feiho,Yellow Sea.Saturday, August 3, 1816.Fresh breezes and cloudyweather.Strong breezes and cloudy,with slight showers of rain atintervals.Towards evening it clearedup.A short swell from the NE.Moderate breezes and cloudy.\. Sunday, August 4, 1816.Light airs and fine weather."Cloudy, with slight showersof rain at intervals.t,

IxivAPPENDIX..%Therniom.APPENDIX.IxvIfflllHour.1234567891011Noon.124567891011Mid.19sC4567891011XTonn1234567891011Mid.Barom.29s . 68h29.6829.6929.6829.6829.6629.6529.6429.5929-6529.6429. 64. 29 . 6329.6429.6029-6229.66Therniom.Air.77°787881817173768279sea.8080^8181 J827877i8181|8182Winds.WbySWSWW by NSWWbySWSWWbySSWNWNorthNNWWSWSWby\ VSSESELat.Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.Monday, August 5,1816.Moderate breezes and cloudy.In the forenoon we had aslight shower.Moderate breezes and cloudy.Light breezes and cloudy.Tuesday, August 6, 1816.A light breeze from the SW.Towards 4 A. M. the windshifted round to NW, andfreshened up.Noon, a moderate breeze andfine weather.After noon the breeze, whichhad hauled round to WSfreshened up considerably.Towards sunset dark slatyclouds drew over us famj*land, moving in a contdirection from that ot thewhich we had.1Hour.2345 /-*| '» 891011Noon.124567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.124561 71 891011Mid.Barom.29i .67"29.9530.0030.0029. 9229. 8229.8129.6529.6629. 6729.6929-6829.6629. 6529.6929.7029.71Air.79J7776737173768U7977Sea.81°808078J7877|818079Winds.SouthEbyNEastEbyNNENorthNNWNNWNELat.Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea,iWednesday, August 7, 1816.At sunrise it was moderate,but about nine o'clock the breezefreshened, and towards noonblew fresh from the Eastward.Fresh breezes and cloudy.Towards night it moderated.At midnight a moderatebreeze.Thursday, August 8, 1816.Moderate and cloudy.Moderate and fineLight airs.-IH

11"Ill Ixvi APPENDIX.I! _______ —————— - —————————————II• • Hour.II !1 I• 7sr 10>IH 9"iiji 111Noon.1345Barom.29i .73h29.7429.7829-7729.7629.70Thermom.Air.75°76^8079Sea.77i°7979i771Winds.NbyENWESESSELat. Long.At anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.Friday, August 9, 1816.Light airs and cloudy.2 A. M. a moderate breezesprung up at NW.\Hour.1234567891011Noon.123Barom.29. 7029.7029.7529.7429.7429. 72Thermom.Air.75°767979Sea.78°798078Winds.SESEbySSEAPPENDIX. IxviiLat. Long.Off the river Peiho,Yellow Sea.Suiiday, August 11, 1816.IVlfMif*T£lf'fi fin/i /Mf^QT* \Vf>nf" nfl*J-VJUJLlCiclLC dlllA Clcdl ?Vca,LIJv:Jl •Illl, II10t|l 11[j Mid.2.nil ^J^l 5•1 6'^1 7IU 8'rrV 9l,|IIInI1 I?|| Noon.I 24567891011Mid.29. 7029. 7029.6929-7029.7029-7029.6929-6729.6529.6429.7229. 74767581797678777978|78NWNWWNWNWCalmSSEswAt anchor off themouth of the Peiho,Yellow Sea.Moderate breezes.Saturday, August 10, 1816.Moderate breezes and clear.Calm and fine weather.Moderate and cloudy.______ .^ —— — —*4567891011Mid.1ft34567891011Noon.1234567891011 .Mid.29. 7229.7529.7829-7929.7929-7929.7829.7829.7829. 8075757579798179i79^7977787879828180SESEbyESESEbySN38°.38'E117°.44'GulfofPe-che-lee.Monday, August 12, 1816.Moderate breezes and cloudy.Moderate breezes from theSE, with fine clear weather:lightning at times.Moderate and fine weather.Moderate breezes and clear,with lightning.678929-7029.72I

Ixviii APPENDIX.APPENDIX, IxixIIThermom.Thermom.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1345678q «y1011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.12345678929; . 79h29.8029.8029 . 7429.7729 . 8029-7929. 7029.7129.7229.7229. 7429.7129. 7429 . 7089°8380|7977797979^8079°8180787878787880SbyWsswSEESESESEbySCalmSEbySSEWSWSouthSSESbyEN38°.34'E118°.08'GulfofPe-che-lee.N38°.29'E118°.20'GulfofPe-che-lee.•Tuesday, August 13, 1816.In the evening we had freshbreezes from the SE — sky assuming a threatening appearance. Towards midnight itmoderated, at which time it fellcalm.Wednesday, August 14, 1816.After midnight a moderatebreeze sprung up from the SE.About 4 A.M. it shiftedmore to the Southward, andremained so the rest of the day.Weather fine.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.12345678929i .77h29.7929.7829.7629. 7429. 7429. 7629 . 86 ,29. 7929-8029.8029. 7429.7429 . 7476°7878J8078777979i8079!°808182808181 i81SEEastEbyNENEEbyNEbySEbyNE by S»

Ixx APPENDIX.Hour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29! .74h29. 7429.7429. 7429-7529.7429. 7429.7029.7029.7129.7229.8029.8129.8029. 8229.8829.8229.9029-9829 .98Thermom.Air.78!°79!8182797979i797978!7878Sea.80°8481818080808079!707878Winds.SbyWsswSWbySSWNEbyNEastEbySEastEbyNNEby EENESEbyECalm.EastLat.N37°.20'Long.E119°.SS'Gulf of Pe-che-lee.N37°.47'E119°.37'Gulf of Pe-che-lee.Saturday, August 17, 1816.To-day we have had a breezefrom the SW.During the afternoon thewind shifted to the Eastward,where it remained, and blew asteady breeze.Sunday, August 18, 1816.After midnight we had amoderate breeze from the Eastward,andat4A.M. it freshenedup at ENE, where it continueduntil the evening, at whichtime it shifted to the SE, withrain.At eight it was nearly calm.About nine a breeze sprungup from the Eastward, accompanied by rain._____ — -fHour.1234567891011Noon1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29'. 98h29 .9429.9229.9229.9229.9229.9429.9929.9530.0030.0230.0330.0029.9029.9029-90Thermom.Air.73!" 77J°747574!7676757474Sea.77!77!767877!7877!Winds.NNEENENENE by NNby ENNENEbyNAPPENDIX. IxxiLat.N37°.40'Long.E119°-44'Gulf of Pe-che-lee.N37°.46/E120°.08'Gulf of Pe-che-leeMonday, August 19, 1816.A light air.1 LTowards noon the breezefreshened up at North-easterly,where it continued all day, andblew rather fresh, with a shortswell.Tuesday, August 20, 1816.During the night it blew asteady fresh breeze from NNE,in which quarter it continuedall this day.The sky having athreateningappearance.Towards the evening moderated.Near midnight the wind cameround to the SW, and blew amoderate breeze.-»4,I l;l.jfl

IxxiiAPPENDIX.1APPENDIX. IxxiiiHour.1234567891011Noon.123456789Barom.29! . 80h29.8029.8029-7829.7629.76Thermom.Air.74°'7976Sea.77°7777Winds.swsswSby WCalmEastLat.N87°.51'Long. ,E120°.33'GulfofPe-che-lee.Wednesday, August 21, 1816.The early part of the daythe wind has been moderatefrom the Southward.About noon it died away,but shortly after a breeze sprungup from theEastward,and blewpretty steady from that quartertill the evening, when it hauledround to the SE.Hour.134567891011Noon.123456789Barom.29'.70h29.7029-7229-7029-68Thermom.Air. Sea.78° 78°80 7881 78J80 78Winds.NESEbyESELat.Long.At anchor inCheatow Bay, Yellow Sea.Friday, August 23, 1816.During the night the windhas been moderate, and steadyfrom the Southward.tIn the forenoon it veered tothe NE, and towards night tothe Southward.29.747577SEbyS29.667978Calm*1011Mid.1229.8274J73SbyEThursday, August 22, 1816.1011Mid.1229-667778SouthSouthSaturday, August 24, 1816.. ._45678929. 80During the early part of theday we had a moderate breezefrom the SE.. 4-5678929-707778During the morning the windwas steady from the Southward.29. 80777829-6878J78SbyE"HI1011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29. 8029. 74"29 . 7429.7429-7229.72807877787878•SESSEOff Cheatow, Yellow Sea.After noon it hauled to theSouthward.1011Noon.123.4567891011Mid.29.7029-6829-6829.6829-6629.6629.6629-6429.6429-6229. 627979787878787877NEEastEbySChe-a-tow,Yellow Sea.kTowards night the windhauled to the Eastward, blowing a moderate breeze, andsteady.IIf

Ixxiv APPENDIX.APPENDIX. IxxvHour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barora.29*. 74"29.6429. 6629.6429.5629.5629.5629.5629-6429.5229.5229.5429.56Thermom.Air.78°7978777879i79J7978JSea.78°78m77J77J78787878Winds.EbySNbyENENENbyEEbySSWWNWWbyNNWLat. Long.Che-a-tow,Yellow Sea.Che-a-tow,Yellow Sea.Sunday, August 25, 1816.The wind continued to blowfrom the NE quarter all theforenoon.In the afternoon it hauledmore to the Northward.At midnight it hauled to theSW, with fine clear weather.A heavy dew falling.Monday, August 26, 1816.After midnight it continuedto blow a moderate breeze fromthe SW.About 4 A.M. it shifted tothe NW, from which quarter itblew the whole of the day._____——Hour.1/23457891011Noon.123"5 467891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29i .58h29.6229 . 6.429.6429.6229.6229.6229. 6429.6429.7029.7229.7229.7029.7029.74Thermom.Air.77°787676757577J77i7779Sea.77°787777777776J767676Winds.NWNorthNWbyWSby WNNENEbyENEENENELat. Long.At anchor in3ie-hai-oie harbour,Yellow Sea.Oie-hai-oie harbour,Yellow Sea.Tuesday, August 87, 1816.Towards noon the windhauled more to the Westward,with rain, thunder, and lightning.In the evening the wind cameto the NNE.Wednesday, August 28, 1816.To-day the wind has beenmoderate and steady from theNorth-eastward.Towards night the breezefreshened, and the sky becamecloudy, assuming a threateningappearance.

Ixxvi APPENDIX.APPENDIX. IxxviiHour.1234567891011Noon.12345678q «71011Mid.""•" i "24567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.2&.18h29.7829.8029-8029.9229.9029-9229.9229.9429,9629.9829.9829.9629-9429.9229.9029.90Thermom.Air. Sea.77°7881817879787880807976°76J777877777777788179Winds.EbyNSbyESouthSSESouthswSouthSbyWSWWestCalmCalmNNEENELat. Long.Oie-hai-oie harbour,Yellow Sea.N37°.58'E122°.58'Yellow Sea.Thursday, August 29, 1816.After midnight the windhauled to the Eastward, blowing fresh, the weather still looking very black.After 4 it moderated, and theweather cleared up and becamequite fine.About 8 P.M. the wind cameto the Southward. Towardsmidnight it drew round to theSW, and then to South again.Friday, August 30, 1816.All the forenoon the wind hasbeen light from the Southwardand SW.About noon it fell calm.At 2 a breeze sprung up fromthe NE, with small drizzlingrain, and thick weather.fIHour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.124567891011Barom.29 1 . 90h29.9229.9429-9629.9429.9429.9229.9229-9029.9029.9229.9029.9829.9829-98Thermom.Air.79°8080807976767675Sea.79°797979179*78767675Winds.WbyNNWbyNNWCalmNWJNEbyNNbyENorthLat.N37°.55'Long.E123°.37'Yellow Sea.N37°.45'E124°.20'Yellow Sea.Saturday, August 31, 1816.After midnight a light breezefrom the Eastward, inclining tocalm.About noon a breeze sprungup from the Westward; weather cloudy.In the afternoon it died awayquite light.Towards midnight a moderate breeze from the Northward.Sunday, September 1, 1816.During this day there hasbeen a steady breeze at Northand North by East.Towards night the windfreshened up.

Ixxviii APPENDIX. APPENDIX. IxxixHour.Barom.Thermom.Air. Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hour.Barom.Thermom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1234567891011Noon.124567891011Mid.123457891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29. 8229.8229.8229. 8229-9629.9829.9830.0430.0230.0430.0430.0029.9829.9529.9429.9278°808180807779818079°7980808079787877EastESESbyWSSESbyWSouthSouthSbyWsswswwswWestCalm.N36°.45'E124°.31'West Coastof Corea.N36°.18/E125°.54'Monday, September 2, 1816.About 2 A. M. the windshifted to the Eastward, whereit freshened.In the afternoon it freshenedand shifted to the Southward,accompanied by a slight showerof rain.Tuesday, September 3, 1816.The wind during all thenight has been steady from theSouthward, and remained soall day until the evening, whenit shifted to the Westward.About sunset it fell calm._____1234567891011Noon.I234567891 s| Mid.W i2- 3•f If 6 7891011Noon.12 '3456781 91 1011Mid.29i -95h29-9529.9529-9229.8529.8429 - 8429- 8429.8229.8229.8229.8229.8229.8029.8029.8078°7980817978J80i80808078°7882828079J7980j7979CalmWestNWWestWSWNbyENNCalmWNWWNWN36° 13'E126° 19'West Coastof Corea.N36°.05'E126°.27'Wednesday, September 4, 1816.It continued calm all night.About 8 A. M. a light breezefrom the Westward.At noon it freshened, hauling from W to NW.Towards night the windshifted to the Northward, andcontinued to blow steady.Thursday, September 5, 1816.About 7 it fell calm.Towards noon a breezesprung up from WNW, withfine clear weather.Towards midnight the windcame to the Northward.

Ixxx APPENDIX. APPENDIX.Thermom.Thermom.Hour..' 1234567891011Noon1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.12345678q1011Mid.Barom.291 . 86h29-8629.8829. 8829.8929.9029.9029.8829.8229.8229.8229-8229.8029.8229.82Air.78i°7979*7977J76808078Sea.78°78787747475767282Winds.NbyENNENorthNbyEENECalmNNWNbyEENENNNECalmNLat.N•35°.17'Long.E126°.09'WestCoastofCorea.N34°.32'E125°.35'.Friday, September 6, 1816.BHour.1 » .I •

IxxxiiAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.IxxxiiiThermom.Thermom.Hour.IJarom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1Of-J34567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.12467891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29i .76h29.7629.7729.7629.7429.7829.9029.9029.7429.7629 . 7329.7229.7129.7129 . 7129.7129.7329.8072°73737276767680818279J68°68686880808080i838282NWNorthNbyWNorth.NbyWNNWNWNorthN34°.19/E126°.5'Got under weighfrom Murray'sSound, and stoodto the Southwardinto the Japan Sea.Saw Quelpaert.N31°.41'E126°.44'Japan Sea.Tuesday, September 10, 1816.The breeze continued atNW until the afternoon, whenit drew round to the Northward,and freshened up from thatquarter, looking threatening andsqually.Midnight, strong breezeswith occasional showers of rain,and a very high irregular swellfrom the NE. This seems to bethe NE monsoon, which sets into the Northward much earlierthan in lower latitudes.Wednesday, September 11, 1816.To-day we have had a strongbreeze from the N by W, witha high irregular swell settingafter us. In the afternoon thewind hauled round to NW.Towards midnight it moderated : weather cloudy.II1234567891011Noon.12457891011Mid.19K34Tc567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.*29'. 74"29.7529.7529.7529.7029.70f**7 @Q • 72 t*^29.7829.7829.7229.7029.7029.7629.7829 . 6029.7429.7529. 8029.9029.9529-9429.5280°81 k82J•838382.J838482°82838383828484NorthNby ENEbyEJNENbyENEN29°.38'N27°-48'E127°.56'Japan Sea-E.128°.20'Off Sulphur Island,Japan Sea.•Thursday, September 12, 1816.During the night the windshifted to the Northward, witha moderate breeze, and fineclear weather.In the afternoon it becamesqually, with a heavy shower ofrain.This wind, though not fixed,has much the appearance of themonsoon.Latitude by Polaris 30° 3' 30"at 2 h. 57 min. A. M. 13th.Friday, September 13, 1816.The wind continued at NE,with a steady fresh breeze; whichtowards noon freshened considerably, and a swell got up fromthe NE. At noon observed in27e 48' N latitude. 2° 30' P.M.it became dark and stormy inthe NE, -and the signal beingmade to shorten sail, we broughtthe ship under the main topsailand foresail, and made preparations for a gale. At 4 wesaw the I,oo-choo Islands SWby S 20 miles. At 5 the windshifted from N to NE, and themountainous swell which . wehad experienced during the dayrose still higher. The wind didnot blow fresh except in shortrainy squalls. After 8 P. M. itblew at times very fresh, 'andalso in the night, but when themoon got up it became clear.

Ixxxiv APPENDIX.APPENDIX. IxxxvThermom.Thermom.Hour.Barom.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.] lour.Earotn.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.123567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29! .52h29. 5229.5429.5429 . -5629.6029-5829.6029. 6429.5229.5429.6629. 7029.7429.8029.7829.7629.7129.7529.7529.7529. 7S29.8029.8129.8083°8383828180838381J8182| c NWNWbyW8282 NWbyNNW82 NWbyNNWNNW83NWbyN8483| NbyWNorthNNE84 NEbyNN27°-44'E127°.35'Off Loo-choo,Japan Sea.N26°.44'-E127°-32'Off Loo-choo,Japan Sea.Saturday, September 14, 1816.During the night the windshifted from NE to NW, andcontinued to blow fresh with ahigh irregular swell.Towards evening it becamemoderate and clear.In the night fine clear weather.Sunday, September 15, 1816.A moderate breeze fromNNW, with a clear sky; theswell much less, though stillconsiderable.Towards night the windveered to NNE.I034567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.123456. 7 891011Mid.291 . 84h29.8429.9029.9029 . 8029.8029.8029. 8029. 8029.7929.8229- 8229.7829.7729.7829. 8029.7881°82828018081 k8382818183°838383J8282828282NNENbyENENEbyEEbyNESEEbyNN26°-13'.39"Ei27°.38 (At anchor inNapakiang harbour,Great Loo-chooIsland.Moored inSapakiang harbour.Monday, September 16, 1816.The wind continued at NNE.About 4 A.M. we had severalshowers of rain, but soon clearedoff.About noon the breeze freshened.In the afternoon we had ashower.Midnight, clear weather, withlightning in the SW.Tuesday, September 17, 1816.The wind continued at NE,with a moderate breeze. At4 there was a slight shower ofrain, but it cleared up again ina short time.After noon the wind shiftedto the Eastward : squally, withshowers of rain.Midnight, clear : moderateweather.«

Ixxxvi APPENDIX. APPENDIX. ixxxviiTherrnoni.Thermion.Hour.Baron).Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.Hours.Barora.Air.Sea.Winds.Lat.Long.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29! .72h29.7529-7529.702Q. 7229. 7429. 7229-6329-6229.6229.5029.5829.5629.5429.5429.5480°8282828182J82ENE82J° NE byEO2ftO 1ENENEby E82 NENNE82 NNE8383£ NECalmEastSSE^apakiang harbour.Wednesday, September 18, 1816.To-day the wind has been atNNE.After 4 A.M. we had severalshowers of rain.Towards 110011freshened.the breezeAt night squally, with rain.Thursday, September 19, 1816.After midnight it continuedto rain, with occasional squalls.As the day advanced it clearedup.At noon quite moderate.In the evening it looked veryblack all round, and fell calm.About 7 a breeze sprung upfrom the Eastward, and it commenced lightning. About 8 thewind shifted to SSE, and freshened, with squalls.Towards midnight heavysqualls, with rain : thunder andlightning.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.124567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29i .60h29.6229 . 6329.6329.6429.6929.6929.6829.6929.7029.7029-7029.7029.7029.7029-7080!° 83°84J82818083|88k81i8083 i82^8282838SJ8282SSESbyESSESEbySSEEbySESEEbySNapakiang harbour.Friday, September 20, 1816.After midnight the samesqually weather continued. Asthe day advanced it cleared up.In the afternoon it becamesqually, with slight showers ofrain. Towards evening it lookedvery black all round.It seems probable that this isthe breaking up of the monsooii.We were so completelysheltered by the land, that wedid not feel the wind much;but it was evidently "blowinghard outside.Saturday, September 21, 1816.During the day the wind hasbeen South-easterly, with occasional squalls and. showers ofrain, and lightning.In the forenoon the windhauled to the Eastward, andcleared up^"-

IxxxviiiAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.IxxxixHour.134567891011Noon.13467891011Mid.13457891011Noon.12345678QV1011Mid.Barom.29'.70h29-7029-7029. C829.6629.6629.6629-6229 . 6229.6229-6029.5829.5029.50Thermom.Air. Sea.81°82°83 8282 8281J 8280 8281 82OC) 13Winds. Lat. Long.ENEEbyNNapakiang harbour.ENENEbyEENENEbyEISunday, September 22, 1816.After midnight squally, withrain and lightning.About 7 the wind hauled tothe ENE, and cleared up, andcontinued fine all day.Monday, September 23, 1816.To-day the wind has beenabout NE; squally at times,with showers of rain, and everyappearance of approaching badweather.During all this day the barometer continued falling, inthe evening it had reached29.50. The wind in the earlypart of the night hauled toNNE, and towards morning tothe Northward.Hour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barora.29i .43h29. 4229. 4029.4029.4429. 5029.5529.5629.6329.6529. 6629.7229.8029.8629.8629.8429.8429.8629.9229.95Thermom.Air.81°81797878797877J77Sea.81i°81*8180J808080J79i78Winds.NNENEbyNNNWNWbyNNWNWbyWNWNWbyWNWNWbyNLat.Long.Napakiang harbour.mTuesday, September 24, 181C.In the night the wind hasbeen about NNE. About 4A. M. it began to blow veryfresh, with squalls.About noon the wind shiftedto NNW, and increased instrength.During the afternoon it Mewhard, and gradually shifted tothe North-westward, with freshsqualls of short duration. At3 30 P. M. the mercury beganto rise, and continued rising veryrapidly.The weather at sunset assumed a very stormy appearance.Wednesday, September^, 1816.Shortly after midnight itcleared up and moderated.During the day it has beenblowing a steady moderatebreeze from the NW.,Midnight, moderate 5,ndcloudy.!

ixfe APPENDIX.APPENDIX. xciHour.i23f4 ;567891011Noon.12340678o =-*71011Mid.12345 .67891011Noon.1245678911Mid.Barom.29' . 96h29.9629.9930.0030.0029.9929.9929.9929.9929 . 9929.9929.9929.9929.9929 .$829.9629.9629.9429-94•Thermom.Air.78°79837979707680797877Sea.80°81!81!8180!8181!80!8079Winds.NNWNWbyWCalmNNENNECalmNorthENENECalmLat. Long.Napakiang harbour.Thursday, September 26, 1816.The wind continued aboutNNW all day, blowing a moderatebreeze, with fine weather.8P.M. it fell calm.Towards midnight a lightbreeze sprung up from NNE.Friday, September 27, 1816.After midnight the wind diedaway.Towards noonabreeze sprungup from the Northward..In the afternoon it shifted toENE.Midnight, calm and cloudy, 0 *weather._ ____ -Hour.12S4567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.29i .90h29.9429.9429-9029-9229.9029.9029.9029.9029.9029.9229.9229; 9429.9429.9529.9529.95Thermom.Air. Sea.76!°81 J79°81 J81! 8180 81|76 7975 7980 8182 8181 8180 80J78 80Winds.CalmESEEastNENEENENEbyENELat. Long.Napakiang harbour.iSaturday, September 28, 1816.All the early part of themorning it was quite calm.About 8 A.M. a breezesprung up about ESE : in theafternoon it hauled round toEast.Midnight, the breeze shiftedto NE, and was moderate.Sunday, September 29, 1816.During this day the windshifted occasionally from NE toENE, blowing a moderatebreeze, with fine clear weather.Towards night it becamecloudy.Blf-Hit

XC11 APPENDIX.IAPPENDIX.xcmHour.1234567891011Noon.123456789Barom.29.9629.9629-9729 - 9829.9829.9129.9629.9529.95Thermom.Air. Sea. Winds. Lat. Long.NEbyE79° 801°82 81NEbyENapakiang harbour.8H 8180 801Monday, September 30, 1816.During the forenoon the windhas been light from the NE.Towards noon it freshenedup.^Midnight, cloudy weather.Tuesday, October 1, 1816.Hour.134567891011Noon123467891011Mid.12Baroln. .291 . 91h29.9129.9429.9629.9629.9229.8929-8829.9029-90Thermom.Air. Sea.-78° 80°79 8080 ^179 81JWinds. •———— E _______EbySEastLat.N26°.25'Long.E127°.38'Wednesday, October 2, 1816.The whole of this day thewind has been from the Eastward, blowing a moderatebreeze, with fine weather.Towards night -cloudy weather.Thursday, October 3, 1816.III1011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.29.9530.0230.0730.0730. 0029.9429.9429.9429.9429.9279J8079J788080i80^80EastESEEbyS-N26°.34'E127°.38Sugar Loaf Point.N. 24° E.After midnight the wind drewmore to the Eastward, and thesky became very black allround:squally, with rain at intervals.We got under weigh at daylight, and proceeded along shoreto the Northward.The wind continued to theEastward._4S67891011Noon.14567891011Mid.29.8729.8729.8729.8629.8629.86788180787881811818180NEbyEEbySEast Napakiang harbour.ENE1EbyNDuring the night the windshifted to NE by E.Towards noon it shifted toEast, and in the evening toENE again.1!

XC1V APPENDIX.APPENDIX. xcvHour.134S€7891011Noon.1234567891011Mid. 1 'S3456If891011Noon.124567891011Mid.Barom.29'.87h29.8729.8629.8629.8529.8529.85«9.8629.8729.8729-8529.8429.8229.8229-8329.83Thcrmom.Air.78°7979797881.8117978Sea. \Vindfc Xat. Long.81° NE84,'ENE Sfapakiang harbour.80J SEbyE80 NE80J EbyN81 NEbyE81 NbyENE80*Friday, October 4, 1816.To-day we had a light breezefrom the NE, until the afternoon, when it shifted to SEby E, but only remained a shorttime, coming back to NE again,where it continued Until nearmidnight, when it fell calm.0rSaturday, October 5, 1816.In the morning a breezesprung up from the Eastward,where it remained until noon ;then shifted to NE, and continued to blow from that quarterall the rest of the day.Hour.124567891011Noon.1234& 67891011Mid.12 :45 r67891011Noon.1Barom.29' . 8Sh29.8429.8429.8329.8329.83£9.80 .29.9429.9529.923 4 ' £9 . 93 •56 29.93789 1 29.93'1011Mid. 29.96Therroom.Air.78JP8079ji|•78'79|7978J78^jSea.80J°81m80j8080i808079f•iHIWinds.NEbyNNorthNENNENEby ENorthNbyE•NbyELat. Long.Napakiang harbourrSunday, October 6, 1816.The early part of flie daythe wind has been moderatefrom the NE.About noon the wind shiftedto the Northward.At night it (Canjip back toNE, with rain.*'Monday, October 7, 1816.After midnight the windjcontinuedat NE by E, with showersof rain.At 4 A.M. the wind cametoNorth, and the weatherclearedup : it blew a fresh breeze iromthat quarter all day.Towards midnight it moderated.L.

XCV1 APPENDIX.APPENDIX. XCVllHour.1284567891011Noon.1234567'891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.124567891011MidBaroin.301 . 00h30. 0230.0230.0030.0030.0030.0030.0030.0030.0430.1030.1080.1030.0630 . 0030:0630 . 13Thermom.Air.78°7878767575777877Sea.791° NEbyN79J79!787878g78J7878Winds.NNENE by NNEby E«/ENEEastEbySLat. Long.Napakiang harbour.N26°.34'E127°-26'Tuesday, October 8, 1816.To-day we have had a moderate breeze at NE by N.Squally at times.Towards midnight fine clearweather.Wednesday, October 9, 1816.During the morning a moderate breeze from NE oy E.About 6 A.M. we got underweigh, and stood to the Northward.In the afternoon the windshifted to the Eastward, andcontinued so the remainder ofthe day.At night, cloudy weather.Hour.184K*J67891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barorn.SO'.OO"30.0030.0130.0129.9829.9829 . 9829.9829.9829.9829.9729.9729-9729.9629.9629.9629.9430.00Thermom.Air. Sea.77° 79!'78 7979 79!78 7978 7980 8080 80Winds.ESEEastEbyNENENENESEWestNby ENNELat.N26°.50'.Long.E127°.50'Off the Great LoochooIsland.N26°.42'E127°.53'Off Port Melville.nThursday, October 10, 1816.During this day the wind hasbeen moderate from the Eastward.At night fine clear weather.Friday, October 11, 1816.After midnight the windshifted from NE to SE, with alight air.Ten A. M. it fell calm.jIn the afternoon a breezesprung up from the Westward ;about 8 it looked very dark allround, and shortly afterwardsbegan to blow fresh from N byE, and continued so all night. 'it

XCV1I.1APPENDIX.APPENDIX.xcixHour.123456781011Noon.1246- 7891011Mid.123467891011Noon.134567891011Mid.Barora.SO'.SO1'30.2630 . 2630 . 2230 . 2230.2030 . 2030.3030.3430.2030.1030.0630.0430 . 0430.0030.0030.0030.0230. 02Therraom.Air. Sea.76° 79°^76 7976 7976 7975 7875 78i75 78^75 78Winds.NE by ENEENEENECalmNENEbyELat.N25°.33'Long.E127°.50'Off Loo-choo.N27°-00'E128°.3'Saturday, October 12, 1816.During the night the windcame to NE with a fresh breeze,and rain at intervals.In the afternoon a swell gotup from the NE ; the windmoderated, and drew round toENE.Midnight, fresh breezes andcloudy.Sunday, October 13, 1816.After midnight it becamequite moderate, with rain attimes.In the forenoon it fell calm.During the afternoon a breezesprung up at NE.Towards midnight it freshened considerably.,- —Hour.124567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011( Noon.123567891011Mid.Barom.30. 0230.0029.9429.9729.9830.0230.1830.1030. 1030.1030.0830.0830.0830.10Thermom.Air. Sea.75° 79^75 79751 7975 7974 7874J 7874si 7874,| 79Winds.NEbylSNNENorthNWWNby WNNWNbyWNorthNorthLat.N26°.36/Long.E127°.56'Off Loo-choo.N26°.02'E127°.35'Monday, October 14, 1816.After midnight the windmoderated,About 8 A. M. it fell nearlycalm, but shortly after it freshened at NNE.Towards midnight the windshifted to NNW, and continuedto blow fresh.Tuesday, October 15, 1816.During this day the windhas been from the N by W,blowing a fresh breeze, withoccasional squalls.At midnight it moderated.-If

APPENDIX.APPENDIX. ciHour.1234567891011Noon.124567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.SO'^O1130.2030.1030.0030.0030.0030.0030. 0030.0030.0030.0030.0030.0130.0230. 00Thennom.Air.73°74747471757575Sea.77°77|777776777776.JWinds.NbyENbyWNNELat.N26°.ll'Long!E127°.30'Off Loo-choo.NEbyN Napakiang harbour-•Wednesday, October 16, 1816.During the night the winddrew round to N by E, witha moderate breeze. About 7A. M. we weighed and stoodto the NW, shortly after thebreeze freshened, with squalls ;at 2 P. M. anchored in Napakiang harbour.Towards midnight the breezefreshened.Thursday, October 17, 1816.The whole of this day wehave had a breeze from theNNE, with fine clear weather.Hour.1234567891011Noon.1234,Tff567891011Mid.19,S4>567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.30! . 00h30.0030.0230. 0230.0030. 0029.9829.9829.9829.9829.98Thermora.Air. Sea, Winds.781 C 76° NEbyNEbyN74 75|NEbyE71 75 NENE76 76NE73 73 7575Lat. Long.Moored in Napakiangharbour.Friday, October 18, 1816.The wind continued aboutNE by N.Towards noon it came tothe eastward with a moderatebreeze.At night it shifted to theNE.iSaturday, October 19, 1816.During all this day the windhas been moderate and steadyat NE, with fine clear weather.*

«*"!• . •" "' ————Cll APPENDIX.APPENDIX. cmHour.12S4567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.13S4567891011Noon.124567891011Mid.Barom.29! .98h29-9829.9829.9829.9829.9829.98SO. 00SO. 0080.0030.0030.0030.04Thermom.Air. Sea. Winds.72° 75J" NE73^ 73 7SJ 7S 74 73 72 75J7575 75 757574J NEbyNNbyENNELat. Long.Napakiang harbour.Sunday, October 20, 1816.The breeze still continues atNE, with the same fine clearweather as yesterday.Monday, October 21, 1816.After midnight the windshifted to the N by E, with amoderate breeze.,Towards night it fell almostcalm.Hour.1234567891011Noon.12S4567891011Mid.123457891011Noon.12S4567891011Mid.Barom.30! . 06h30.0630.0630 .0030.0830.0830.0830.0830. 1030.1030. 1030. 1030. 1230. 12Thermom.Air.71°73727070717273Sea. Winds. Lat. Long.NNE74^°75 NEbyNNapakiang harbour74|74NEbyN75 NNE7574 NbyE73iTuesday, October 22, 1816.After midnight the breezefreshened up at NNE, andcontinued so all day, with fineclear weather.,*Wednesday, October 23, 1816.The wind continued steadyat NNE, with the same fineweather as yesterday.(I'h t

CIV APPENDIX.APPENDIX. cvThermom.Thermon).Hour.1234567891011Noon.124,rU56789Baron.301 . 04h30.0029.99on qc•~t7 * J/O29.98Air.72°72Sea.75°741Winds.NbyENorthLat. Long.Napakiang harbour.Thursday, October 24, 1816.After midnight we had amoderate breeze at NNE.Towards noon it shifted tonorth, and freshened up in thatquarter.After noon we had a slightshower of rain, but soon afterit cleared up.Hours.1234567891011Noon.123456789Barora.301 . 20h30.2030. 1830.1630.12 -30.1030.10Air.74°74Sea.74J°757474Winds.NNWNorthLat. Long.Napakiang harbour.Saturday, October 26, 1816.During this day the wind hasbeen at north, blowing a freshbreeze, with occasional squalls.Towards midnight it moderated.

evi APPENDIX.APPENDIX. cvnHour.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.SO'.IO'130.0829.9929.9830.0030.0530.0230.0230 . 0229.9529-9930.0030.00;Thermom.Air.72i°7474J.76i76£7676Sea.77°797979797979Winds.NNENEbyNNENEbyNNENELat.N24° . 41'Long.E126° . 0'Japan Sea.N23°.24'E124°.01'Monday, October 28, 1816.During all this day the windhas been at NNE, blowing asteady fresh breeze.Towards night it shifted toNE.Tuesday, October 29, 1816.The wind has been from theNE, and a swell rising fromthat quarter.Towards night the sky assumed a threatening appearance.- —— —1 ———Hour.1234567891011Noon.123456781011Mid.1234567891011Noon.1234567891011Mid.Barom.SO1 . 50hSO. 30SO. 0029.9230.5030. 8531.1031 .00Tbcrmom.Air.71°7878Sea80°797977 78Winds.NorthNby ELat.N22°.10/Long.E122°.0/Wednesday, October 30, 1816.During the night the windshifted to the Northward, andcontinued to blow fresh, with aheavy swell. Saw the islandsof Botel-Tobago-Zima, andFormosa.The breeze moderated, andthe swell abated considerablyas we drew near the land.But towards midnight, as westood off the land, the breezefreshened up again.Thursday, October 31, 1816.Passed Formosa, and entered the China sea.

ABSTRACTOF THELYRA'S VOYAGE,FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN;SHEWINGTHE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICHSHE TOUCHED, AND THE TIME TAKEN INPERFORMING EACH PASSAGE.

ABSTRACTOF THEVOYAGES OF HIS MAJESTY'S SHIP LYRA,IN 1816 AND 1817.THE Lyra, in the short space of twenty months, viz. fromthe 9th of February 1816, to the 14th of October 1817,visited Madeira, the Cape, Java, Macao, the Yellow Sea,the West Coast of Corea, the Great Loo-choo Island,Canton, Manilla, Prince of Wales's Island, Calcutta, Madras, the Mauritius, and St. Helena; having run, in directcourses, a distance of 11,940 nautic leagues, or 41,490statute miles.An abstract of the various passages, from place to place,during this voyage, illustrated by brief remarks on the particular circumstances of each, will probably be consideredinteresting.1.Sailed through the Needles passage on the 9th of February, 1816.Arrived at Madeira, 18th of February . 9 days. England to Madeira and Cape,Crossed the equator in longitude 25 207 west, 2520 ieagi.cs.4th March ....... 15Reached the Cape of Good Hope, 14th April 41From England to the Cape, in 9 weeks, 2 days, or 65 days.1

cxiiAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.cxmThis is not a very good passage, considering that wecarried the north-east trade wind to the latitude of 4° north,and longitude 23° west, where we got the south-east trade,without any interval of calms.2.This passage was unusually bad, it being nearly a weekbefore we reached Gaspar Straits, an ordinary run ofone day: in the south part of the China sea the southwest monsoon was very light. An American brig, whichsailed only one day before us from Anjier Point, carriedthe breeze along with her, and reached Macao twelve daysbefore us.Cape to Java,1800 leagues.Sailed from the Cape on the 26th April 1816.Arrived at Anjier Point, Java, 7th June . 42 days.Six weeks.4.Java to China,600 leagues.After leaving the Cape we had strong westerly winds,with which we ran the longitude down, in the parallel of38° and 39° south, till in longitude 57° east, where theweather being very stormy, we hauled to the north-east tillin 35° south latitude, and then ran east till in 90° east,when we steered to the east-north-east, and crossed thetropic in 102° east, which was probably too far west. Thesouth-east trade hung far to the eastward, and made itdifficult to fetch Java Head, which had we not succeeded indoing at first, might have caused considerable delay, as thewind still blew out of the Straits of Sunda.3.Sailed from Anjier Point, Java, on the 12th June, 1816.Reached Caspar Straits on the 17th June 1816 5 days.Arrived off Macao, 8th July . . .21From Java to Macao in 3 weeks 5 days, or 26 days.Sailed from the Ladrone Islands off Macao, on the 13th ^d* islandsto the YellowJuly 1816. Sea- 520Rounded the promontory of Shantung and' entered theYellow Sea, 25th July ..... 12 days.!From thence to the anchorage off the Pei-hoor Pekin River, 27th July ... .2Macao to Pekin River, in 2 weeks, or 14 days!This voyage can be compared only with that of the Lionon the occasion of the former embassy. The Lion wasnearly three weeks, exclusive of the time at anchor atChusan. We had fine weather and steady south-west winds,with very heavy dews at night. When nearly abreast of thesouth point of Corea, the wind became variable from thesouth-east and southward. In the Yellow Sea we had easterlywinds and no fogs.P

cxvAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.cxv90 leagues.5.Sailed from the anchorage off the Pei-ho on the 1 1th August,18 i6.Arrived at Cheatow Bay, after having coasted from theanchorage along the south side of the Gulf of Pe-che-lee,22d August .. *. . . .11 days.From thence to the harbour of Oei-hai-oei,23d August ...... .1On the coast of Corea the winds were mostly from thenorthward, and the weather uniformly fine, with heavy dewsat night.7.From the south-west end of Corea to the Great LoochooIsland, on the 14th September, 1816, 4 days.From Pekin River to harbour of Oei-hai-oei,1 week 5 days, or .... 12 days.In this cruise round the Gulf of Pe-che-lee we had constant easterly winds, which obliged us to tide the whole way.It blew a gale of wind on the 19th from the north-east, witha high short sea. With this exception, and a fresh breezeon the 3d and 6th, the weather was uniformly fine duringour stay in the Yellow Sea, and we never experienced anyfogs.ow sea to Sailed from Oei-hai-oei, in China, on the 29th August, 1816.Corea 40leagues. Made the islands off the coast of Corea, 1stSeptember . . . . , . . 3 days.Running along the coast of Corea till the 10thSeptember ....... 96.12 days.From Corea to the Great Loo-choo Island we had north,easterly and northerly winds, with one gale from the northward.From Loo-choo to Lintin, off Canton.27th October to the 2d November, 18168.As the north-east monsoon was blowing fresh, this quickpassage was to be expected.From Lemma Islands to Manilla.2d February to the 5th February, 18] 7A good passage for this season of the year.9.Loo-choo toChina, 320China to Manilla, 2003 days, leagues.I

exviAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.cxviiManilla toPenang, 600leagues.10.From Manilla to Prince of Wales's Island.21st February to 8th March, 1817 • • 15 days.Three weeks is said to be a good passage. We beatdown as far as the latitude 11° north, and longitude 87° east,before we hauled across. We had fine weather all the way.Penang to Ben-In the north-east monsoon this is somewhat under theaverage passage.11.From Prince of Wales's Island to Saugor Roads, Bengal.- 13th March to the 27th March, 1817 . 14 days-The average at this season is twenty-one days, consequently this passage is very good. At this season of theyear the north-east monsoon has entirely ceased in thecentre of the Bay of Bengal; so that a ship which steerswell out between the Nicobars and Andamans need notapprehend northerly winds; whereas in the north-easternparts of the bay, the monsoon still blows faintly, with longintervals of calm. A merchant brig, reputed a good sailer,left Prince of Wales's Island 6 days before us, and followedthe inner route, while we went outside, and arrived 10 daysbefore her at Calcutta,I13.From Madras to the Mauritius.1st June to the 1st July, 1817 30 days.•>We were driven by the south-west monsoon as far aslongitude 92° east, before crossing the equator; here we hada constant high swell. We were much baffled, and didnot get the steady south-east trade till in 7° south, andlongitude 88° east. The average passage is between fiveand six weeks at this season of the year.14.leagues.From Mauritius to making the land of Africa, about Manf;ts it°O ' founding rounding tlie theAlgoa Bay. -Cape' Cape, 8C 8008th July to the 22d July, 1817 . . 14 days.Thence to rounding the Cape on the 30th July 8Mauritius till round the Cape, 3 weeks 1 day, or 22 days.leagues.Calcutta toJMadras, 300leagues.12.Sand Heads off Calcutta to Madras, against the southwest monsoon.From 19th April to the 7th May, 1817 - 181 days.The average from the Mauritius to rounding the Cape,is twenty-eight days; on this occasion we kept close inshore : we had no current, and though in the depth of winter/the weather was invariably fine, and the water smooth.At night a breeze generally blew off shore. There was aheavy dew every night.I

cxvmCape to St.Helena, 570leagues.APPENDIX.15.From off the Cape to St. Helena on the llth August . . . . . . i • . 12 days.Mauritius to the Cape (see above) . 22 days.From Mauritius to St. Helena in 4 weeks 6 days, or 34 days.Mauritius to St.Helena, 1370This is an excellent passage. It appears to be a greatobject in making a passage from India to England, to passthe Cape without going in; for it is often easy to round theCape and go to St. Helena, when it is difficult and tediouseither to go to Simon's or Table Bay, and much delay isproduced by the difficulty of getting out of the former anchorage.St. Helena toIreland, 180016.From St. Helena to Ban try Bay in Ireland.Sailed from St. Helena on the 14th August, 1817-Arrived off Ban try Bay, 14th October, 1817 61 days.GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;BEINGA DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKSCOLLECTED ATMACAO AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND ON THE SHORES OFTHE YELLOW SEA, THE WEST COAST OF COREA,,AND THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.This passage was unusually long, owing to a successionof hard gales from north-east to south-east, which we encountered in latitude 47° north, longitude 13° west, beginning on the 27th of September, and continuing, withlittle intermission, till the 8th of October; after which periodthe weather became tine, but the wind hung constantly tothe eastward, so as to render it difficult to fetch Ireland.

mGEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM.IT is greatly to be regretted, that, during this voyage,our means of gaining information on this interesting subjectwere so limited. In China we were restrained, sometimesby the jealousy of the Chinese, and sometimes by an apprehension on our part of giving offence, or of excitingsuspicion, by following up enquiries, the nature of whichit was impossible to explain when interrogated by theinhabitants. On the coast of Corea, the still greater jealousyof the natives rendered it impossible to prosecute geologicalinvestigations beyond the beach. Both in China and onthe coast of Corea our stay at each place was very short,and our time being often, necessarily occupied by avocationsforeign to such enquiries, many opportunities were lostmerely for want of time. Even at the Great Loo-chooIsland, where we remained much longer, our researches wereconfined to a coast which offered nothing interesting.Having therefore nothing of a general or striking nature to offer to the scientific world on this subject, I

-pcxxu APPENDIX.APPENDIX. CXXlllshall merely give an account of the specimens collectedat the various places which we touched at during thisvoyage, accompanied by brief explanations from memorandums made on the spot.The geologist will be struck with the resemblance whichthe rocks in this remote quarter of the globe bear to thosewith which he has been familiarly acquainted.SPECIMENS FROM CHINA.MACAO.1. Granite, composed of white quartz, porcelain clay,and greenish steatite, with veins of white quartz intersectingeach other.2. Fine-grained granite, composed of yellowish feldspar,white quartz, and black mica.Quartz dykes of great magnitude traverse the granitewhich forms this peninsula.HONG-KONG, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS,OFF MACAO.3. Lead-coloured compact quartz rock, with imbeddedcrystals of flesh-coloured feldspar.GREAT LEMMA, ONE OF THE LADRONJS ISLANDS,, OFF MACAO.4. Coarse-grained granite, with distinct crystals offeldspar.ISOUTHERN SHORE OF THE YELLOW SEA.CHE-A-TOW.5. Fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, whitefeldspar, and black mica, with a vein containing hornblendand crystals of feldspar.6. The strata are here very much contorted; the cliffsat some places being folded up like webs of cloth.7. Granular primitive limestone, containing greenishsteatite.8. Quartz rock, alternating with gneiss.9. A specimen containing amorphous pieces of iron.CUNG-CUNG-CIIEEN ISLANDS.10. Very fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz,flesh-coloured feldspar, and black mica.11. Coarser variety of the same.12. Compact blueish-grey feldspar, with grains of quartz.OEI-HAI-OEI.13. Gneiss, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz,and black mica.LUNG-CUNG-TAO ISLANDS.14. Coarser variety of the rock described above.111ifi P

cxxiv APPENDIX.APPENDIX. CX XVWEST COAST OF COREA.From an Island in Latitude 37° 45' North.1. Compact stratified pale-pink lime-stone; variegatedin colour; strata highly inclined.2. Very compact slaty light-grey rock; strata inclinedat an angle of 75°, dipping towards the north-east.3. Dark olive steatitic rock, containing fragments ofgranular marble.4. Very fine-grained greenish hornblend rock.5. Vine-grained purplish slate; the strata highly inclined.6. Greenish-grey slate, containing crystals of white feldspar and specks of hornblend: strata highly inclined, dipping towards the north-east.SPECIMENS I'ROM H UTTON S ISLAND, COAST OS COREA.Latitude 36° 10' north, longitude 126° 13' east.The following note is taken from the narrative at page 8.We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grainedgranite *; the middle of the island of a brittle micaceousschistus of a deep blue colour-f-; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to the south-west. This body ofstrata is cut across by a granite dyke J, at some places fortyfeet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in the vicinityIof the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner:this dislocation and contortion does not extend far from thewalls of the dyke, though veins of granite branch out from itto a great distance, varying in width from three feet to thehundredth part of an inch: the dyke is visible from the topof the cliff to the water's edge, but does not re-appear onthe corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it, thoughdistant only thirty yards. This island is composed of thesame schistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whindyke *, four feet wide, the planes of whose sides lie northeast and south-west, being at right angles to those of thegreat granite dyke in the neighbourhood, which run southeast and north-west. The strata contiguous to the whindyke are a good deal twisted and broken, but not in thesame degree as at their contact with the granite dyke.The whin dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laidacross in the usual way.Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at thedistance of only forty or fifty feet, we came to an islandrising abruptly out of the sea, and presenting a high ruggedcliff of breccia -f-, fronting that on which the granite dykeis so conspicuous : the junction of this rock with the schistuscut by the granite and the whin would have been interesting;but although we must have been at times within a few yardsof it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea.The whole of the south-west end of this island is formedof breccia, being an assemblage of angular and water-wornpieces of schistus, quartz, and some other rocks, the wholei> IJSpecimen 7, infra. •f- Specimen 8. Specimen 10.* Specimen 11, infra. •f- Specimen 9.

CXXV1APPENDIX.having the appearance of a great shingle beach and cliffs.The fragments of the schistus in this rock are similar to thatwhich forms the cliff first spoken of, (Specimen 8.)The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was,that the lower part of the great mass of strata which nowforms the centre of the island was formerly at the bottomof the ocean; and that the western part, now a firm breccia,had been a beach of shingle produced by the action of thewaves on the upper strata, which may have formed a coastabove the sea: the granite of the eastern end of the islandhad been forced into its present situation from beneath thestrata, with sufficient violence to dislocate and contort thebeds nearest to it, and to inject the liquid granite into therents formed by the heaving action of the strata as theywere raised up. It is natural to suppose that the raggededges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks wouldbe subjected to a grinding action, from which the stratamore remote might be exempted; and in this way we mayaccount for the extraordinary twisting, and separation ofmasses along the whole course of the granite dyke. In thedyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, there arenumerous insulated portions of schistus. .That this last wassoftened, seems to follow from the frequent instances whichoccur of its being bent back upon itself without producingcracks. The same heat, generated by the melted granitein the neighbourhood, and which appears to have been justsufficient to soften the schistus, may be supposed to havereduced the shingle beach to a state of semifusion by theaid of some flux contained in the sand scattered amongstthe fragments. We could not discover any circumstancerAPPENDIX,cxxvuby which the relative antiquity of the two dykes mentionedabove could be inferred.The junction of the granite and schistus above described,resembles very much the well known junction at theLowrinmountain, in Galloway, described by my father, Sir JamesHall, in the 7th vol. of the Edinburgh Transactions. It isalso very like the junctions at the Cape of Good Hope,described in the same volume. The same theory has beenfound to explain them all.Specimen 7. Fine-grained granite, composed of whitequartz, white feldspar, and olive-green mica. This rock (7)forms the eastern end of the island; the schistus nextdescribed (8) the centre, and the breccia mentioned immediately afterwards (9) the western end.8. Fine-grained compact micaceous schistus: some ofthe specimens appear to contain plumbago. The stratalie north-west and south-east, dipping only a few degreesfrom the horizontal line.Q. Breccia, composed of angular and contorted fragments of micaceous schistus, and angular pieces of feldsparand quartz. This rock forms the western end of Hutton'sIsland *: it rises in high rugged cliffs. The angular piecesof schistus are of a similar rock to that described above (8).10. Dyke, porphyritic granite, composed of white quartz,white feldspar, and bronze-coloured mica. This dyke cutsacross the schistus last mentioned, in a direction north-east* The island above described was so named by Captain Maxwell, .inxxmfcpliment to the memory of the distinguished philosopher whose theory Jiag beenused to explain the curious phenomena which it exhibits.

cxxviiiAPPENDIX.APPENDIX.CXX1Xand south-west. It is nearly vertical, and varies in breadthfrom nine to forty feet, with numerous ramifications.11. Dyke of compact whin stone. This dyke is composed of five layers of prisms, whose length is at rightangles to the walls of the dyke. It is nearly vertical. Itsdirection north and south, and is about five feet thick.MAIN LAND OF COREA.12. Lead-coloured, fine-grained, micaceous schistus.From the main land of Corea, latitude 36° 10' north, longitude 126° 48' east. The strata lie north-west and southeast, and are nearly vertical; the natives objected to ourexamining the cliffs, though distant less than a quarter ofa mile from the beach.ANOTHER ISLAND OFF THE COAST OF COREA.Latitude 34° 23' north, longitude 126° east.13. Decomposing fine-grained rock ; composed of fleshcolouredfeldspar, white quartz, and porcelain clay.ANOTHER ISLAND NEAR THE ABOVE.14. Rock composed of white feldspar and quartz, Thestrata of this rock were very much contorted.This rock is the most general of any in this range ofislands, at least as far as we had opportunities of examiningthem. The islands on this coast are very numerous; theylie in great clusters along a line of three degrees and a halfof latitude. The islands vary in length from five or sixmiles to as many yards, and are of all forms. We sawnone that were remarkably high, and none which seemedvolcanic. As our stay on the coast was only nine days,and as the ships were almost always under weigh exceptat night, it was quite impossible to make any careful orvaluable geological observations. It offers a splendid fieldto future voyagers.GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.\. Grey stratified lime-stone without shells. This specimen was taken from the north end of the island, wherethe ranges of hills were mostly composed of it: the stratabeing highly inclined. The hills rise to the height of fouror five hundred feet, and present nothing interesting.2. Fawn-coloured, cellular, granular limestone. Thecliffs at Napakiang are composed of this rock; it alsoappears to stretch along the whole of the south-west andsouth parts of the coast. In the narrative, this rock hasbeen erroneously called coral. These cliffs are curiouslyhollowed out into horizontal caves, which have all the appearance of having been worn by the dashing of the waves;but as it is obvious, that in their present situation the seacan never have reached the face of the cliffs, it seems probable that the whole coast, may have been raised up, by agentle movement, without dislocating the strata, or disturbing the horizontal position, in which it seems probablethat these caves were formed.The variety of coralines which girt the shores of thisisland was very great, and large collections were made, aswell of these as of the numerous zoophites which filled upevery part of the reefs below high-water mark. This col-

cxxx APPENDIX.lection, of which unfortunately no duplicates were kept,was afterwards lost.SULPHUR ISLANDLies in latitude 27° 5' north, and longitude 128° 25' east.An accurate representation of it is given as a frontispiece.We attempted to land, but the surf broke every whereso high against the rock that this was impossible. There isa crater on the left side with white smoke issuing from it;this has a strong sulphuric smell. The sides of the craterare stratified. The south end of the island is about four orfive hundred feet high, and is formed of a dark dingy redrock distinctly stratified; at several places it is cut vertically by great dykes, which being more durable than thestrata which they intersect, stand out from the face of thecliffs to a considerable distance.VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGESPOKEN ATTHE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, IN THEJAPAN SEA.COMPILED BITHERBERT JOHN CLIFFORD, ESQ.LIEUTENANT, ROYAL NAVY.IN TWO PARTS.END OF THE APPENDIX.VOCABULARY.

OBSERVATIONSONTHE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.IOr the grammar of this language I pretend to little knowledge, but the following observations upon some points mayperhaps be worth attending to. The most striking circumstance, is the frequent use of the words woo and ka; theformer of which seems to signify of, or the 's of the Englishlanguage, as will appear in choo noo ka, a man's skin, or theskin of a man; ooshee nod stinnoo, the bullock's horn, orthe horn of the bullock; and in moo noo kee saw'teeyoong,to dig potatoes out of the ground, or, literally, potatoes ofthe earth to dig out.Ka, it will be observed, is used to denote skin, and alsoseems to signify a receiver or enclosure, as is expressed inthe words me&zee ka, a well of water, meezee being water,and ka, the place containing the water; and in ya kasaut eSchoong, to go out of a place, ka in this instance expressing the enclosure, ya you, and sawt etchoong to go outfrom, as e£choong signifies to go.The adjective is for the most part placed before the subrP

V vOBSERVATIONS.stantive, as teeshodee ickkeega, an old man; w&sa ya, a meanhouse; and wockka inn&go, a young woman.There is little variety in the termination of the verb, thetenses being expressed by other means. I have throughoutthe vocabulary considered the termination oong to denotethe infinitive, and have translated it as such, even when thesense points to another mood, merely to preserve consistency ; there are, however, a few exceptions to this, andsome of the verbs will be found to terminate in ang, ing,awng, ong, and ung. Those ending in oong seem generallyto make the participle terminate in ee, as wockkayoong, toseparate, makes the participle wdckkatee, separated. Thenegative termination of the verb is generally nang or rang,as no6mang, not to drink, is the negative of nodmoong, todrink; me6rang, the' negative of me6oong, to see; andnooboorang, the negative of noobooyoong, to climb or ascend.Na is also used as a negative, coonsoona, not to rub out,being the negative of coonshoong, to rub out.Nang, ndrang, and n&shee are negatives used with a substantive, and are always placed after it, as ko6moo nang, noclouds; metzee n&rang, no water; and fctyee ndshee, nobeard.Some peculiarities will be found by referring to the following words: deaf; the sole of the foot; head-ache; palmof the hand; the toe; and the wrist.IIPART I.VOCABULARYOFENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO WORDSALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED,WITH NOTES, AND OCCASIONAL REFERENCES TO THE SENTENCESIN THE SECOND PART.

VOCABULARYOF THELOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Note on the orthography used in the following vocabulary.-—The sounds in theLoo-Choo words are expressed by the letters which in English correspondnearest to those sounds. There are no mute vowels. The letter a is invariably sounded as in the English word^r. The emphasis is marked byan accent over the last vowel of the accented syllable. Ee and oo, whetheraccented or not, always express one syllable.English.Above, or the top of a thingAliveAlive, to beAll (every one)All drink, every one drinksAnchorAngryAnkleAnswer, toArmArrowAwake, toAwakingBadBad manBad buildingLoo-Choo.- Wee.- Itch-it'chee.- It'ch-chawng.- E6nea, or I'gnea (Italian gn *.)- I'gnea noodung.- Eeki.- Neetsa.- Sh&nna go o6shee.- Aree ga aanyoong.- Teenoo.- Eea.- O6king.- O6catee.- Nedsha.- Yawna moon, or Y«inna choo.- ' Wasa ya.* This sound is the same as the Italian gn, and will be found in the words Gtiqfing, sig-' nifying more; Quangning, a man of rank; and also in Neesa, bad, and Nee, two, which aremost commonly pronounced as if a g were prefixed to the ».

English.Bailer of a canoeBaize, redBake, toBake bread, to -Bamboo-caneBamboo (instrument of punishment)BasketBeadsBeardBeardlessBeat, to ...——, as the heart—— on the gong—— to, with the bambooBedBell - - -BellyBelly, bigBelow, or the bottom of a thingBend to, a tbingBirdBird-cage - - -Bishop at chess (lit. priest)Bite to, as a dogBitterBlackBleed, to, (lit. to draw blood)BlindBlind manBlockBloodBlow up, to, or light a fireVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo.Yoo-to6ee.Mooshung.1'rreechang.Qu&shee sookooyoong.Dakee.Bo6chee.Teeixx>.Tamma.Feejee.Feejee nashee.So6-go-yoong.Nacoo-choong.Tanna 6choong (lit. to play on the gong.)Chibbee o&tchoong.Coocha.St'chee-gSnnee.Watta.W6tta magesa.Stcha.Tammeeoong.Hotoo.H6too-coo.Bodsee, or Bodice *.Cooyoong -f.Injassa.Korosa.Chee-hooga-choong.Meegua.Akee meegua.Kooro&ma.CheeJ.Fo6-tchoong.* The o in this word is sounded as in the English word Bode.f See sentence No. 101, Part II.+ This word also signifies milk, and the female breast.English,Blowing (through a musical instrument)Blue (colour)Blue (light colour)BluntBlush (lit. red)BoatBoat, the bottom of aBoil, to -BookBone -Bonnet, or head-dress worn by the jnatives ^Both alike, or all the sameBow to, to a person passingBow ...Bow, to pull a - -Bower -Boy (lit. a man child)Brass -Bread ...Bread-basket, or trayBreadthBreak, to, a stick————— a tea-cupBreakersBreastBreathe, toBridgeBring hereLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Chpo.Gacoo.Tama-eeroo.Meez-eeroo.Chirrarung.Akassa.Timma, or Sabannee.Nakamma.Tajeeing.Sheemootsee *.Co&tsee.iHat'chee Mat'chee.Neechawng, or Yo&noomoong.De£shoong.Yoomee.Yoomee feetchoong.Tannan.Ic'kkeega warrabee.Cheejackko, or Toong.Quashee.Qudshee boong.Habba.O&yoong •}•.Wy'oong.Namee.Mo&nee.It'chee shoongj.Hdshee§.Moot'chee coo.* In speaking of books with reference to their number, they say teetesee sheemootsee, onebook; latesee sheemootsee, two books j but of a single book they only say sheemootsee; andwe never found that they had any plural termination.•f See sentence No. 111.J There is a great similarity between this word and that which signifies to be alive, (Itch-chawng).§ This word signifies both a ladder and a bridge.B

English.Bring fire hereBrinjal (an Indian vegetable)BrokeBrotherBucketBullBurn, toButterflyButtonBy and byCake, a sweet floweredCalfCalf of the legCandleCandlestickCandle and stick togetherCannonCapCarpenter's black line box| Carry to, or take away—————, a basket on the head——————, a child in the arms-, with a bar on the shoulders jCarrying a basket on the armCaskCastleCatCat, to mew as aCatch, toCatch, to, a butterflyChairCharcoalVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo.Feetootee coo.Nasibbee.Ootee, or Chirreetee.We6kee.Tagoo.Woo Ooshee.Yaddee, or A'kka,Habaroo.Hogannee, or k&nnee.A'tookara *.Magia quashee.Ooshee gua.Ko&nda.Daw.So&coo -J-.Daw'secoo.I'shee-beea.Cammo6dee, or Maw'tsee.Stinseeboo.Mo&tchee eechoong.T6eroo k&mmeetong j.D&choong.Katam'meeoong.Teeroo tenakikakittee.So&coo.Eego6secoo, or Gooseecoo.Mia, or My'a (Chinese).Nachoong deong.Kao&toochung.Kab&roo skelidang.Ee (Chinese).CMcheejing.* See Sentences Nos. 25 and 41.•J- This word signifies both a cask and a candlestick.J See Sentence No. 70.English.CheeksCheese (literally cow's milk and fat)Chessmen -Child (infant) - - -Child, male (literally man-child)Child, female (literally woman-child)Children -ChinChin, the beard of the (lit. lower beard)ChopsticksClimb, to, a pine-treeCloth, or clothesCloth, red -Clouds -CockCocoa-nut tree - -Cocoa-nuts -ColdCold water i«Colours - - -Come, to -Come here -Come, to, down a hill————— on boardComing up from belowCompass -Conk shell -Cool -CopperLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo.Hoo.Ooshee noo * chee qiiatee.Cho&njee.Worrabee.I'ckkeega worrabee.Inn&go worrabee.Qua.Oooto6ga.Stcha feejee.F&shay, or May'shung.Matsee kee noobooyoong.Ching.Ak&ssa n&noo.Koomoo.Tooee.Nash'ikee. ,Naee.Feesa.Fe6zeeroo Meezee.Eeroo eeroo.Choong -J-.Cung coo.O6deeyoong.Cho&-oong.Noobo6teecoo.Kdrahigh, or KSssee tooee J.Ne6nya go6roo.Seedisha.Aco&gannee.* Noo seems to express of, or the 's used in the English langnage: as Ooshee noo chee,the cow's milk, or the milk of the cow; Ooshee noo ka, the bullock's skin, or the skin ofthe bullock; Doochoonoo choe, Loo-choo's people, or the people of Loo-choo; and will befound in a variety of other instances.f See Sentences Nos. 18, 1Q, and 21.J The compass was generally called Jfussee tooee, which two words signify wind and acock or fowl; but the landsmen called it Jfarahigh, which signifies a watch.

English.CoralCover, to, over with sandCough, to -Count, toCountryCowCrabCrab, to crawl as aCreep, toCrow, to -CrowCry, toCurlewCut, toDanceDarkDaughterDay (at Napakiang)—— (in the north of the island)—— after to-morrow—— the followingDaylightDeadDeaf (literally, ear not to hear)DeepDeity (the Indian God Boudha)DiceDice, to play withDie, to -Dig, to, up the ground————, potatoesDirectly (by and by)VOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo.- O6roo.- Sinna shee&stang.- S£ck-quee.- Oohaw'koo-oong *.- A'whfee.- Mee O&shee.- Gaannee.- H&yoong.- Haw'yoong.- O'tayoong.- Garrasee.- Nachoong.- U'nguainan.- Cheeoong, or feeoong, or feejoong.- Oodo6ee, or Makfrtta.- Co6rasirig.- Inndgo oongua, or ungua.- Nit'cheef-- 1'sheeree.- As&ttee.- As£ tinnacha.- Heeroo.- Sheenoong, or gang.- Mimmee chee karung.- Fookfesa.- Bo6sa (Chinese).- Sheego ro6coo.- Sheego roocoo ochoong.- Nintoong.- O6choong.- Moo noo kee sauteeyoong.- Atookar'ree, or AtooMra.* This is probably Oowhoko, signifying a great many persons.t The day at Loo-Choo is divided into six hours, as also the night. In counting a numberof days they apply the numerals in a similar manner to that which will be found in a note onTwitchee, an hour j but they did not seem to have any names to denote the days of the week.English.Dive, to, under waterDogDog barksDon't stir (said to a persondepart)DoorDraw, to, a picture————— bloodDress, toDrinkDrink, to -wine————, not to, wineDrop, to, a thingDrunk————, to getDry, to————, powderDung, cow, for manureDuck, a tameEagleEar——, left——, rightEars, to pull theEarthEastEat, to——, I——, to, boiled riceLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo.- Seenoong.- Ing-- I'nnoo nachoong.rising to? fWfay'i 'sa*.- Hashirree.- Ee-katchoong-J-.- Chee na hy'oong.- Ching cheeoong.- *No6moo.- No6moongJ.- Sack'kee no6moong.- Sack'kee no6mang.- Ooche£rooshoong.- We£tee§.- Weeoong.- KaracMoong.- Eenshoo fo6shoong.- O6shee noo co6soo.- A'feeroo.- Hack'ka.- Mimmee.- Fee'jeeree noo mimmee.- Meejeree noo mimmee.- Mimmee feeoong, or fe£tchoong.- Jee.- Fing&ssee.- Kfonoong ||.- Mo6noo kfonoong.- Meeshee kamoong, or k&noung.* This word is generally used by the master of the house when his guest announces hisintended departure, by saying, Cung, cung.•}• See Sentences Nos. 74 and 76.J See Sentences Nos. 2Q, 32, 33, and 3?.§ See Sentences Nos. 24 and 107.|| See Sentences Nos. 31, 36, and 37.

EggsEight 'Eighteen -EightyElbow -English.Eleven -Empty, to, or pour outEnds of a thingEvery thingExchange, to, fansExclamation of surpriseVOCABULARY OF THEExpression of respect, or salutation - Taw.")———————thanks in returning any~jthingEyeEyebrowsEyelashesEyes, to open the— — , closing theFaceFall, to -Fan—— , to, one's self—— , to offer aFatFatherFeathers of a fowlLoo-Choo.- Cooga.f * Kwat'chee, or fat'chee (Loo-Choo);\ Eeyat'see (Japan.)- Kwat'chee joo, or fat'chee joo.- Hapdck coo, or Habback coo.- Teeiioo feejee.- Too.- H&rashoong.- Yo6koo.- A'dee-coodee -f- ?- Kayra.- Yeeah, or Che6-oo-oo.J How.- Mee.- Mai-oh.- Matsidjee.- Mee ho6ra choong.- Neebo6ee.- Steera, or Skeera j.- Tawshoong, or Taw'ring§.- O'jee.- Ojeeshoong.- O'jee kara.- Quaitee.- Shoo.- Tooee noo han'nee.* See Numerals, Loo-Choo and Japan, Part II. after the Sentences.t This word, which is composed of addee, this, and coodee, that, I am not positive of,and I have therefore affixed a query against it.J This is a very difficult word to pronounce, and I am not certain of having conveyed itstrue sound.§ See Sentence No. 111.English.FemaleFence of bambooFiddle———•, to play on the——— stringsFifteenFiftyFill, to . -Find, toFinger———, fore———, little———, middle——— ringFire——, to put out——, to, a gunFish———, a small———————— blueish——, a large red———, the back of a——, the fin of a——, the gills of a———, the head of a———, the tail of a——, to catch——— hook and line——— spearFive———sided figureLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo.- Mee.- Dack'kee gat'chee.- Nedshing.- Feetchoong (lit. to pull.)- Cheeroo.- Go6njoo.- Gooshacoo, or gooyacoo.- I'ddeecoong.- To6matung *;- Ee"bee.- Choo shdshee.- ESbeegwaw.- Nack'ka e£bee.. - Nanna shee.r Thimmee.- Fee.- Fee cha-chee.- Narashoong.- Eeof.- Coosa eeo.- Tamung eeo.- Matchee eeo.- Kanjee.- Hannay.- Ajee.- Chee-boo-soo.- Dzoo.- Eeo kakeeoong.- Cheena.- E6o stit'chee.- Goo (Loo-Choo); Ittitsee (Japan) J.- Roo-ka-coo.* See Sentence No. -55.t See Sentence No. 20.J See note on Numerals.

FlagFlail*English.FleshFlesh, noFlower, a red, the name ofFlower of a plantFlute, to play on theFlyFly, to, as a birdFoot———, the sole of the———, of a birdForeheadForty - - -FourFour-sided figureFourteenFriendFrogFull——, halfGet upGirdleGirlGive, to - -GlassGo, to———, away,———, in a boatVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo.- Hata.- Co6ra ma baw *.- Shishee.- Shishee ning.- A'ckka banna.- Fanna.- Hanshaw.- Hayeh.- Toobeeoong.- Shanna.- SMnna watta (lit. belly of the foot).- Fisha.- Fitchayeh.- Speeakoo, or Sabacoo.IfShee (Loo-Choo); E6ots see, or joo( (Japan).- Sicca Co6dair.- She6njoo.- Eedo6shee.- A'tta beetsee.- Meetchittee.- Ham'boong.- Ta-tee.- O'bee.- Tack'kee.- Que^oongj.- Kagung.- E6choong§.- Haddee.- Timma ki eechoong.* The nearest sound to that of flail which a native of Loo-Choo could utter was that ofFreyroo; generally speaking they found great difficulty in pronouncing English words. Thenearest sound to that of our / was Airoo, and to that of ml was Bayroo,t See note on Numerals.J See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.§ The intention of departing from a house is generally announced by Cung, cung.English.Go, to, fast———, up a hill——, not to, up a hill——, to, s^w————, on shoreGoat———,he———, sheGoing down belowGoldGood (for eating)——— (proper)—— man——— bye (taking leave)—— for nothing——, notGrand-childrenGrass——, to cutGrasshopperGraveGreybeardGreat coat (made of straw,by the Chinese)Great man (Chinese Tajin)—i—— manyGreenGrind, to, the teethGroaningHairHammer——— of a stone-cutterLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo.- Hayee sit'choong.- No6booyoong (lit. to climb^.- No6boorang.-• Yaw'na eechoong.- Amaki e&hoong, or mo6doe£ong.- Feeja,- Woo Fee"ja.- Mee Feeja.- O6rittee coo.- Ching.- Masa.- Choorasa.- Yookachoo, or E&hoo.- W6ckkatee.- Maconarang.- Worro6sa.- Soong maga.- Goosit'chee, or CoosS.- CoosS che£oong.- Shee"to, or Sayeh.- Haka.- Feejee sheer^jee.worn also)^New.-- A'jee, or Paychin.- Oowh6ko.- O'sa.- Ha gissee gissee.- Do6nee.- Kurrazzee *.- Go6shung.- 06noo.* The hair of the natives is formed into a knot on the crown of the head, and fastened bytwo pins of silver or brass, the one ornamented by a flowered head, called kamma-shishee, andthe other oostiee-thushee. that worn by the children is called jeefa.C

Hand———, right——, leftEnglish,HandkerchiefHandsomeHarpHat, worn by the natives—————————— EnglishHave not got• waterHead, humanHead-ache (lit. sick head)Head, of a birdHear, to——,1——, I cannot (or understand)HeartHeaven————, praying toHeavyHeel of the footHereHide, to, or cover (lit. cannot see)—— of a bullockHim (a third person)HipsVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Ckott.Kee*.Meejeeree.Feejeeree.Tee-sddjee -f-.Choor&sa.San'gshing.Kdssa.Kamo6ree.Nang J, or Ndrang.Me6zee § ndrang.Boosee.Seebo6roo yddong.Tseebo6roo.Sit'choong, or Skit'choong.Mo6noo sit'choong ||.Sit'cheerang, or Sit'cheekdrang.Nacoo.Ting.Ting o6neewhfa

English.Inches, ten ;InfantInkInkstandInside———, or soft of breadIronJump, toKeyKick, to, with the footKid (lit. small goat)Kill, to————, birds————, by the fire of a gunKing, or monarchKing's palaceKiss, to, (lit. kissing the mouth)KissKneeKneel, to -KneelingKnife, crooked, for cutting grass———, small (a penknife)Knight, at chessKnot———, to tie aKnucklesLacker, toLadderLake, or light purpleLand, or shoreLantern• ••", foldingVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo,- EesMckkoo.- W6rrabee.- Sim'mee.- Sim'mee shee.- O6chee.- Mee.- Titzee.- M6yoong.- Quaw.- King.- Fe6ja agua.- Sheemoong, or Ko6rashoong !- H6too e6chung.- Doogaitee sheenoung.- K6wung (Chinese).Oogo6s-coo.- Co6chee spootee -f-.- Sheemir'ree.- Stinsee.- Shumma git'cheeoong.- Shumma git'chee.- Eeranna.- Seego.- Samo6ree.- Co6nja cootchee.- Co6njoong.- Fo6shee.- No6yoong.- Hashee.- Coonmo61a sat'chee.- Amdki.- Tindoo.- Chawching.* See Sentence No. 96.t See Sentence No. Qfl.English.Lantern, glassLargeLaugh, toLaughingLead (metal)Leaf (of a tree)——, green (lit. the leaf of a tree)——, withered (lit. a dried leaf)Lean (not fat)———, to, against a thingLearning, or studyingLet, to, fall a thingLetter, or character————, to seal a———-, to write aLetting go a thingLoo-Choo songLift, to, a thingLight, not dark (daylight)———, not heavy———, to, a pipeLipsLip, lower——, upper——, the beard on the lowerLiquorLive, or reside, toLizardLook, or see, to.——, to, at, or see the sun-, at a distanceLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo,- T«imma-do6roo.- We6sa.- Warrayoong.- Warratee.- Meejee kan'nee.- Wha.- Kee noo wha.- Karree wha.- Yaitee.- Yookatatoong *.- Cootooba -f-.- Nageeoong.- Jee.- Ing sit'choong.- Jee katehoong.- O'too batch J.- Lo6choo, or Do6choo o6ta.- Mo6choong.- Feeroo, or Heeroo.- Gasa.- Sheeoong.- Seeba.- Stit'cha seeba.- Quaw seeba.- Coofeejee.- Sac'kkeedia, or Sam'tchoo (Chinese),- Sim'matong §.- U'ndlecha.- Meeoong, or Meeing |f.- Teeda meeing.- Han'na-rat'chee.* See Sentence No. 101.f See Sentence No. 6.J See note, " Holding a thing."§ See Sentences Nos. 81 and 82.|| See Sentences Nos. 38 to 44.

English.Look, to, closelyLooking-glassLong, or lengthLose, toMake, to, clothes—————, a noise-, a rope-, saltsugar—————, a tea-potMaking a false stepMaleMallet, woodenMan (homo)—— (vir)——, medical———, of rank——, short-, the skin of a-, smallMast of a ship, or boatMat -Match, or fire-stick used in the templesMe, or IMeal, 1st (at sun-rise)——, 2nd (two hours after)VOCABULARY OF THELoo-Cfioo,Te£tsheeoong.Kagung.Nagasa.Ooioochung.Ching n&wyoong *.Hdbbeecoong.Che£na o6tchoong -f-.Mdshoo t&tchoong.SSta skoyoongj.Tacoo sookooyoongj.Koonsinda dakat'chee.Woo.Chee-chee.Choo.I'ckkeega §.I'shsha.Paychin, or Qudngning (Chinese).Injasa.I'ckkeega yadong.Choo-noo-ka.Feecoosa.Hasseeda.Mooshooroo, or Hatung.Kaw ||.Wang. 'Stim'mee teemoong.A'ssa bung.* Literally to sew clothes,f Literally to work rope.J Skoyoong, or Sookooyoong, signifies to bake.§ This word, which is composed ofickkee and ya (ickkee signifying there, and ga, whichmay possibly have been originally ya, you), appeared to me to bear a similar meaning to ouryou, sir, or you, there, as the natives invariably called out ickkeega, when wishing to attractthe attention of any one.|| See note on the kawrou. The kaw is also burned when an offering of rice is made onthe kaiano.EngllsJi.Meal, 3rd (at noon)——, 4th (at sunset)Measure, toMelonMen, a great manyMew, to, as a catMidday, or noonMilk———, to drawMillionMine • -MixedMoon, the———, or month, one———, full———, halfMonkeyMoreMorrowMother -MudMusical instrument, to play on aLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo.- Fe£ra mo6moong.- Yoo bung.- Gdwjee h&ckkiyoong.- Tooqua.- Oowhoko Ickkeega.- Nachoong deeoong.- Tetida matchoo.- Chee.- Chee hayoong.- Chaw.- Co6ra wa moong.- Batee.- Stchay.- It'chee stifchee, or gwadtsee *.- Oostit'chee, or Maroo.- M6casit'chee.- Saroo.- Gnafing.- A'cha.- Um'ma.-' Do6roo.- . Kootoo fetitchoong.* The following are the names of the months or moons.January - - Shaw gwautsee.February - - Nee gwautsee (lit. 2d month).March ... Sang gwautsee (lit. 3d).April ... Shee gwautsee (lit-4th).May - - Goo gwautsee (lit. 5th).June - - - Roocoo gwautsee (lit. 6th).July - . Sitchee gwautsee (lit. 7th).August - - - Fatchee gwautsee (lit. 8th).September - - Coo gwautsee (lit. Qth).October - Joo gwautsee (lit. 10th).November - - Shee moo stitchee, or joo itchee gwautsee.December ... Shee wasee, or joo nee gwautsee.The twentieth day of the tenth month (October), Joo gwautsee, netjoo nitckee, was,according to Loo-Chpo time, the second day of the tenth month, Joo -gwautsee, nee nitctee.

English.MustachiosNail to hang things onNakedName-, short (lit. no neck)Offer, to-, winemore, or againVOCABULARY OF THELoo-C?ioo.Wa feejee.Co6jee.Harrdka.Na.Wa na.Ya na.A'rree ga na.Whoosoo *.Co6bee.Coobee nang -f-.Hayee skfttee,Sheebee.Yooroo.It'chee yooroo.CooJ (Loo-Choo), Ko6nitsee (Japan).Co6njoo.Coohacoo, or Queeshacoo,Chee.O6ngba, or Oomba §.Najeechoong.Cheeta.H6nna.H6nnakee.Hacac'koo.Ozagadee,Ozagadee sac'kkee.Matta ozagadee.Teeshooee.Teeshooee ic'kkeega.Karang.« A strong aspirate on the first syllable,•f- The negative is almost invariably placed after the word.J See note on numerals.§ The sound of the oong, or oom.li, is very difficult, and can only be approximated byclosing the teeth firmly and compressing the souud of oong.OneEnglish.OnionsOpen, to, or unlockOpen itOrange, fruit————, the rind of an————, divisions————, the seed of anOverturn, to, or upsetOutside -———— of bread (lit skin)Paddle of a canoePaint, to - - -Palanquin chairPalm of the hand (lit. belly of the hand)Pant, to -PantingPaper of any kindPathPaupaw applePawns at chessPencil -PerspirationPepper podPick up any thing, toPicturePig ...LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo,f It'chee (Loo-Choo), Te6tesee, or ta(. (Japan *.)Dehchaw.A'keeoong -f-.Akirree -[-.Kooneeboo.Kooneeboo noo ka.Mee.Tanee.Kooroobashoong.Fooca.Ka.Wayacoo.OorooJ sheenoostang.Kagoo.Tee noo watta §-Eetchee hootoong.Eetchee.Kabee.Yamana meetchee.Wangshooee.Toomoo.Hoodee.Ac'kkaddee ||.Quada coosha.Moochoong..Ke6-ee, or Kackke£-ee.Bo6ta.* See note on Numerals.t See Sentences Nos. 4Q to 63.J Sheenoostang signifies to cover over, and possibly ooroo should have been written eeroo,which is colour; and this word, signifying pbinling, would then be literally to cover over withcolour.§ This is literally the Icily ttf the hand, or the hand's belly. For an explanation of thenoo see observations on the Loo-Choo language at the beginning.|| This word seems to derive its origin from ackkd, lurnmg.

VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.English.Pin worn in the hair of boys—— flower head worn by men——, ladle head, do.Pinch, to - -Pine, the wild———, leaves of the———, fruit of the—— treePipe———, the mouth-piece of a——, wooden part of a———, bowl of a———, case of a ,Pitchfork -Pivot on which the scull of aboat traversesPlace -Plank of a boatPlant - -Plantain, leaf of aPlay, to, at chess-, with dice-, on a musical instrument-,. on the flute-, on the violinPleasedPlough-,toLoo-Choo.Jeepha, or Jeewa.Kam'mashishee.Oosheethiishee.Kcitcheemeeoong *.Adannee.Wha.Adannee nay.Matesee kee.Shirree.Quee co6tchee.Saw.Sarra.Shirree booko6roo.Feera.Jeeco -J-.Skata.FannaJ.Mee boosha.Woo noo fa.Choonjee 6choong.Sheego ro6coo 6choong.Kootoo fe£tchoong §.Hanshaw.Feetchoong.Oosha.Sit'chee.Sit'choong.* This word, Katcheemeeoong, to pinch, appears to be formed of the words Ka, skin,cliee, blood, and meeoong, to see; and may be translated to see the Hood through the sJtin, or. in the skin.t This sound is not unlike that which the screwing about the scull of a boat on the pivotcauses.J The same word signifies a flower.§ Feetchoong signifies to pull, so that it may with more propriety be applied to the harp,or touching the strings of the violin with the fingers.English.Point, to, with the fingerPotatoes, sweetPour in, to——— out, toPouringPraying to the Deity———— to HeavenPowder«————, to dry or ail-PregnantPress, to, or squeezePrick, to, with a knifePrickingPrickly pear bushPriest (Bonzes of China)———, the silk dress of a————, the cotton dress of a———, the belt of silk of aPull, to, or draw out -1————, out of the ground————, a personPurplePush, to, with the handPut, to, a thing above or upright————•—, up a thing above, high————, on the hat————, or lay a thing down————, a thing in————————— under————, on clothes—————, out fire————, a ring on the fingerLoo-Choo.- No6choong.- Moo, or Mo6ndee.- I'rreeing.- Cheejoong.- Cheejee.- Bo6sa, or Bosa meewhfa *.- Ting o6neewhfa.- Eenshoo.- Eenshoo fooshoong.- Kassee jeetawng.- She£tskeeoong,- Hoogashoong-j-.- Yatee.- Cooroojee.- B6dzee.- Eechoo co6room.- Basha co&room.- Quara.- Injat'chee.- Noojoong.- Feetchoong, or fit'choong.- Mo&la sat'chee.- Ko&roo bashoong f.- I'sheeoong.- Injashoong.- Kanjoong.- Oocheeking.- I'ttee.- Kasseemeeoong.- Ching chee'oong.- Fee chachee.- Eebee gannee sashoong.* A strong aspirate on the last syllable,f See Sentence No. 105.J Literally, to upset.

VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGEEnglish.Quack, to, like a duckQuarrel, toQueen, also at chessQuickQuick, to beRain——,to ' -———, heavy———, lightlyRainbowRatRead, to .RedRind of a shaddock————— an orange——— (lit. skin)Ribbon, silkRibsRice———, boiledRide, to, a horseRight, in writing charactersRing——— for the finger———, to put on aRise, to, from a chairRoadRockRoot (bulb) . -Rope———, to makeRough , i.Round———, a circle- Nachoong.- Titskoong.- O6najerra.- Hayee.- YooMoong.- A'mee.Loo-Choo.- A'mee fooyoong.- Sheejeekoo fooyoong.- Kookoo fooyoong.- Noo-oojee.- A'ck-a-sa.- Yoomoong, or Yoono-oong.- Akasa.- Pow noo ka.- Kooneeboo noo ka.- Ka.- Eechoo.- Sawkee.- Coomee.- U'mbang, or bang, or oombang *.Man'ayoong.- Kaichee yanjee.- Coosayee.- E6bee gannee.- E6bee gannee sashoong.- Tatchoong.- Meechee.- See, or We6sa is'hee.- Wee-ee.-. Chfnna.- CMnna oochoong.- . So6roo so6roo.- Morroosa.- Maro6dair.For the sound of this word see note on the English word no.EnglisJi.Round, all roundRowing in a boatRub, to————, out————, not out'Rubber, IndianRum, or spiritsRun, toRunningSail of a ship or boatSail, to, in a boatSalt—— water—— to the tasteSalute, to, a personSandSay it, I can———, I cannotSea——, the, or ocean"——, shore——• weed -.——, highSeal of a watchSeam between two planksScrape, toScratchingScrew, toScrewScull of a boatLoo-Choo.Maro6ee.Coqjee.So6sooing, or soosootee o6tooshung.CSeeree ootooshoong, or Soosootee;C. o6teetung, or coonshoong.Coonsoona.Neeka.K6raboo.Hayay sit'choong *.Hayay. fFoo.Harashoong.Mashoo.Spookar^sa Me6zee.Spookarasa.Kameeoong.Sinna.Naraug-}-.Nammee.O6shoo.Hama, or O6mee.Moo j. ,Oonammee.Ing, or Fang.Nago.Sajoong.Weegosa.Meegoorashoong §.Jfrree.Doo.* See Sentence No. 8.t Narang, or nang, is used on most occasions as the negative,J The same word signifies sweet potatoes.§ This word it will be observed signifies both to screw and to. scull; this may originate inthe screwing motion of the oar from side to side of the boat.

VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.English.Scull, to, a boatSee to, or look, (lit. to eye)See, I cannotSeedSeparate, to - -SevenSeventeenSeventyServantSew, toShade, or shadyShake, to -Shaking a thingShallowSharp -Shave, to -ShellShellfish (like a crab)ShieldShip———, large——, small——— goes away—— returnsShoes, or sandalsShortShouldersShrub, with leaves resembling atree, probably sago treeShut, toShut itSkinLoo-Choo.- Meegoorashoong.- Meeoong *.- Meerang.- Nigh.- W6ckkayoong.- Sit'chee (Loo-Choo); Nannatsee (Japan).- Sit'chee joo.- Sit'chee hacoo.- Toomoo, or Eeree, or Sad'ge-ee.- Nawyoong, or No-a-yoong.- Kajee.- Katcheeming. •- Yo&too yo6too.- Aka, or chirraring ?- Sooyoong.- Oosheemaw.- A'mang.- Timbayee.- Hoonee -f-.- Hoobo6nee, or Wes&ra Hoonee.- Ho6nee gua, or Coosara Hoonee.- Hoonee e^choong.- Moochee eechoong.- S6bock, or Sabaugh.- Injasa.- Kutta.palm 3 r Sootitsee.- Meeche6oong.- Mechirree.- Ka.* See Sentences No. 38 to 44.t The similarity in sound of this word to that of a character (Hoonatee) written on apiece of paper in the hats of the men employed working for the ships, has suggested the ideathat the meaning of the character may have some reference to a ship.English.Skin, of a bullock——-, of a manSick——— man——— bellySide, of a person———, of a thingSigh, toSilkSilverSing, toSisterSit down, to, in a chair-, on the ground-, or be seatedSixSixteenSixtySleep, toSleepingSlowSmallSmell, toSmellSmoke, toSmokeSmoking tobaccoSmoothSmooth down, toSnakeSnake stingsSnatch, toLoo-Choo.- O6shee noo ka.- Choo noo ka.- Yadong.- Ic'kkeega yailong.- Watta eddee.- Harraga.- Tattee.- Ho6ee edchee.- Eechoo.- Jing.C O6tashoong, or ootayooshoong, or( o6tayoong.- OViigh.- Eeoong.- Eechawng, or Eeree.- Eemeeshawdee, or E6dee.. Yooco6tee.- Ro6coo (Loo-Choo); Mo6tsee (Japan).- Ro6coojoo.- Rookpackcoo.- Ninjoong.- Nintee.- Yo6na, or Yawna.- Co6sa.- Kannoong, or Kashashoong.- Kabbasha*.- Fo&tchoong, or kootchoong.- Kinsee.- ToMcco fo6kee.- Nandooroosa.- Nadeeyoong.- Hdboo.- Haboo cootee.- Katayoong.* See Sentences Nos. 102 and 103.

VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.English.Sneeze, to - .-Snore, toSnuff (lit. nose tobacco)Sole of the foot (lit. belly of the foot)Son -Song -Sore from ridingSorry - - -Sour - -South -Speak, to -Spear to catch fish withSpectacles (lit. eye-glass)Spider -Spider's web . *-Spit, to . -Spittle ...Spoon - -Spy glass - - -Square -———, of a stone masonSqueeze, to - -Stab, toStand up, toStand back to back -StarsStay on board ship 'Stem of a boat -Stern of a boat -* Words of Loo-Choo songs:Loo-Choo.Honna fe6oong.Nintoong.Spachee, or Honna Tobacco.Shanna w^tta.Ic'kkeega oongua.06ta*.Nautee. ,Natskasha.Seesa.Whfa or fa.Moonooyoong -f-.To6ga o6yoong.Mee kagung.Cooba.Co6ba mang,Simpay-oong.Simpayee. -Kaa.Toomee kagungvKackkoo.Banjaw gaunnee.Mimmeejoong.Choong.Tatteeoong.Coosee no6chasa.Fooshee.Ho6nee ootee.Oomootee.Cooma toomo." Sasa sangcoomeh sangcoomeah kadee yooshee daw, tantoong tantoong tang."A boat song: " Whee-yo ee.—Whee yo ee." The steersman gave " Whee,'' and wasfollowed by the other men with a repetition of " Whee yo ee."Another boat song : " Quee yay hanno ha.—Quee yay hanno ha." To both these airsthe rowers Uept very good time.•f- See Sentences Nos. 1 to 7..English.Stone——— cutter's hammer——•, carvedStopStrawStrike, to -StringStrong——— wineSuckingSugar——— cane———, to makeSulky———, notSunSunsetSunshineSun-riseSwallowingSweet———. wine———. potatoesSwim, toSwimmingSwordA flight of stone stepsA single step- Is'hee.- Oong.- Kawroo *.Loo-Choo.- Matee f.- Warra.- R,6jeecoong.- Ko-eeroo.- Cho6sa. '- Choozackkee, or Sackkeechoo.- No6dee j.- Sata.- O6jee.- Sata sk6yoong.- H^rradat'chee.- Harradat'chee so6na.- Te6da.- Te6da sdgayoong §.- Teeda tettee.- Te^da agayoong.- No6nooto6sha.- Amasa.- A'mazac'kkee ||.- Moo, or Moondee.- Weejoong.- Weejee.- Tat'chee.- Keesiee.- Coodammee.* The kawroo is a small square stone excavated a little on the upper part, in which anoffering of rice is made. On the face of this stone is carved a variety of characters denoting,the rank, &c. of the person who makes the offering.f See Sentences in Part II.J See Sentences Nos. 2Q, 32, 33, and 37.§ See Sentences Nos. 108, log, and 110.II Amazackkee is a contraction of the words amasa, sweet, and sackkee, wine; the latteralways changing i into z when preceded by any other word. See wine, strong, weak, &c.I' 1 «Mi

English.To stick a thing in the groundTable, roundTail of a birdTake off the hat, to* Tattoo marks on the right arm———————— on the left armTea cup-, to break a——— pot - - » -———, in an octagon bucket——, the metal pot in the inside ofthe bucket———, the cover of a——•, the handle of a———, the ears of the bucket of aTear, to -———— a thing in piecesTears -Teeth———, to set on edgeTemple -Temples, humanTen - - -Thank you -That - -There -Thigh -Thirteen - -Thirty -This ....Thousand - --, tenThreeVOCABULARY OF THETateeing.Madooee.Dzoo.Hasseeoong.Oodeemaw.Tooga.Chawung.Wy'oong.Tacoo.Tacoo cee.Tacoo mee.Loo-Choo.Tacoo whfoota.Tlcoo tee.Tdcoo toodee.Y&yoong.Cheereetawng.N4da.H4 (an aspirate).Ha gibhee gish.Meea (Chinese).Tirra.Koomeegung.Joo (Loo-Choo); Too (Japan).Ka fooshee.A'ddee.Ic'kkee.Moomoo.Sanjoo.Sangbdcoo.Coodee.Mang.O'koo.* Tattoo marks will be found in Part II.Sang CLoo-Choo); Meetesee (Japan).English.Three sided figureThread, sewingThresh, to - -Throat -Throw to, a stone at a mark——————, away any thingThumbTie to, a knotTideTin - - -Tired, or fatiguedTobacco————— pouchTo-dayTo-morrowToe -Toe-nailTombTomb-stoneTongueTorn, part of any thingTouch, to -TownTray, or waiterTread, to - -. Tremble to, with coldTree———, branch of a——, Banyan———, with red and white flowersLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.- Sang cac'kkoo.- Eechoo *.- O6tchoong •(-.- Noodee J.- N&ging.- Oochung-ging.- Hooee Eebee.- Coonjoong.- K&dezee.- Sheedookdnnee.- Amuslieenoo.Loo-Choo.- ToMcco § (as in England).- Cooshee sat'chee, or foosa.- A'choo.- A'cha.- SMnna eebee (lit. foot finger).- Sh&nna thimmee. .- Hdka.- Cooroo ishee.- Stcha.- Y&dee tung.- S&yoong, or sit'choong.- Meeattoo, or Metto.- Chirreedeh.- Kooraming.- Koorooyoong.- Kee.- Eeda.- G^desee maroo kee.- Ho6yoo.* Eechoo. This word is used to denote tltread, silk, and riblon.•J- Ootchoong, or oochoong, signifies to work, to play, and to make.J Possibly this word implies the act of swallowing.§ The sound of this word is precisely the same as that of our tolacco. I have, therefore,spelt it in the same manner.

VOCABULARY OF THEEnglish. Loo-Choo.Tree, with large red flowers, which")„ i 7 , fDee-eego-kee.are called acrca oanna - - JTrowsers - Coo, or Hackkama.Turban worn by the lower order of} ^_|Sajee.the natives———— seven———— eight———— nineTygerVase, or urnVeinsVery well (speaking of health)—————— (well done, good)Victual or dinner box————, the drawers in itUglyUmbrellaUndress, toUntie, to, a knotUpper garment s-Water———, hot———, cold———, salt———, a large jar containing - Tooko6ee.- Meegoyoong.- Nee (Loo-Choo); tatesee (Japan).- Neejoo.- Hacoo.- Hacoo it'cheejoo.- Hacoo neejoo.- Hacoo sanjoo.- Hacoo sheenjoo, or sheehacoo.- Hacoo go6njoo, or goohacoo.- Hacoo roocoojoo.- Hacoo sit'cheejoo.- Hacoo fat'cheejoo.- Hacoo coojoo.- Toora.- Jeeshee.- Kajee.- Ooganjoo.- Eetshang.- Pintaw.- Joobackkoo.- Ootooro6sa.- Shassee kassa.- Ching hajeeing.- Ho6toochoong.- E4shaw, or Hoonta.- Meezee, or Me6see.- A'tsee me6zee, or atcheeroo.- Fe6sa me6zee, or feezeeroo- Spookoorasa meezee.Water tubEng-lish.Walk, to - - -————, or crawl as a butterfly————, slowWalking hand in hand, as the nativesWash, to - - -—————, or bathe—————, clothesWashing clothesWatch _ - - -We, or a fourth personWeather - -—————, foul or badWeb-footed bird-, beak of a- head-leg- two legs- tail- wingWell (lit. water's skin)WestWetWet, toWhat do you call this ?Wheel of a shipWhiskersWhisper, toWhistling——————, as a birdLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo,( Meez-ofwh6kee (cont. of meezee and( ofoowookee).At'choong.Seega'tong.Yawna eechoong.Hayee sit'choong.Teefeecha.A'rayoong.Indeetawoong.Ching arayoong.Ching aratee.Karahigh._Sasee noo quaw.Yootay.Tinsee, or tinchee.Yetinsee *, or tinchee.Yanna tinsee, or tinchee.Itchooma.Co6chee (lit. mouth).Makarajjee.Sha.Shandee.Majoo.H6nnee.Meezee ka.Ne6shee.Inneetee.I'ndeetaoong.No6ndeega-Coorooma.Binta.Monotitchoong.Feefee.Ho6sa.* See Sentence No. 109.

VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.English.WhiteWick of a candleWill you give meWind——— to come in——— to go out———, little———, greatWind, to, up a watch—————, a string round the fingerWinkingWine -—— glass——— kettle———, sweet———, strong———, weakWing of a bird——— feathers of a birdWipe, to, the faceWish, to, or bid good byeWrist (lit. neck of the arm)Write, toWriting-deskWrong in writing charactersWoman————, plain————, old————, handsome————,youngLoo-Choo.Sheero6sa.Skeeco6tshee.Wang yee quirree *.Kassee, or Kazzee.Kassee noochoong.Kassee eechoong.Kassee gua,We6sa kassee, or tayehfoo -f-.Feenoyoong.Karamachoong.Mee o6chee.Sackkee.Tamma sackka sit'chee.Dackkeezitza.r Amazack'kee, compounded of amasa{_ and sackkee.Choozackkee, or sdckkeechoo.Eeawzackkee, or sackkee ya.Hannay.Kee.So6sooyoong.W6ckkayoong.Tee noo co6bee.Katchoong j.She6koo.Nawshoong.Innago.Ootooroosa innago.Teesho6ee innago.Choorasa innago.Wockka innago.English.Wood of any kindYawning - -Year* -———, one -Years, eighteen, of age———, fourteen———, thirty———, twenty-fiveYellow - - -————, dark————, dirty or dingyYes ...Yesterday -Yoke, across the shoulders of portersYou (a second person)Young -———— woman -Yours -Loo-Choo.Tamoong.A'coobee.Ning.It'chee ning.Joo hat'chee.Jo6 shee.Sanjoo.Neejoo goo.Cheeroo.Kassa cheeroo, or aka cheeroo.Cheeroo dingee.Oo.Cheenoo.Saw.Ya (tay).WockTia.Wock'ka innago.Coora ya moong.* The year at Loo-Choo, according to Jeeroo's account, is divided into twelve months ofthirty days each, making in all 360 days, and every sixth year one month is intercalated.* See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.•f- This is probably the taefung (great wind of the Chinese, called by us tyfeoii), a. severegaic of wind in the China Sea.I See Sentence No. 73.

SENTENCES,ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO.NOTE.In the following Sentences the English is given before the Loo-Choo. NoSentence has been inserted the meaning of which was not distinctly ascertained;but it happened frequently that the precise import of some words in a SentenceWas not made out, and in order to enable the reader to judge to what extent thistook place, a literal translation of the words in each Sentence is given in the lastcolumn; and where a word occurs, the meaning of which is doubtful, an asteriskis put in its place.In the last column it will be observed that every verb having the termination oong, ung, &c. is translated as if it were the infinitive, although the sense,as denoted in the first column, points to another mood.Of Speaking.No. English. Loo-Choo.1. 1 speak - - Moonooyoong2. I speak, you hear - Moonooyoong, ya sit'choong,or Chickkee3. I speak to you - Ya, or ea mo&nooyoong,or wang. Ya too mo&nooyoong4. I speak Chinese - Wang Quantoong moonooyoong5. I cannot speak Chinese Wang Qu

No. English.12. I am going on board13. I came yesterday14. Go down there15. Come up here16. You go below17. To go out of a place18. To come into a place19. Tayin -j- returns20. To go in a boat toLoo-Choo to carryfish21. To go to sea in aboat to catch fish22. Where is Tayin goneS3. Tayin has gone tothe other ship topay his respects24. When all are drunkwe shall be permitted to go on shore25. I am going now, hewill come presently26. I am going on shoreto dinner27- I am going on boardto dinner28. When the ships depart to-morrow alltheLoo-Choo people will prayVOCABULARY OF THELoo-Choo.Timma ki eechoongCheenoo chungAmiinka ic'kkeeNoobootee cooYa oodee me6shawdee -Ya ka saut e6choong -Yaka saut choongTayin •}- choo-oongDoochoo timma eechoongeeo katammeeoongTimma eechoong ooshooeeo che6oongTayin makayee ga 6njaraTayin eechoong hoobooneeme£yoong Sheeno6maI'gnea weetee amaki moototeeyo6tooshaAtookarra wang eechoongatookarra eechoongWang amaki eechoongmoonookamoongWang ho6nee ki eechoong moonoo kamoongA'chahoonee nittee Doochoo mang hooneeo6cooyoongLiteral Translation.Boat * to go.Yesterday came.* there.Ascend here.You * *.* * * to go.* * * to come.The great man to come.Loo-Choo boat to go fishto carry.Boat to go sea fish to catch.Tayin * * *.Tayin to go large ship tosee *.All drunk shore **.By and by I to go, by andby to go.I shore to go I to eat.I ship * to go I to eat.To-morrow ship * Loo-Choo thousand ship *.Of Eating and Drinking.29- To drink wine - Sac'kkee noomoong - Wine to drink.t Ta-jin, in Chinese, signifies a great man; it is translated by Mr. Morrison histxcellewy.No. English.SO. Sweet wine31. I eat32. I never drink tea -SS. Tayin and you neverdrink wineS4. The parting glass -85. It is good (to eat) -36. It is bad, throw itaway37. It is tea, to drink38. To look at the sunthrough a glass39- I look, or I see40. The English gentleman is looking41. Stop, you shall lookpresently42. Clouds obscure thesun43. The branches of thetree obstruct thesight44. If a Loo-Choo woman should seeyou she will bealarmed45. Will you give methat46. Give me that pencil47. I gave him somepaperLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.Loo-Choo. Literal Translation.Amazac'kkeeSweet wine.Moonoo kamoong I to eatCha noodee narang Tea drinking never.Tayin ya sackkee noo- Tayin you wine drink nedee narangWockkaritteeCoodee masaNeesha is'kungMeezee treeingnoodeever.- Departing.- This good (to eat).Bad *.cha Water to boil tea drinking.Of Looking and Seeing.Teeda me^oong kagung Sun to see glass.MoonoomeeoongI'ngere tayin meesheeoongMatee, atookarra yameesheeoongKoomoo teeda oosooostangToomee kagung kee nookattakashee meerangDoochoo innago I'ngeremeeoong nachoongOf Giving.Wang yee quirreeI to see.English great man to lookat.Stop, by and by you to lookat.Clouds sun to cover over.Spy-glass trees branches tohide.Loo-Choo woman Englishto see, to cry.- I giving.Hoodee moot'choo - Pencil bring.A'ree nee queetang - Him * giving.

VOCABULARY OF THENo. English. Loo-CJioo. Literal Translation.48. By and by I will Atookarra qua gnee quee- By and by children * togive it to my chil- oong give.dren49- Shut this, or it50. Open this, or it51. Do you open this, orit52. Open this book53. Openyourwatch thatI may look at itOf Opening and Shutting'.AMttee ninjoong - Shutting to sleep.Akittee mirree, or aka- Opening it.tindeeAkatindee, or ya akirree Opening, or you opening.Ya sheeinootsee akirree You book opening.Akatindee karahigh mee- Opening watch to see.oongOf Losing and Finding.54. To lose a pencil - Ho6dee o6toochung - Pencil to lose.55. To find a pencil - Ho&dee to6matung - Pencil to find.56. Two small suns57. A few boys58. A few men59. A great many men60. A few books61. A great many books62. Six kinds of wine -63. Making a false step64. Vases made at Napa65. Sand spread on alevel plain onwhich water issprinkled for making saltOf Quantity.Tatsee teecla guaCoosa warrabeeIckkeeko6sa -Ic'kkeerassaSheemootsee sansateheeSheeinootsee toroTwo suns small.Few boys.Men few.Men many.Books few.Books many.Mooeeyroo noo sackkee * of wine.Of Making.Koonsinda dakatchee -Napa jefehee sco6teeSinna o6shoo sh&ee mashootatchoongNapa vases made.Sand sea *make.salt toLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.No. English. Loo-Choo. Literal Translation.66. Sing a song - Ya o6ta yo6shoong - You song to sing.67. Jeeroo sings well, or Jeeroo oota yooshoong Jeeroo song to singwith good taste cheecheegootoo * *.Of Bringing and Carrying.68. Bring your children Ya qua sauteecoo - You children bring.69. Bring fire here - Fee to6teecoo - Fire bring.70. This vessel carries Hoonee jeeshee katta- Ship vases *' Oonting.vases to Oonting mittee Oonting71. Boy, bring fire to I'rree fee to6teecoo to- Boy fire bring, tobaccolight my pipe bacco fookee smoke.72. Bring a cup of water Chawung n&ki meezee Teacup water *hereeeieecoo here.To rate a letter -74. Tayin is sketchingthe bridge75. Tayin sketches verywell76. To sketch a Loo-Choo temple77. Thank you78. How do you do79. Very well80. I am very sorryOf Writing and Sketching.Jee katchoong - A character to write.Tayin h&shee noo ee- Tayin bridge of to sketch.katchoongTayin yo6katchee choo- Tayin * sketchesrasa handsome.Do6choo me6a eekatch- Loo-Choo temple to sketch.oongOf Compliment,- K& fooshee- Yoo ky'moong- Ooganjoo- Oomootee shangcoomehOf Living or Residing.81. Tayin lives here - Tayin simmajoo coo - Tayin lives here.82. A man living in the Ickkeega simma awhfee A man living country.country88. I live on board the Wang hoonee gua sim- I ship small to livebrigmatong****.*.*.*-

i-'SLVOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.No. English. Loo-Choo. Literal Translation.Of Burning and Scalding.84. Fire will burn you Fee yaddee - - Fire burns.85. Water will scald you Me6see yaddee - Water burns.86. Scalding oneself with Meezee fidgeroosa yoo Water hot * burns,hot water yaddeeOf Enquiry and Reply.87. What is the name of Noondeega coora na - What is this name,this88. The name of this is Co6ra ga na ya89- How many children Qui eecootiegahave you90. How old are you or Eecootseegathey91. I am fourteen years Joosheeof age92. I am eighteen years Joohatclieeof age93. —• twenty-five, &c. NeejoogooMiscellaneous.94. To boil potatoes - Mootajeeing95. I am very busy - Yoo jo6natan- This * name *._ * * *__ * * *_- Fourteen.- Eighteen.- Twenty-five.- Potatoes to boil._ * * *96. The sting of a snake Haboo cootee sheenoong Snake sting to kill,will kill97- Sucking milk at the Chee nooma chee - Milk * breast,breast08. A child drinking milk Chee no6dee warrabee - Milk drinking child,at the breast99- A child kissing its W&rrabee umma coochee Child mother mouth kissmotherspootee ing.100. A woman leaning Innago k&katong eeld - Woman to lean anchor,on an anchor101. A live shell-fish will Amang it'chchawng coo- Shell-fish to be alive to bite,bite yoongNo. English.102. This flower has apleasant smell103. This flower has nosmell104. Loo-Choo womenare not veryhandsome105. The sootitsee (sagotree) pricked me106. To plant potatoes107. Drunk, I vomit108. After sunset it iscool109. When the sunshines, and thereare no clouds, itis fine weather110. The sun sets at sixo'clock111. The horse fell down,and the tayinbroke his finger112. After seven yearswe wash thebonesand put them intoa vase113. Without any flesh114. The people of Loo-Choo I shall neverforget115. You will soon forget them116. Twelve hours makeone dayLoo-Choo. Literal Translation.Fanna masa kabasha - Flower sweet smell.Fanna nang kabasha - Flower no smell.Doochoo innago fwhoocoo Loo-choo woman greatoorung many *.Sootitseewangtseechoong Sootitsee I * *.yateeMoo jee hootee ee- Potatoes ground * *.yoongWeetee moonoo hach- Drunk I vomit.oongTeecla sagatee seedasha Sun setting cool.Te6da tettee, koomoo Sunshine, clouds none, finenang, yaytinchee weather.Roocoo twitfchee teeda Six hours sun to set.sagayoongMa tawrittee tayin noo Horse fell down, tayin'seebee ootee finger broke.Sitchee ning, cootsee Seven years' bones washingaratee je&shee ittee vase putting in.Shishee ning - - Flesh none.Doochoo noo choo sibit- Loo-choo people rememteeyootoosha ber * *.Sibittee wasa - Remember bad.Joo nee twit'chee, it'chee Ten two hours, one day.nit'chee .0 1 III,,

VOCABULARY OF THENo. English. Loo-Choo. Literal Translation.117. Thirty days make Sanjoo nit'chee, it'chee Thirty days one monthone moon, or gwautseemonth118. One year consists It'chee ning, joo nee One year, ten two months,of twelve months gwautseeEnglish.1 One2 Two3 Three4 Four5 Five6 Six7 SevenLoo-Choo.It'cheeNee, or gneeSangSheeGoo, or goRo6koSt'cheeNUMERALS.Characters. Japan.———- Teetsee, or te— - Tatsee, or ta— Meetsee, or mee* E6otsee, or yooI'ttitseeMo&tseeNannatsee8 Eight Fatfchee, or kwat'chee /\^ Eeyatsee9 Nine Coo s \s Ko&nnitsee3.4.5.6.7.8.9.The Kowung, or KingThe Pochin ta foo, or PrinceThe Chief of the Paychins who attended the shipThe second PaychinThe third do.The fourth do.His eldest sonHis friend (an elderly man)The fifth PaychinThe sixth do. -The first LinguistThe second LinguistHis wife -One of the junior PaychinsThe teacher (an old man)His eldest son -A boy - - -One of tHe principal attendants of thePochin ta fooAnotherLOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.NAMES OF PERSONS.SMng fwee.Shang pung-fwee.£ Ookooma Mowchowshooa.Madayra SMyoon.I'ssacha S&ndoo.Je6ma Tsi-se-eu.Maatsee Tsi-chee.Oohoomee Chinchawhee.I'ssecha Hackkeeboocoo.Jeeroo Je6da.M&dera K&wsheeoong.A'nya Toonshoonfa.O6shee.Yama Too.Y&ckkabee O6meeje6roo.Yackkabee O6mee-nee whaw.O'seejee.> Madam Bdshee.Eevaroo.10 Ten Joo, or dzoo T Too10.Both sets of these numerals are in common use at Loo-Choo, though itwould not perhaps be correct to apply them to the same word, as I never recollecthaving heard a native say " itchee sheemootsee," one book, or " teetsee twitchee,'1one hour, but always " teetsee sheemootsee," one book, and " itchee twitchee,'1one hour. I at first imagined " teetsee, tatsee,1' &c. were ordinals, but I havesince found from Captain Broughton1s Voyage that they bear a great resemblanceto the numerals of Japan, and as such I have inserted them.The characters, of which the above are copies, were written by a native.* The o in this word is to be pronounced as the diphthong oa in boat.CoreaPekinFokienChinaChusanEnglandNAMES OF PLACES.- C6ray.- Peking.- Fotchien.- Quantoong,- Cho6san.- I'ngeree.

VOCABULARY OF THEThe island of Loo-Choo - - Loo-Choo, or Do6-Choo.The town of Napakiang - - Napa ummeatto.The high distant islands seen from ")_.. J-Amakirreema.Napa JThe Sugar Loaf Island - - Eegoos eecoondee.Japan - - - Niphon.Canton - Canton.LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.THE NINE ORDERS OFPAYCHINS, OR CHIEFS,WHO ABE DISTINGUISHED BY THE COLOUR OF THEIB BONNETS, CALLED HATCHEEMATCHEE.NAMES OF THE DAYS OF THE MOON FROM NEWTO FULL.1. Chee tatchee.2. Hadjee mee nitchee.3. Hadjee mee san nit'chee.4. Hadjee mee noo ka.5. Hadjee mee goo nit'chee.6. Hadjee mee roocoo nit'chee.7. Hadjee mee sit'chee nit'chee.8. Hadjee mee fatchee nit'chee.9. Hadjee mee coo nit'chee.10. Yooka.11. Joo it'chee nit'chee.12. Joo nee nit'chee.13. Joo san nit'chee.14. Joo yooka.15. Joo goo nit'chee.1st. Ching neestchoo noo Hat'cheemat'chee2nd. A'cadjee noo Hat'chee mat'chee3rd. O'jee noo Hat'chee mat'chee4th. Moola sat'chee noo Hat'cheemat'chee5th. Cheeroo dinjee noo Hat'cheemat'chee6th. Cheeroo sy ya noo Hat'cheemat'chee7th. Chiddeeming noo Hat'cheemat'chee8th. Akasa noo Hat'chee mat'chee -9th. O'sa noo Hat'chee mat'cheeI A pink ground with spots, circles, and•j diamonds, of black, yellow, blue,I. white, and green.f A pink ground with spots, &c. of redX and yellow, blue and black.f A green ground with spots, &c. of red,X yellow, blue, and black.A pink or light purple ground, withspots of the same colour.A dingy yellow ground, with spots ofthe same colour.A bright yellow ground withoutspots.•j A red ground without spots.A red ground without spots.A green ground without spots.The attendants of the chiefs wear a red Hatchee matchee of a coarser texture.

VOCABULARY OF THELOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.TATTOO MARKSON THE AEMS OF SOME OF THE NATIVES OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.NAMES OF THE HOURS.This man hadnot any markon the leftarm.Oodeemaw.Right arm.Right arm. Left arm.O6deemaw. tooga.4.Right arm. Left arm.One hour, or one o'clockTwo hours, or twoThreeFourFiveSixSevenEightNineTenElevenTwelveIt'chee twit'chee.Nee twit'chee.Sang twit'chee.Shee twit'chee.Goo twit'chee.Roocoo twit'chee.Sit'chee twit'chee.Fat'chee twit'chee.Coo twi'tchee.Joo twit'chee.Joo it'chee twit'chee.Joo nee twit'chee.c The day.The night.The day at Loo-Choo, i. e. between sunrise and sunset, is divided into sixhours, as is also the night.Co6dee O6demaw.tooga.The four men, whose arms were marked in the above manner, were youngand of the lower order, probably fishermen. It appeared to have been done bypuncturing the skin, and staining it with Indian ink in the manner practised byour seamen.The above marks are quite as large as the originals; they were on the innerpart of the fore arm, close up to the elbow joint. Some were marked on botharms, others only on the right, but we did not observe any who had them onlyon the left arm.

COMPARISONBETWEEN THEJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.

COMPARISONNOTE.BETWEEN THEJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.The following comparisons are given, with the view of pointing out as nearlyas circumstances will permit what resemblance there is between the languages ofthe islands of Loo-Choo, Niphon, or Japan, and Insu, lying in the Japan Sea,and which by some voyagers have been considered the same language.In the first comparison, viz. that between the languages of Loo-Choo andJapan, the Japanese words are extracted from the translation of Thunberg'sVoyage to Japan, printed in London 1795, 2d edit. vol. iii.In the second, viz. that between Loo-Choo and Insu, the Insu words aretaken from Broughton's Voyage.A third comparison is given between the languages of Loo-Choo, Niphon,and Insu, together with the two sets of Numerals in use at Loo-Choo, theJapanese from Thunberg, and the Insu from Broughton.It ought to be recollected that as Mr. Thunberg was a foreigner, and wrotein a different language from that in which the Loo-Choo words have been recorded, a difference of sound may be suspected between them when no materialdifference really exists between the two languages.The letter u has been substituted in the spelling of the Japanese words forthe » used by Thunberg.English.AllAnchorAngry-Answer, toArmArrowAttendantBadBake, toBare (naked)BedBellyBend, toBirdBirdcageBitterBloodBlow, up the fire, toBoatBoil, toBoneBookBowBranch of a treeBrassBreadthJapanese *.- Mei- Ikari- Fandatsuru- Fento sura- Ude- Ja- Sairio- Warikakuse- Jaku- Haguru- Nedokuri- Stabara- Oru- Tori- Tori no su- Nigaka- Tji,orKjets- Fuku- Temma- Fagiru- Fone- Somots- Jumi- Jeda- Sintju- JakohabaLoo-Choo.- Innea.- Eki.- Neetsa.- Aree ga aanyoong.- Teenoo.- Eea.- Eeree.- Neesha, or Wasa.- Irree-chang.- Harraka.- Coocha,- Watta.- Tammeeoong.- Hotoo.- Hotoo coo.- Injassa.- Chee.- Footchoong.- Timma,- Tajeeing.- Cootsee.- Sheemootsee.- Yoomee.- Kee.- Cheejackkoo.- Habba.* From Thunberg's Voyage.

COMPARISON BETWEEN THEJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.English.BreastBreathe, toBridgeBrotherBucketButtonCalf of the legCandleCandlestickCannonCarry away, toCatCharcoalCheeksChildCircleCastle, or tower-Climb, toClothCock -ColdCompassColourCome, toCoolCopperCount, toCowCreep, toCup, teaDarkDaughterDeepDig, toDieDiceJapanese.. • Mone• Ikitsuku -Fas, bas• KiodaiTango ---__BotanStosoneRosokuRosoks tattiIssibiaMootsuMioSumiHogeta, foKodomaMaruSiro, soNagoruSo kingOtoriSamka kangFobariIroKuruSususiAkaganniKansjuUsFauTiawangMimeMusme, gogoFukaiFoilSinnoru sinuSaiiLoo-Clioo-- Moonee.- Itcheeshoong.- Hashee.- Weekee.- Tagoo.- Kogannee.- Koonda.- Daw.- Soo-coo.- Isheebeea.- Mootchee eechoong,- Mia.- Chacheejing.- Hoo.- Warrabee.- Maroodair. •- Eegooscoo.- Noobooyoong.- Ching.- Woo tooee.- Feesa.- Karahigh.- Eeroo eeeroo.- Choong.- Seedasha.- Acoogannee.- Oohawkoo-oong.- Mee ooshee.- Hawyoong.- Chawung.- Coorasing.- Innago oongua.- Fookassa.- Ooehoong.- Nintoong.- Sheego roocoo.English,DoorDogDrinkDrink, toDrunk, to beDuck, tameDry, toEarth, theEarEastEggElbowEmpty, toExchange, toFaceFall, toFanFarewellFatherFatFeatherFin, a finFingerFind, toFireFishFishFishing netFlag, aFlowerFly, aFly, toFriendFootFirewoodJapanese^- To -- Inu- Nomimono- Nomu- Namoji jeikfsari- Afiru- Karruru- Tji dsi- Mimi- Figasi- Tamago- Ude, fisi- Akwuru- Kajuru- Tsera- Tawareta- Oge- Kingo, nigoserru- Tete, toto- Kojuru - .-' Tori no fa- Jokofiri fire- Jubi- Midassu- Fi, finoko- Iwo, sakkana- Iwo tsuru- Ami- Hato- Fanna- Hai- Toobu- Ftoobai- Assi- TakigiLoo-CIuoo.- Hashirree.- Ing-- Noomoo.- Noomoong.- Weeoong.- Afeeroo.- Karachoong.- Jee.- Mimmee.- Fingassee.- Cooga.- Tenoo feejee.- Karashoong.f Kayra (fans); toexchange\ fans at Loo-Choo.-' Steera.- Tawshoong.- Ojee.- Wockkatee.- Shoo.- Quaitee.- Tooee noo hannee.- Hannay.- Eebee.- Toomatung.- Fee.- Eeo.- Eeo kakeeoong.- Sheebee.- Hata.- Fanna.- Hayeh.- Toobeeoong.- Eedooshee.- Shanna.- Tamoong.

English.FullGirlGirdleGive, toGo down toGo up toGoat, heGoldGoodGood manGood for nothingHaii-HammerHandHandkerchiefHatHeadHeadacheHeartHear, toHeavensHeavyHen, aHide, toHipHole, or cavityHornHorseHotHouseInkInkstandIronKeyKill, toCOMPARISON BETWEEN THEJapanese.Loo-Choo.- MitsMeetchetee.- KomusimeTackkee.- Skimmawas sansakagi - Obee.- Fureru, jaruQueeoong.- Ururu, iru - - Oorittee coo.- AguruNoobooyoong.- JagiWoo feeja.- SinChing.- JukkaChoorasa.- Jukka fitoYookachoo.- JonakaMaconarang.- KamiKurrazzee.- KanatsutjiGooshung.- TeeKee.- Te no goiTeesadgee.- KasaKassa.- KubiBoosee.- Attamanna, itama, dutso Seebooroo yadong.- Kokurro, sing singnoso Nacoo.- KikfSitchoong, or skitchoong.- TenTing.- Omoka, omotaka Boosa.- Mendori, metori Meetooee.- KaksuMeerang.- MomoGammacoo.. AnnaAnna.- Tsunno, kakuStinnoo.- Aki umaMa.- AtskaAtteesa.- JeYa, or katchee.- Sum, sumiSimmee.- Susumi hakeSimmee shee.- Tets, furoganni Titzee.- KagiQuaw.- KorossufSheenoung, or Koora-(. shoong.LiquorLook to, or seeLooking-glassLong, or lengthLose, toLive, toLacker, toMan (homo) -Man (vir)MastMatMatch (fire-stick)Measure, toMew, to (like a cat)MilkMonkeyMoon———, fullMotherMudNail, fingerNakedNameJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.English.KissKiss, toKnifeKneeKneel, toKnot, aLaugh, toLearning, or studying Letter, or character - Umakutji, or Kwut jisuUmakutji suruHakaFisa, fisa no sarraFisatatsuruFimmoWarauNarau, KickuMoisi, tsi mousiLift to, a thing - MotjiagaruLight to, a pipe Lip- - Fitobusu, fitomusuTsuba- Sakki- Miru- Kagami- Nagai - •- Song suru, makuruInotjiMakie saruMomo- Otoko- Hobasi- Tattami- Skedakki, skegi- Siakf, monosasa- Neko, naku- Tjitjitji- Saru, salu- Tsuki . ' -- Mangets- Fasa kasa- Noro- Tsume, jassuru- Hadaka- NaLoo-Choo.Sheemirree.Coochee spootee,.Seego.Stinsee.Shumma gitcheeoong.Coonja cootchee.Worrayoong.Cootooba.Jee.Moochoong.Sheeoong. .Seeba.fSackkeedia, or Samtchoo\ (Chinese).Meeoong, or meeing.Kagung.Nagdsa.Ootoochung.Simmatong.Nooyoong.Choo.Ickkeega.Hasseeda.Mooshooroo, or Hatung.Kaw.Gaujee hackkiyoong.Nachoong deeoong.Chee.Saroo.Stchay.Oostitchee, or maroo.Umma.Dooroo.Thimmee.Harraka.Na.

eOMPARISON BETWEEN THEJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.NavelNeckNeedleNightN ipplesNod, toNorthNoseNostrilsOffer, toEngiis7t.OldOpen, toOverturn, toPaperPencilPhysicianPinch, toPipe (tobacco)Play to, with dicePloughPlough, toPour in, toPowder (gun)PregnantPress, toPriestPush, toQuarrel, toQuickRainRain, toRainbowRatRead, toRiceJapanese.- Vosso, feso- Kwabi, nodor ,„=-, .,-, ,,-- Fari- Josari, joru- Tjibusa- Gatting sum- Kitta- Fanna- Fanna nosu -Loo-Choc.Whoosoo.Goobee.Hayee skittee.Yooroo.Chee.Najeechoong.Cheeta.Honna.Honnakee.fOkuru, agurujasiagu-1- •{ >Ozagadee.(_ ru, nedoaskuru - J- Tassijori, furuje furuke- Akuru- Tawaruru- Kami- Fuda- Isa- Nesumu- Kiseru- Sugoroko utsu- Seri, seribetta, tsuku tauts*- Togajassu- Tsugu- Jenso- Mimotji, farami- Siburu- Boos- Sukikakaru, Ijou- Faijo, faijaki- Ame- Ame no fiuru- Nisi- Nisumi» Jomu- KomeTeeshooee.Akeeoong.Kooroobashoong.Kabee.Hoodee.Ishsha.Katcheemeeoong.Shirree.Sheegoroocoo ochoong.Sitchee.Sitchoong.Irreeing.Eenshoo.Kassee jeetaung.Sheetskeeoong.Bodzee.Kooroobashoong,Titskoong.Hayee.Amee.Amee fooyoong.Noo, oojee.Ack a-sa.Yoomoong.Coomee.English.Rice, boiledRide, to, a horseRing (finger)RootRopeRoundRow, to, in a boatRun, toSailSaltSalt waterSalute, toSandScrape, toScrewSeaSealSee, toSeedSeparate, toSerpentSew, toShallowShave, toShellShipShoeShouldersSickSilkSilverSing, toSister (eldest)SleepSleep, toJapanese.MesNoruIbiganniNeTsuna no naMamiRoosuAjiubuHooSiwoSiwo mis usiwoResuruTsunnaKusaguNesiUmeFang hang ingjoM iruTannaSaraKutjinawa hebiNo, noiAssai assakaSoruKaiFuneKwutsuKata- Kutta.(Itami mono, bioki monono") fYadong.^ jamai monoKinnoGinUtauMusme aneNurNuruLoo-Clioo.- Umbang.- Manayoong.- Eebee gannee.Wee-ee.- Chinna.- Marroosa.- Coojee.Hay ay sitchoong.- Foo.- .Mashoo.- Spookarasa meezee.Kameeoong.- Sinna.- Sajoong.- Jirree.- Ooshoo.- Ing, or fang.Meeoong.- Ni.Wockkayoon g.- Haboo.- Nawyoong, or noayoong.Assassa.- Sooyoong.- Oosheemaw.- Hoonee.- Sabock.- Eechoo.- Jing.- Ootashoong, or ootayoong.- Oni.- Nintee.- Ninjoong.

COMPARISON BETWEEN THEJAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.English.SlowSmallSmellSmell, toSmokeSmoke, toSmoke tobacco, toSneeze, toSnore, toSnuffSourSouthSpeak, toSpectaclesSpiderSpittleSpit, toSpoonSquareStand up, toStarsStoneStrike, toSugarSunSunsetSunriseSwallow, toSweetSwim, toThighThreadThrow, toThumbTigerJapanese.- Sisukamai, jojajora- Ko, komaka- Nivi, niwoi- Kusamu- Honoo- -Kernel!- Tabaco, nomu- Aksingu- Ibikikaku- Fanna, tabak, kagi- Suika- Minamii Monoiu, musmasu, ju,~)Loo-Ckoo.Yoona, yawna.Coosa.Kabbasha.Kannoung, kashashoong.Kinsee.Footchoong.Tobacco, footchoong.Honna feeoong.Nintoong.Spachee, honna, tobSeesa.Whfa, or fa.- < >Moonooyoong.(, moosuru - - J- M eganni, fanna, meganni Meekagung.Kwumo- Subakki- Subakki, hawk- Saisi- Sikaku- Okiru- Fosi- I si iwa- Wutsu, utsu, tataku- Satto- Fi, nitji- Fi no iri- Fino, de, fino, agaru- Nomikomu- Arnaka, amai- Ojugu- Momo, solomomo- Ito- Naguru- Ojajubi, ojubi- Tora- Cooba.- Simpaee.- Shnpayooiig.- Kaa.Kackkoo.- Tatteeoong.- Foosliee.- Ishee.- Rejeecoong.- Sata.. Teeda.- Teeda sagayoong.- Teeda agayoong.- Noonootoosha.- Amasa.Weejoong.- Moomoo.- Eechoo.- Nagmg.- Hooee eebee.- Toora.English.TinTongueToothTouch, toTowerTownTrembleuglyUmbrellaVeinWake, toWaken, toWalk, toWarmWashWatchWaterWater tubWeather, fineWeather, foulWell, aWestWetWet, toWheelWick of a candleWindWind up, toWingWink, toWoodWriteWriting deskYearYoungJapanese.- Susu- Sta, sita- Jea- Kamau, kakaru, ateru- To- Matji, sotomatji- Fururu- Kisannai- Fisasi- Susi- Okiteoru- Okusu- Ita- Nakka, atska- Arau- Tokei- Mis- Furo- Jukka, fiuri, jui teng- Warn fiuri- Jgawa- Nis- Naroru- Narassu- Kuruma- Suku, saku- Kase- Sutsumu- Toobu fanne- Manaku- Tagi- Kaku- Fikidassi- Fosi- Wakai___-_-_--__----_-------------------Loo-Choo.Sheedookannee.Stcha.Ha.Sayoong, or Sitchoong.Eegooscoo.Mecatto, metto.Koorooyoong.Ootooroosa.Shassee kassa.Kajee.Ooking.Oocatee.Atchoong.Attesa.Arayoong.Karahigh.Meezee.Meezofwokee.Yeetinchee, or tinsee.Yannatinchee, or tinsee.Meezee ka.Neeshee.Inneetee.Indeetaoong.Coorooma.Skec cootshee.Kassee.Feenoyoong.Hannay.Meeoochee.Tamoong.Katchoong.Sheekoo.Ning.Wockka.

COMPARISON BETWEEN, &c.COMPARISONNUMERALS.BETWEEN THELANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO AND INSU,AN ISLAND IN THE JAPAN SEA.12845678910Japan.Stozee -StatzeMitzee -Yeatze -Idotzee -Nitzee -NanatzeeloseeKokonitzYooSheeneapTooLiepEenepAsheakEwanArrawanToopishLepishWannaInsu*.- Stitz- Statz- Mitz- Yeatze- Itseitzy- Nitz- Nanatzy- Yeatz- Kokonitz- Too- Itchee- Nee- Sang- Shee- Goo- Roocoo- Stchee- Fatchee- Coo- Joo* From Broughton's Voyage.Loo-Choo.- Teetsee, tee.- Tatsee, ta.- Meetsee, mee.- Eotsee, yoo.- Ittitsee.- Mootsee.- Nannatsee.- Eyatsee.- Koonnitsee.- Too.English.Come hereTo walkTo enquire the nameany thingA shipA bowAn arrowThe beardThe teethA manA womanFish netTobacco pipeWaterTo drinkA bookThe fingerThe thumbThe thighThe armThe middle fingerPaperA dogA catA childThe footThe chin- Arkee- Appeassof) y TambeneInsu *.- Penzy, or Foonil.- Koo- Ay- Creak - -- Meemack- Oikyo- Meanako- Ya- Tsheeree- Wakha- Horopsee- Shoomootza- Yewbee- O yewbee- Momo- Oondee- Nagayewbee- Kame- Enoo- Necko- Vasasso- AsseeOlongyseLoo-CCung coo.Atchoong.Noondeega.Hoonee.Yoomee.Eea.Feejee.Ha.Ickkeega.Innago.Sheebee.Shirree.Meezee.Noomoong.Sheemootsee.Eebee.Hoee eebee.Moomoo. ,Teenoo.Nackkaeebee.Kabee.Ing.Mia.Warrabee.Shanna.Ootooga.* From Broughton's Voyage.II

COMPARISON BETWEEN, &c.The earYesNoHairA boatTeaSugarTobaccoJiinglisli.Insu.- Meemee . -- O- Ny- Karnu- Timma- Tcha- Sado- TabaccoLoo-Choo.- Mimmee.- Oo.- Oongba.- Kurrazzee.- Timma.- Cha.- Sata.- Tobacco.COMPARISONBETWEEN THELANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO, JAPAN, AND INSU.EnglisJi.To walkA shipA bowAn arrowThe fingerThe teethA manA fish netA knifeAn oarWaterTo drinkA bookThe thumbThe thighThe armPaperA dogA catA childThe lipsThe footThe earThe hairA boatTeaSugarTobaccoJapanese*.- Ita- Fune- Jumi- Ja- Jubi- Ha- Otoko- Ami- liaka- Ro- Mis- Nomu- Somots- Ojajubi, ojubi- Momo, soto moino- Ude- Kami- Inu- Mio, neko- Kodoma- Tsuba- Assi- Mimi- Kami- Temma- Tsjaa- Satto- TabakoLoo-Cftoo.AtchoongHooneeYoomeeEeaEebeeHaIckkeegaSheebeeSeegoWayacooMeezeeNoomoongSheemootseeHooee eebeeMoomooTeenooKabeeIngMiaWarrabeeSeebaShannaMimmeeKurrazzeeTimmaChaSataTobaccoInsu -f-.- Appeass.- Penzy, or fbonil.- Koo.- Ay.- Askippi, yewbee.- Meemack.- Oikyo.- Ya.- Magiddee.- Kanzee.- Wakha.- Horopsee.- Shomotza.- O yewbee.- Momo.- Oondee.- Kame.- Enoo.- Neckoi- Vassasso.- Koodge.- Assee.- Meemee.- Karnu.- Timma.- Tcha.- Sado.- Tabacco.I* From Thunberg's Voyage.•]- From Broughton's Voyage.II

WORDS OBTAINED FROM THE INHABITANTS OF THE WESTCOAST OF COREA.NoWaterA pipeHairEyesMouthNoseHandBeardTongueEarTeeth* Tree* GrassEnglish.Corean.Poodong.Bool.Dewton.Bodee.Doon.Jeep.Ko.So-an.Shee-om.Chay.Quee.Jee.Phang na moo.Phee.English.Corean.* Good Hota.* Earth K,hool.* Knife Khul.JacketChouksa.Trowsers Choongay.ShoePo schien.Stockings, or boots Hung inn.Tobacco pouch - Samb-jee.Rice (food) Pa-ap.FanPootsa.StoveTok.White hat Pan-a-ee.Black hat Kat.A cock.Tac.* These five words have the h so strongly aspirated that it was rarely we could pronouncethem to the satisfaction of the natives.Their language, upon the whole, is not unpleasing, and it has none of the harsh Chinesesounds. The natives have a remarkable facility in imitating our sounds, and they in generalspeak in a very loud tone of voice.THET. DAVISON, Lombard-street,Whitefriars, London.I